SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module V300R003
Configuration Guide
Issue
04
Date
2007-11-30
Part Number
31500234
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Copyright © 2007 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Managing the License................................................................................................................1-1 1.1 Overview of the License.................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 License Principles...........................................................................................................................................1-2 1.3 Configuration Example of the License Application........................................................................................1-3 1.4 Configuring the License Server.......................................................................................................................1-6 1.5 Configuring the ESN.......................................................................................................................................1-7
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal ...............................................................................2-1 2.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port...............................................................................2-3 2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Port............................................................................2-7 2.4 Configuring the Terminal Through the Outband Management Channel .....................................................2-12 2.5 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband Management Channel.........................................................2-15 2.6 Configuring the Terminal Through SSH.......................................................................................................2-19
3 Getting Started With CLI..........................................................................................................3-1 3.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 CLI Characteristics..........................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2.1 Command Modes...................................................................................................................................3-3 3.2.2 Intelligent Matching...............................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.3 Edit Characteristics................................................................................................................................3-6 3.2.4 Interaction Characteristics......................................................................................................................3-7 3.2.5 Parameter Prompt...................................................................................................................................3-7 3.2.6 Display Characteristics...........................................................................................................................3-8 3.2.7 Saving and Showing History Commands...............................................................................................3-9 3.2.8 CLI Error Prompts................................................................................................................................3-10 3.3 Basic Operations Through CLI.....................................................................................................................3-10 3.3.1 Obtaining Online Help Information.....................................................................................................3-11 3.3.2 Enabling Interactive Command Execution...........................................................................................3-13 3.3.3 Enabling CLI Trap Reporting..............................................................................................................3-13 3.3.4 Switching Terminal Language.............................................................................................................3-14 3.3.5 Setting System Time............................................................................................................................3-15 3.3.6 Setting System Name...........................................................................................................................3-16 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
i
Contents
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide 3.3.7 Setting Terminal Type..........................................................................................................................3-16 3.3.8 Setting Timeout Exit Time...................................................................................................................3-17 3.3.9 Locking the Terminal...........................................................................................................................3-18 3.3.10 Clearing Terminal Screen...................................................................................................................3-18 3.3.11 Showing Version................................................................................................................................3-19 3.3.12 Showing CPU Usage..........................................................................................................................3-19 3.3.13 Showing the Memory Usage..............................................................................................................3-20 3.3.14 Testing Network State........................................................................................................................3-20
4 Configuring the Network Management................................................................................4-1 4.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.3 Configuration Example of an Outband NMS..................................................................................................4-3 4.4 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS....................................................................................................4-5 4.5 SNMP Agent Configuration............................................................................................................................4-8 4.5.1 Setting the SNMP Version.....................................................................................................................4-9 4.5.2 Adding a Community Name and Setting Its Read/Write Authorities..................................................4-10 4.5.3 Enabling Trap Sending.........................................................................................................................4-11 4.5.4 Setting the IP address of a Destination Host of Traps..........................................................................4-11 4.5.5 Setting the Source Interface for Sending Traps....................................................................................4-12 4.5.6 Setting the System Contact Information..............................................................................................4-13 4.5.7 Setting the System Location Information.............................................................................................4-13 4.5.8 Configuring an SNMP V3 User...........................................................................................................4-14 4.5.9 Configuring an SNMP V3 Group.........................................................................................................4-15 4.5.10 Configuring an SNMP MIB View.....................................................................................................4-16 4.5.11 Configuring the Local SNMP Engine ID...........................................................................................4-17 4.5.12 Enabling the Handshake Function between the MA5600 and the N2000.........................................4-18 4.5.13 Setting the Handshake Interval..........................................................................................................4-19 4.6 Configuring the IP Address of the Outband NMS Interface.........................................................................4-20 4.7 Configuring an NMS Route..........................................................................................................................4-21 4.8 Configuring the IP Address of the Inband NMS Interface............................................................................4-22
5 Configuring the Log Host.........................................................................................................5-1 5.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Configuration Example of a Log Host............................................................................................................5-2 5.3 Configuring a Log Host...................................................................................................................................5-3 5.4 Deleting a Log Host........................................................................................................................................5-4 5.5 Deactivating a Log Host..................................................................................................................................5-5 5.6 Querying Logs.................................................................................................................................................5-6
6 Managing Users..........................................................................................................................6-1 6.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Adding a User Profile......................................................................................................................................6-2 6.3 Adding a User..................................................................................................................................................6-5 ii
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Contents
6.4 Modifying the User Attributes........................................................................................................................6-7 6.4.1 Modifying the Profile Bound with a User..............................................................................................6-7 6.4.2 Modifying a User Level.........................................................................................................................6-8 6.4.3 Changing a User Password.....................................................................................................................6-9 6.4.4 Modifying the Permitted Reenter Number...........................................................................................6-10 6.4.5 Modifying the Appended Information.................................................................................................6-11 6.5 Disconnecting an Online User.......................................................................................................................6-12 6.6 Deleting a User..............................................................................................................................................6-13
7 Managing the Device.................................................................................................................7-1 7.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Setting the Description of a Shelf...................................................................................................................7-3 7.3 Resetting the Control Boards..........................................................................................................................7-3 7.4 Adding a Service Board Offline......................................................................................................................7-4 7.5 Confirming a Service Board............................................................................................................................7-6 7.6 Deleting a Service Board.................................................................................................................................7-6 7.7 Resetting a Service Board...............................................................................................................................7-7 7.8 Prohibiting a Service Board............................................................................................................................7-7 7.9 Managing a Subboard......................................................................................................................................7-8
8 Configuring the Remote User Authentication.....................................................................8-1 8.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................8-2 8.2 Related Concepts.............................................................................................................................................8-2 8.2.1 Introduction to AAA..............................................................................................................................8-2 8.2.2 Introduction to RADIUS........................................................................................................................8-3 8.2.3 Introduction to SSH................................................................................................................................8-3 8.3 Configuration Example of Remote User Authentication................................................................................8-4 8.4 Configuring RADIUS.....................................................................................................................................8-7 8.4.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................8-7 8.4.2 Specifying the RADIUS Server Template.............................................................................................8-8 8.4.3 Setting the IP Address and Port Number of a RADIUS Server.............................................................8-9 8.4.4 Setting the Shared Key of the RADIUS Server...................................................................................8-10 8.4.5 Setting the Response Timeout Interval of a RADIUS Server..............................................................8-11 8.4.6 Setting the Maximum Retransmit Count of RADIUS Request Packets..............................................8-12 8.4.7 Setting the RADIUS Server Type........................................................................................................8-13 8.4.8 Configuring an NAS Port and Its ID Format.......................................................................................8-14 8.4.9 Setting the Format of User Name Sent to a RADIUS Server..............................................................8-14 8.5 Configuring AAA..........................................................................................................................................8-16 8.5.1 Configuring an Authentication Scheme...............................................................................................8-16 8.5.2 Creating a Domain...............................................................................................................................8-17 8.5.3 Specifying the RADIUS Server Template...........................................................................................8-18 8.5.4 Specifying the Authentication Scheme................................................................................................8-19 8.6 Configuring SSH...........................................................................................................................................8-21 8.6.1 Creating the Local RSA Key Pair........................................................................................................8-21 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
iii
Contents
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide 8.6.2 Configuring the SSH User Public Key.................................................................................................8-22 8.6.3 Configuring an SSH User.....................................................................................................................8-24
9 Configuring the VLAN ............................................................................................................9-1 9.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................9-3 9.2 Configuration Example of a Standard VLAN.................................................................................................9-5 9.3 Configuration Example of a Smart VLAN..................................................................................................... 9-5 9.4 Configuration Example of a MUX VLAN......................................................................................................9-7 9.5 Configuration Example of the Super VLAN...................................................................................................9-9 9.6 Creating a VLAN..........................................................................................................................................9-13 9.7 Configuring the VLAN Attribute..................................................................................................................9-15 9.8 Setting the Inner and Outer Ethernet Protocols Type of a Stacking VLAN.................................................9-16 9.9 Setting the Inner VLAN Priority of the Service Port in a Stacking VLAN..................................................9-17 9.10 Adding an Upstream Port to a VLAN.........................................................................................................9-17 9.11 Adding a Service Port to a VLAN..............................................................................................................9-18 9.12 Adding Service Ports in Batches.................................................................................................................9-20 9.13 Setting the Description of a Service Port....................................................................................................9-22
10 Configuring the DHCP Relay..............................................................................................10-1 10.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................10-3 10.2 Configuration Example of DHCP Standard Mode......................................................................................10-4 10.3 Configuration Example of DHCP Option60 Mode.....................................................................................10-6 10.4 Configuration Example of DHCP MAC Address Segment Mode..............................................................10-9 10.5 Creating a DHCP Server Group................................................................................................................10-12 10.6 Setting Working Mode of a DHCP Server................................................................................................10-13 10.7 Setting DHCP Relay Mode.......................................................................................................................10-14 10.8 Binding a DHCP Server Group with a VLAN Interface...........................................................................10-15 10.9 Creating an Option60 Domain..................................................................................................................10-16 10.10 Binding a DHCP Server Group with a DHCP Option60 Domain..........................................................10-17 10.11 Configuring the Gateway of a DHCP Option60 Domain.......................................................................10-17 10.12 Creating a DHCP MAC Address Segment.............................................................................................10-18 10.13 Setting the Range of a DHCP MAC Address Segment..........................................................................10-19 10.14 Binding a DHCP Server Group with a DHCP MAC Address Segment.................................................10-20 10.15 Configuring the Gateway of a DHCP MAC Address Segment..............................................................10-21
11 Configuring the ARP & ARP Proxy....................................................................................11-1 11.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................11-2 11.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Proxy..................................................................................................11-2 11.3 Adding a Static ARP Entry.........................................................................................................................11-5 11.4 Enabling the ARP Proxy.............................................................................................................................11-6
12 Configuring the Routing Protocol......................................................................................12-1 12.1 Routing Protocol Configuration..................................................................................................................12-3 12.2 Configuration Example of the Static Route................................................................................................12-3 12.3 Configuration Example of RIP....................................................................................................................12-6 iv
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Contents
12.4 Configuration Example of OSPF................................................................................................................12-9 12.5 Configuration Example of a Route Policy................................................................................................12-13 12.6 Adding a Static Route...............................................................................................................................12-16 12.7 Configuring RIP........................................................................................................................................12-17 12.7.1 Enabling RIP Process.......................................................................................................................12-18 12.7.2 Setting the RIP Version....................................................................................................................12-19 12.7.3 Configuring Zero Field Check for RIP-I Packets.............................................................................12-20 12.7.4 Setting the Cost of the Default Route...............................................................................................12-21 12.7.5 Enabling Route Summarization.......................................................................................................12-22 12.7.6 Specifying Default Routing Metric..................................................................................................12-23 12.7.7 Importing Routes of Other Protocols...............................................................................................12-24 12.7.8 Disabling Receiving Host Routes....................................................................................................12-25 12.7.9 Configuring the RIP Preference.......................................................................................................12-26 12.7.10 Configuring the Route Filtering Policy..........................................................................................12-27 12.7.11 Verifying the Source IP Address of a RIP Route Update..............................................................12-28 12.7.12 Resetting RIP..................................................................................................................................12-29 12.7.13 Clearing RIP Process Statistics......................................................................................................12-30 12.7.14 Disabling RIP Packet Transmission on an Interface......................................................................12-30 12.7.15 Configuring the IP Address of a Peer Router.................................................................................12-31 12.7.16 Configuring a Summary Route IP Address....................................................................................12-32 12.7.17 Enabling an Interface to Receive/Transmit RIP Packets................................................................12-32 12.7.18 Enabling the Split Horizon Function..............................................................................................12-33 12.7.19 Enabling the Poison Reverse Function...........................................................................................12-34 12.7.20 Configuring the RIP-2 Authentication Mode.................................................................................12-35 12.7.21 Configuring the Additional Metric of a Route...............................................................................12-35 12.7.22 Configuring the RIP Timer............................................................................................................12-36 12.7.23 Enabling the Transparent Transmission function of the RIP Packet Based on the VLAN............12-37 12.8 Configuring OSPF.....................................................................................................................................12-38 12.8.1 Enabling OSPF Process....................................................................................................................12-39 12.8.2 Configuring DR Priority...................................................................................................................12-40 12.8.3 Setting an OSPF Router ID..............................................................................................................12-40 12.8.4 Entering OSPF Area Config Mode..................................................................................................12-41 12.8.5 Configuring Subnets for an Area.....................................................................................................12-42 12.8.6 Configuring the OSPF Stub Area.....................................................................................................12-43 12.8.7 Configuring an NBMA Adjacent Router.........................................................................................12-43 12.8.8 Setting OSPF Preference..................................................................................................................12-44 12.8.9 Disabling OSPF Packet Transmission on an Interface.....................................................................12-45 12.8.10 Configuring the Maximum OSPF Route Count.............................................................................12-46 12.8.11 Enabling OSPF Logging Function.................................................................................................12-47 12.8.12 Setting the VLAN-Based Transparent Transmission for OSPF Packets.......................................12-47 12.9 Configuring OSPF on a VLAN Interface..................................................................................................12-48 12.9.1 Configuring the Network Type on an OSPF Interface.....................................................................12-48 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
v
Contents
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide 12.9.2 Configuring OSPF Cost...................................................................................................................12-49 12.9.3 Configuring OSPF Packet Authentication.......................................................................................12-50 12.9.4 Configuring the MTU of the DD Packet..........................................................................................12-50
12.10 Configuring OSPF Timer........................................................................................................................12-51 12.10.1 Setting the Interval for Sending the Hello Packets........................................................................12-52 12.10.2 Setting the Dead Time Between Adjacent Routers........................................................................12-52 12.10.3 Setting the Hello Packet Poll Interval............................................................................................12-53 12.10.4 Setting the LSA Transmit Delay....................................................................................................12-54 12.10.5 Setting the LSA Retransmit Interval between Adjacent Routers...................................................12-55 12.10.6 Setting the SPF Calculation Interval for OSPF..............................................................................12-55 12.11 Configuring Route Summarization.........................................................................................................12-56 12.11.1 Configuring Route Summarization Between Areas.......................................................................12-56 12.11.2 Configuring the Summarization of Routes Imported by OSPF.....................................................12-57 12.12 Configuring OSPF Route Import............................................................................................................12-58 12.12.1 Importing Routes from Other Protocols into OSPF.......................................................................12-58 12.12.2 Setting the Default Parameters of OSPF Imported Routes............................................................12-59 12.13 Configuring a Route Policy.....................................................................................................................12-60 12.13.1 Defining a Route Policy.................................................................................................................12-60 12.13.2 Defining the if-match Clause of a Route Policy............................................................................12-62 12.13.3 Defining the apply Clause of a Route Policy.................................................................................12-63
13 Configuring MSTP.................................................................................................................13-1 13.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................13-3 13.2 Enabling the MSTP Function......................................................................................................................13-3 13.3 Setting the Working Mode of MSTP..........................................................................................................13-5 13.4 Setting the MST Region Parameters...........................................................................................................13-6 13.4.1 Setting the MD5-Key for the MD5 Encryption Algorithm Configured on the MST Region............13-7 13.4.2 Configuring the MST Region Name..................................................................................................13-8 13.4.3 Mapping the Specified VLAN to the Specified MSTP Instance........................................................13-9 13.4.4 Mapping All VLANs to the MSTP Instances by Modular Arithmetic............................................13-10 13.4.5 Setting the MSTP Revision Level....................................................................................................13-11 13.4.6 Restoring the Default Settings for All Parameters of the MST Region...........................................13-13 13.5 Activating the Configuration of the MST Region.....................................................................................13-13 13.6 Specifying the Device as a Root Bridge or a Backup Root Bridge...........................................................13-14 13.7 Setting the Priority of the Device in the Specified Spanning Tree Instance.............................................13-15 13.8 Setting the Maximum Hop of the MST Region........................................................................................13-17 13.9 Setting the Diameter of the Switching Fabric...........................................................................................13-18 13.10 Setting the Calculation Standard for the Path Cost.................................................................................13-19 13.11 Setting the Time Parameters of the Specified Network Bridge..............................................................13-20 13.11.1 Setting the Forward Delay of the Specified Network Bridge........................................................13-21 13.11.2 Setting the Hello Time of the Specified Network Bridge..............................................................13-22 13.11.3 Setting the Max Age of the Specified Network Bridge..................................................................13-23 13.11.4 Setting the Timeout Time Factor of the Specified Network Bridge..............................................13-25 vi
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Contents
13.12 Setting the Parameters of the Specified Port...........................................................................................13-26 13.12.1 Setting the Maximum Transmission Rate of the Specified Port....................................................13-26 13.12.2 Setting the Specified Port as an Edge Port.....................................................................................13-27 13.12.3 Setting the Path Cost of the Port in the Specified Spanning Tree Instance....................................13-28 13.12.4 Setting the Priority of the Specified Port.......................................................................................13-30 13.12.5 Setting the Point-to-Point Link Connection of the Specified Port.................................................13-31 13.13 Setting the mCheck Variable...................................................................................................................13-32 13.14 Configuring the Device Protection Function..........................................................................................13-33 13.14.1 Enabling the BPDU Protection Function of the Device.................................................................13-33 13.14.2 Enabling the Loop Protection Function of the Device...................................................................13-34 13.14.3 Enabling the Root Protection Function of the Device....................................................................13-35 13.15 Clear the MSTP Protocol Statistics.........................................................................................................13-36
14 Configuring NTP....................................................................................................................14-1 14.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................14-3 14.2 Configuration Example of NTP Broadcast Mode.......................................................................................14-3 14.3 Configuration Example of NTP Multicast Mode........................................................................................14-6 14.4 Configuration Example of NTP Server/Client Mode..................................................................................14-9 14.5 Configuration Example of NTP Peer Mode..............................................................................................14-13 14.6 Configuring the NTP ID Authentication...................................................................................................14-16 14.7 Configuring the NTP Master Clock..........................................................................................................14-18 14.8 Configuring NTP Broadcast Mode...........................................................................................................14-19 14.8.1 Configuring NTP Broadcast Server Mode.......................................................................................14-19 14.8.2 Configuring NTP Broadcast Client Mode........................................................................................14-20 14.9 Configuring the NTP Multicast Mode......................................................................................................14-21 14.10 Configuring NTP Server/Client Mode....................................................................................................14-23 14.11 Configuring NTP Peer Mode..................................................................................................................14-24 14.12 Configuring the Authority of Access to a Local Device's NTP Service.................................................14-25 14.13 Configuring an Interface for Transmitting/Receiving NTP Packets.......................................................14-26
15 Configuring MAC Address..................................................................................................15-1 15.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................15-2 15.2 Adding a Static MAC Address....................................................................................................................15-2 15.3 Setting the Maximum MAC Address Number Learned by a Service Port.................................................15-3 15.4 Configuring the Aging Time of a Dynamic MAC Address........................................................................15-4 15.5 Binding the MAC Address..........................................................................................................................15-5 15.6 Configuring MAC Address Filtering..........................................................................................................15-5 15.7 Configuring the MAC Address Pool...........................................................................................................15-6
16 Configuring TCP/IP Connection.........................................................................................16-1 16.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................16-2 16.2 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................16-2 16.3 Configuring the Synwait Timer...................................................................................................................16-2 16.4 Configuring the Finwait Timer...................................................................................................................16-3 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
vii
Contents
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
16.5 Configuring the Socket Buffer....................................................................................................................16-3 16.6 Enabling the TCP Debugging.....................................................................................................................16-4 16.7 Enabling the IP Packets Debugging............................................................................................................16-5
17 Configuring ACL....................................................................................................................17-1 17.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................17-3 17.2 Related Concepts.........................................................................................................................................17-6 17.3 Configuring the Basic ACL.......................................................................................................................17-10 17.4 Configuring the Advanced ACL...............................................................................................................17-11 17.5 Configuring the Layer 2 ACL...................................................................................................................17-13 17.6 Configuration Example of the Customized ACL......................................................................................17-15 17.7 Creating an ACL.......................................................................................................................................17-16 17.8 Configuring a Time Range........................................................................................................................17-18 17.9 Setting the Step..........................................................................................................................................17-19 17.10 Creating a Basic ACL Rule.....................................................................................................................17-20 17.11 Creating an Advanced ACL Rule............................................................................................................17-21 17.12 Creating a Layer 2 ACL Rule.................................................................................................................17-22 17.13 Creating a Customized ACL Rule...........................................................................................................17-23 17.14 Activating an ACL..................................................................................................................................17-25
18 Configuring the QoS.............................................................................................................18-1 18.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................18-2 18.2 Configuring the Traffic Entry.....................................................................................................................18-2 18.3 Configuring the Queue Scheduling.............................................................................................................18-5 18.3.1 Configuring the Queue Scheduling....................................................................................................18-6 18.4 Managing the Traffic Based on the ACL Rule............................................................................................18-7 18.4.1 Restricting the Traffic That Matches the ACL Rule..........................................................................18-8 18.4.2 Adding a Priority Tag to the Traffic That Matches the ACL Rule....................................................18-9 18.4.3 Measuring the Traffic That Matches the ACL Rule.........................................................................18-10 18.4.4 Mirroring the Traffic That Matches the ACL Rule..........................................................................18-11 18.4.5 Redirecting the Traffic That Matches the ACL Rule.......................................................................18-12 18.5 Setting the Rate Limit for an Upstream Port.............................................................................................18-13
19 Configuring User Security....................................................................................................19-1 19.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................19-3 19.2 Enabling the PITP.......................................................................................................................................19-3 19.3 Setting the RAIO Working Mode...............................................................................................................19-4 19.4 Setting the Ethernet Encapsulation Type....................................................................................................19-5 19.5 Enabling the DHCP Option82 Function......................................................................................................19-6 19.6 Setting the Maximum Length of DHCP Packets........................................................................................19-7 19.7 Binding the IP Address...............................................................................................................................19-8 19.8 Binding the MAC Address..........................................................................................................................19-9 19.9 Enabling Anti MAC Spoofing...................................................................................................................19-10 19.10 Enabling Anti IP Spoofing......................................................................................................................19-11 viii
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Contents
20 Configuring System Security...............................................................................................20-1 20.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................20-3 20.2 Enabling Anti DoS Attack...........................................................................................................................20-3 20.3 Enabling Anti IP Attack..............................................................................................................................20-4 20.4 Enabling Anti ICMP Attack........................................................................................................................20-5 20.5 Enabling Source Route Filtering.................................................................................................................20-5 20.6 Configuring MAC Address Filtering..........................................................................................................20-6 20.7 Setting the Time to Detect Exceptional Disconnection of the PPPoE/DHCP Users..................................20-7 20.8 Configuring the Black List..........................................................................................................................20-8 20.9 Configuring the Firewall Function..............................................................................................................20-9 20.10 Configuring an Accessible Address Segment.........................................................................................20-11 20.11 Configuring the Inaccessible Address Segment......................................................................................20-12
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service.......................................................................................21-1 21.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................21-3 21.2 Configuration Example of the ADSL2+ PPPoE/IPoE Service...................................................................21-4 21.3 Configuration Example of the ADSL2+ IPoA Service...............................................................................21-8 21.4 Configuration Example of the ADSL2+ PPPoA Service..........................................................................21-13 21.5 Adding an ADSL2+ Line Profile..............................................................................................................21-18 21.6 Adding an Extended ADSL2+ Line Profile..............................................................................................21-25 21.7 Adding an ADSL2+ Alarm Profile...........................................................................................................21-28 21.8 Activating an ADSL2+ Port......................................................................................................................21-33 21.9 Configuring the Port Rate Measurement Thresholds for an ADSL2+ Port..............................................21-35 21.10 Configuring IPoA/IPoE Protocol Conversion.........................................................................................21-36 21.10.1 Enabling IPoA Protocol Conversion..............................................................................................21-36 21.10.2 Setting the Aging time of IPoA Forwarding Entry........................................................................21-37 21.10.3 Setting the Default Gateway of the IPoA User..............................................................................21-38 21.10.4 Configuring the Encapsulation Type of the IPoA User.................................................................21-38 21.11 Configuring PPPoA/PPPoE Protocol Conversion...................................................................................21-40 21.11.1 Enabling PPPoA Protocol Conversion...........................................................................................21-40 21.11.2 Configuring the Encapsulation Type of the PPPoA User..............................................................21-41 21.11.3 Enabling PPPoA/PPPoE MRU Negotiation...................................................................................21-42 21.12 Querying an ADSL2+ Port......................................................................................................................21-43 21.13 Enabling the Auto PVC Configuration of an ADSL Modem.................................................................21-44
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service.........................................................................................22-1 22.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................22-3 22.2 Configuration Example of the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE Service.....................................................................22-4 22.3 Configuration Example of the SHDSL IPoA Service.................................................................................22-9 22.4 Configuration Example of the SHDSL PPPoA Service............................................................................22-15 22.5 Adding an SHDSL Line Profile................................................................................................................22-21 22.6 Adding an SHDSL Alarm Profile.............................................................................................................22-24 22.7 Binding an SHDSL Alarm Profile............................................................................................................22-27 22.8 Configuring the SHDSL Multi-Pair Binding............................................................................................22-28 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
ix
Contents
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22.9 Configuring the SHDSL EFM Multi-port Binding...................................................................................22-29 22.10 Activating an SHDSL Port......................................................................................................................22-30 22.11 Querying an SHDSL Port........................................................................................................................22-31 22.12 Configuring the Clock Mode...................................................................................................................22-32
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service..........................................................................................23-1 23.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................23-3 23.2 Configuration Example of the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE Service.....................................................................23-3 23.3 Configuration Example of the VDSL2 IPoA Service...............................................................................23-10 23.4 Configuration Example of the VDSL2 PPPoA Service............................................................................23-17 23.5 Adding a VDSL2 Line Profile..................................................................................................................23-24 23.6 Adding a VDSL2 Channel Profile............................................................................................................23-31 23.7 Adding a VDSL2 Line Template..............................................................................................................23-35 23.8 Adding a VDSL2 Line Alarm Profile.......................................................................................................23-37 23.9 Adding a VDSL2 Channel Alarm Profile.................................................................................................23-40 23.10 Adding a VDSL2 Alarm Template.........................................................................................................23-43 23.11 Binding an VDSL2 Alarm Template......................................................................................................23-45 23.12 Activating a VDSL2 Port........................................................................................................................23-46 23.13 Querying a VDSL2 port..........................................................................................................................23-47
24 Configuring Protection for Upstream Link.......................................................................24-1 24.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................24-2 24.2 Configuration Example of the Upstream Link Protection...........................................................................24-3 24.3 Configuring a Protection Group..................................................................................................................24-5 24.4 Configuring the Protection Group Weight..................................................................................................24-6
25 Configuring Device Subtending.........................................................................................25-1 25.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................25-3 25.2 Configuration Example of the Ethernet Access Service.............................................................................25-3 25.3 Configuration Example of the Subtended Network Through the SCU Board............................................25-5 25.4 Configuration Example of Subtending Device Through the ETHA Board................................................25-7 25.5 Configuring the Working Mode of the ETH Board....................................................................................25-9 25.6 Configuring the Physical Attributes of an Ethernet Port...........................................................................25-10 25.6.1 Setting the Auto-negotiation Mode of an Ethernet Port...................................................................25-10 25.6.2 Setting the Duplex Mode of an Ethernet Port..................................................................................25-11 25.6.3 Setting the Rate of an Ethernet Port.................................................................................................25-12 25.6.4 Setting the Network Cable Type of an Ethernet Port.......................................................................25-13 25.7 Enabling the Flow Control on an Ethernet Port........................................................................................25-13 25.8 Enabling the Traffic Suppression..............................................................................................................25-14 25.9 Enabling the Ethernet Port Aggregation...................................................................................................25-16 25.10 Mirroring an Ethernet Port......................................................................................................................25-17 25.11 Adding an Ethernet Port to a VLAN.......................................................................................................25-18 25.12 Configuring the Outer QinQ VLAN of the Ethernet Port.......................................................................25-19 25.13 Setting the Native VLAN for an Ethernet Port.......................................................................................25-20 x
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Contents
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access....................................................................................26-1 26.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................26-2 26.2 Configuration Example of the ATM-DSLAM Access...............................................................................26-3 26.3 Setting the OPTIC Port Mode.....................................................................................................................26-6 26.4 Setting the OPTIC Port Type......................................................................................................................26-7 26.5 Adding an IMA Group................................................................................................................................26-8 26.6 Setting the IMA Group Mode...................................................................................................................26-10 26.7 Adding an IMA Link.................................................................................................................................26-12 26.8 Setting the Line Type for an E3 Port.........................................................................................................26-13 26.9 Setting the E3 Port Type...........................................................................................................................26-14 26.10 Setting the Tx Clock of an E3 Port.........................................................................................................26-15 26.11 Clearing the Statistics of an E3 Port........................................................................................................26-16
27 Configuring MPLS Access....................................................................................................27-1 27.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................27-2 27.2 Configuration Example of MPLS - Based on Binding the PVC with the PW Profile................................27-2 27.3 Configuration Example of MPLS- Based on Binding the VLAN with the PW Profile..............................27-6 27.4 Basic Configuration of MPLS...................................................................................................................27-10 27.4.1 Configuring the LSR ID...................................................................................................................27-10 27.4.2 Enabling MPLS................................................................................................................................27-11 27.5 Static LSP Configuration..........................................................................................................................27-12 27.5.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................27-12 27.5.2 Configuring the Ingress LSR of the Static LSP...............................................................................27-13 27.5.3 Configuring the Egress LSR of the Static LSP................................................................................27-14 27.5.4 Configuring the LSP CAR...............................................................................................................27-14 27.6 MPLS LDP Configuration........................................................................................................................27-15 27.6.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................27-16 27.6.2 Enabling the MPLS LDP..................................................................................................................27-16 27.6.3 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Basic Discovery.....................................................................27-17 27.6.4 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Extended Discovery...............................................................27-19 27.6.5 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Basic Session..........................................................................27-20 27.6.6 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Extended Session...................................................................27-21 27.6.7 Configuring the LDP LSP Triggering Policy...................................................................................27-22 27.6.8 Configuring the LDP Label Retention Mode...................................................................................27-23 27.6.9 Configuring the LDP Loopback Detection......................................................................................27-24 27.6.10 Configuring the LDP MD5 Authentication....................................................................................27-25 27.6.11 Enable the LDP MTU Signaling Function.....................................................................................27-27 27.7 PW Configuration.....................................................................................................................................27-28 27.7.1 Enable the MPLS L2VPN................................................................................................................27-28 27.7.2 Configuring a PW Template............................................................................................................27-29 27.7.3 Binding a PVC with a PW Template...............................................................................................27-30 27.7.4 Binding a VLAN with a PW Template............................................................................................27-31
28 Configuring MPLS RSVP-TE..............................................................................................28-1 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xi
Contents
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
28.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................28-2 28.2 Configuration Example for Establishing an MPLS TE Tunnel by Using RSVP-TE..................................28-2 28.3 Configuring Basic MPLS TE Capability....................................................................................................28-5 28.3.1 Enabling MPLS TE Feature...............................................................................................................28-6 28.3.2 Creating an MPLS TE Tunnel............................................................................................................28-7 28.4 Configuring an MPLS TE Tunnel by Using Dynamic Signaling...............................................................28-8 28.4.1 Configuring Bandwidth of Links.......................................................................................................28-9 28.4.2 Enabling OSPF TE...........................................................................................................................28-10 28.4.3 Configuring the MPLS TE Explicit Path.........................................................................................28-11 28.4.4 Configuring Constraints of an MPLS TE Tunnel............................................................................28-12 28.4.5 Configuring CSPF............................................................................................................................28-13 28.4.6 Establishing an MPLS TE Tunnel by Using RSVP-TE...................................................................28-15 28.5 Configuring Advanced RSVP-TE Features..............................................................................................28-16 28.5.1 Configuring RSVP Hello Extension................................................................................................28-16 28.5.2 Configuring RSVP Resource Reservation Style..............................................................................28-18 28.5.3 Configuring RSVP Timers...............................................................................................................28-19 28.5.4 Enabling RSVP Message Transmission Reliability.........................................................................28-21 28.5.5 Enabling RSVP-TE Srefresh Function.............................................................................................28-22 28.5.6 Enabling RSVP-TE Reservation Confirmation Mechanism............................................................28-23 28.5.7 Enabling RSVP Authentication........................................................................................................28-24 28.6 Tuning the Establishment of CR-LSP.......................................................................................................28-25 28.6.1 Configuring Tie-Breaking of CSPF.................................................................................................28-26 28.6.2 Configuring Route Pinning of CSPF................................................................................................28-27 28.6.3 Configuring Administrative Group and Affinity Property...............................................................28-28 28.6.4 Configuring Reoptimization for CR-LSP........................................................................................28-30 28.7 Tuning the Establishment of an MPLS TE Tunnel...................................................................................28-31 28.7.1 Configuring Loop Detection............................................................................................................28-32 28.7.2 Configuring the Route Record and the Label Record......................................................................28-33 28.7.3 Configuring Parameters of Tunnel Reestablishment.......................................................................28-34 28.7.4 Configuring Tunnel Priority.............................................................................................................28-35
29 Configuring the VLAN Stacking Wholesale Service......................................................29-1 29.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................29-2 29.2 Configuration Example of the Wholesale Service......................................................................................29-2
30 Configuring the QinQ VLAN Leased Line Service.........................................................30-1 30.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................30-2 30.2 Configuration Example of the QinQ VLAN Leased Line Service.............................................................30-2 30.3 Enabling Transparent Transmission of BPDUs..........................................................................................30-5
31 Configuring the Multicast Service......................................................................................31-1 31.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................31-3 31.2 Configuration Example of IGMP Proxy Multicast Service........................................................................31-3 31.3 Configuration Example of IGMP Snooping................................................................................................31-6 xii
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Contents
31.4 Configuration Example of Multicast Service in Subtending Mode..........................................................31-10 31.5 Configuring Multicast Service in MSTP Networking...............................................................................31-15 31.6 Setting the IGMP Mode............................................................................................................................31-23 31.7 Configuring an IGMP Upstream Port.......................................................................................................31-24 31.8 Specifying a Subtending Port....................................................................................................................31-25 31.9 Configuring a Program for a Static Subtending Port................................................................................31-26 31.10 Configuring IGMP Global Parameters....................................................................................................31-27 31.10.1 Enabling the IGMP Proxy Authorization.......................................................................................31-28 31.10.2 Setting the Robustness Variable.....................................................................................................31-30 31.10.3 Setting the General Query Interval.................................................................................................31-31 31.10.4 Setting the Maximum Response Time to the General Query.........................................................31-32 31.10.5 Setting the Number of Specific Queries.........................................................................................31-33 31.10.6 Setting the Specific Query Interval................................................................................................31-35 31.10.7 Setting the Maximum Response Time to the Specific Query........................................................31-36 31.10.8 Setting the Unsolicited Report Interval..........................................................................................31-37 31.10.9 Setting the TTL for a V2 Router....................................................................................................31-38 31.10.10 Setting the Preview Recognition Time.........................................................................................31-39 31.10.11 Enabling the User Action Report Function..................................................................................31-41 31.10.12 Enabling the Proxy of the IGMP Report Packet..........................................................................31-42 31.10.13 Enabling the Proxy of the IGMP Leave Packet...........................................................................31-43 31.10.14 Set the Permitted Encapsulation Mode of IGMP Packets............................................................31-44 31.10.15 Enabling IGMP Echo Function....................................................................................................31-45 31.11 Adding a Program...................................................................................................................................31-46 31.12 Managing Multicast Bandwidth..............................................................................................................31-48 31.12.1 Enabling the Bandwidth Management Function............................................................................31-48 31.12.2 Setting Upstream Port Bandwidth..................................................................................................31-50 31.12.3 Setting User Bandwidth.................................................................................................................31-50 31.13 Configuring an Authority Profile............................................................................................................31-51 31.13.1 Setting the Authority Mode............................................................................................................31-52 31.13.2 Modifying an Authority Profile......................................................................................................31-53 31.13.3 Renaming an Authority Profile......................................................................................................31-54 31.14 Configuring Multicast Users...................................................................................................................31-55 31.14.1 Adding a BTV User........................................................................................................................31-55 31.14.2 Modifying the Attributes of a User................................................................................................31-56 31.14.3 Blocking a BTV User.....................................................................................................................31-57 31.14.4 Binding a User with an Authority Profile......................................................................................31-58 31.14.5 Granting Program Authorities to a User........................................................................................31-59 31.14.6 Enabling the Function of Monitoring the BTV User.....................................................................31-60 31.15 Configuring the Preview Function..........................................................................................................31-61 31.15.1 Enabling the Preview Function......................................................................................................31-61 31.15.2 Setting the Preview Parameters......................................................................................................31-62 31.15.3 Setting the Preview Auto Reset Time............................................................................................31-63 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xiii
Contents
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide 31.15.4 Clearing the Preview Records Manually........................................................................................31-65
31.16 Configuring the Logging Function..........................................................................................................31-66 31.16.1 Enabling the Logging Function......................................................................................................31-66 31.16.2 Setting the Logging Interval...........................................................................................................31-67 31.16.3 Configuring Log Reporting............................................................................................................31-69 31.16.4 Collecting Log Statistics................................................................................................................31-70
32 Configuring the Triple Play Service...................................................................................32-1 32.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................32-2 32.2 Configuration Example of Triple Play - Multiple PVCs for Multiple Services..........................................32-3 32.3 Configuration Example of Triple Play - Based on the User-Side VLAN...................................................32-9 32.4 Configuration Example of Triple Play - Based on 802.1p........................................................................32-14 32.5 Configuration Example of the Triple Play Service - Based on the Service Encapsulation Type.............32-20
33 Configuring the Ethernet OAM..........................................................................................33-1 33.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................33-3 33.2 Configuration Example of Ethernet OAM..................................................................................................33-3 33.3 Creating an MD...........................................................................................................................................33-6 33.4 Creating an MA...........................................................................................................................................33-7 33.5 Creating an MEP.........................................................................................................................................33-8 33.6 Creating an RMEP...................................................................................................................................... 33-9 33.7 Enabling the CFM Globally......................................................................................................................33-10 33.8 Enabling the CFM Alarm Globally...........................................................................................................33-11 33.9 Enabling the Administration Function of an MEP....................................................................................33-12 33.10 Enabling the CC Transmission of an MEP.............................................................................................33-13 33.11 Enabling the Global Detection Function of an RMEP............................................................................33-14 33.12 Enabling RMEP Detection Function.......................................................................................................33-15 33.13 Configuring Priorities for Transmitting CCMs/LTMs ...........................................................................33-16 33.14 Configuring the Interval for an MA to Transmit a CC...........................................................................33-17 33.15 Configuring the Base Address of Multicast Destination MAC Addresses of CCMs/LTMs..................33-18 33.16 Configuring Loop Detection Function....................................................................................................33-19 33.17 Configuring Linktrace Function..............................................................................................................33-20
34 Configuring the MPLS OAM...............................................................................................34-1 34.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................34-2 34.2 Configuration Example of Detection of MPLS OAM for Static LSP Connectivity...................................34-2 34.3 Configuration Example of MPLS OAM Protection Switchover................................................................ 34-6 34.4 Configuring the MPLS OAM Function of the Ingress..............................................................................34-11 34.5 Configuring the MPLS OAM Function of the Egress...............................................................................34-12 34.6 Configuring the Tunnel Protection Group................................................................................................34-13 34.7 Switching Over Protection Group Manually.............................................................................................34-14 34.8 Enabling the Protection Group to Output the Debugging Information.....................................................34-15
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring.......................................................................35-1 35.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................35-2 xiv
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Contents
35.2 Configuration Example of an EMU............................................................................................................35-4 35.2.1 Data Plan............................................................................................................................................35-4 35.2.2 Configuration Flowchart....................................................................................................................35-5 35.2.3 Procedure for Configuring an H303ESC...........................................................................................35-5 35.2.4 Verification for Configuring an H303ESC........................................................................................35-6 35.2.5 Procedure for Configuring a DIS EMU.............................................................................................35-7 35.2.6 Procedure for Configuring POWER4845 EMU.................................................................................35-8 35.3 Adding an EMU..........................................................................................................................................35-8 35.4 Configuring the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU.............................................................................................35-10 35.5 Configuring an H561ESC EMU...............................................................................................................35-12 35.6 Configuring a POWER4845 EMU............................................................................................................35-13 35.7 Configuring the FAN Alarm Report ........................................................................................................35-16 35.8 Setting the FAN Speed Adjustment Mode................................................................................................35-17 35.9 Configuring the FAN Speed......................................................................................................................35-18
36 MSTP Networking Example................................................................................................36-1 36.1 Networking..................................................................................................................................................36-2 36.2 Data Plan.....................................................................................................................................................36-3 36.3 Configuring MA5600-1...............................................................................................................................36-6 36.4 Configuring MA5600-2.............................................................................................................................36-12 36.5 Configuring MA5600-3.............................................................................................................................36-19 36.6 Configuring MA5600-4.............................................................................................................................36-24 36.7 Configuring MA5600-5.............................................................................................................................36-29 36.8 Verification................................................................................................................................................36-32
37 Subtending Networking Example......................................................................................37-1 37.1 Networking..................................................................................................................................................37-2 37.2 Data Plan.....................................................................................................................................................37-3 37.3 Configuring MA5600-1...............................................................................................................................37-6 37.4 Configuring MA5600-2.............................................................................................................................37-12 37.5 Configuring MA5600-3.............................................................................................................................37-19 37.6 Configuring MA5600-4.............................................................................................................................37-24 37.7 Verification................................................................................................................................................37-27
A Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................A-1 Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xv
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Figures
Figures Figure 1-1 Sample network for configuring the license application....................................................................1-4 Figure 1-2 Flowchart for configuring the license application..............................................................................1-5 Figure 2-1 Networking for configuring the MA5600 through the local serial port.............................................2-3 Figure 2-2 Flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the local serial port................................................2-4 Figure 2-3 Setting parameters of the terminal......................................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-4 Setting the terminal emulation type....................................................................................................2-6 Figure 2-5 Setting ASCII code.............................................................................................................................2-7 Figure 2-6 Networking for configuring the MA5600 through the remote serial port..........................................2-8 Figure 2-7 Flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the remote serial port.............................................2-8 Figure 2-8 Setting the parameters of the HyperTerminal...................................................................................2-11 Figure 2-9 Networking for local configuration through a LAN.........................................................................2-12 Figure 2-10 Connection between a WAN and the maintenance network port of the control board..................2-13 Figure 2-11 Flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the outband management channel.....................2-14 Figure 2-12 Running the telnet application........................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-13 Networking for the maintenance through the GE port over a LAN...............................................2-16 Figure 2-14 Networking for the maintenance through the GE port over a WAN..............................................2-16 Figure 2-15 Flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the inband management channel.......................2-17 Figure 2-16 Running the telnet application........................................................................................................2-18 Figure 2-17 Setting up the SSH configuration environment in LAN outband mode.........................................2-19 Figure 2-18 Setting up the SSH configuration environment in WAN outband mode........................................2-20 Figure 2-19 Setting up the SSH configuration environment in LAN inband mode...........................................2-21 Figure 2-20 Setting up the SSH configuration environment in WAN inband mode..........................................2-21 Figure 2-21 Flowchart for configuring in SSH mode........................................................................................2-23 Figure 2-22 Interface of the key generator.........................................................................................................2-25 Figure 2-23 Generating the client key................................................................................................................2-26 Figure 2-24 Interface of converting the client public key into the RSA public key..........................................2-27 Figure 2-25 Interface of the SSH client software...............................................................................................2-28 Figure 2-26 Interface for connecting to the system............................................................................................2-29 Figure 2-27 Interface for logging in the SSH client...........................................................................................2-29 Figure 3-1 Switching over among the command modes......................................................................................3-4 Figure 4-1 Sample network for configuring the outband NMS...........................................................................4-3 Figure 4-2 Flowchart for configuring the outband NMS.....................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-3 Sample network for configuring the inband NMS.............................................................................4-6 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xvii
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Figures
Figure 4-4 Flowchart for configuring the inband NMS.......................................................................................4-7 Figure 5-1 Sample network for configuring a log host........................................................................................5-2 Figure 8-1 Sample network for configuring the remote user authentication........................................................8-5 Figure 8-2 Flowchart for configuring the remote user authentication.................................................................8-6 Figure 8-3 Flowchart for configuring the SSH user public key.........................................................................8-23 Figure 9-1 Sample network for configuring a smart VLAN................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-2 Flowchart for configuring a smart VLAN..........................................................................................9-7 Figure 9-3 Sample network for configuring a MUX VLAN................................................................................9-8 Figure 9-4 Flowchart for configuring a MUX VLAN.........................................................................................9-9 Figure 9-5 Sample network for configuring a super VLAN..............................................................................9-10 Figure 9-6 Flowchart for configuring a super VLAN........................................................................................9-12 Figure 10-1 MA5600 DHCP relay.....................................................................................................................10-3 Figure 10-2 Sample network for configuring DHCP standard mode.................................................................10-4 Figure 10-3 Flowchart for configuring DHCP standard mode...........................................................................10-5 Figure 10-4 Sample network for configuring DHCP option60 mode................................................................10-7 Figure 10-5 Flowchart for configuring the DHCP option60 mode....................................................................10-8 Figure 10-6 Sample network for configuring MAC address segment mode......................................................10-9 Figure 10-7 Flowchart for configuring MAC address segment mode.............................................................10-11 Figure 11-1 Sample network for configuring the ARP proxy............................................................................11-3 Figure 11-2 Flowchart for configuring the ARP proxy......................................................................................11-4 Figure 12-1 Sample network for configuring the static route............................................................................12-4 Figure 12-2 Flowchart for configuring the static route......................................................................................12-5 Figure 12-3 Sample network for configuring RIP..............................................................................................12-7 Figure 12-4 Flowchart for configuring RIP.......................................................................................................12-8 Figure 12-5 Sample network for configuring OSPF........................................................................................12-10 Figure 12-6 Flowchart for configuring OSPF..................................................................................................12-11 Figure 12-7 Sample network for configuring the route policy.........................................................................12-13 Figure 12-8 Flowchart for configuring the route policy...................................................................................12-14 Figure 14-1 Sample network for configuring the NTP broadcast mode............................................................14-4 Figure 14-2 Flowchart for configuring NTP broadcast mode............................................................................14-5 Figure 14-3 Sample network for configuring NTP multicast mode...................................................................14-7 Figure 14-4 Flowchart for configuring NTP multicast mode.............................................................................14-8 Figure 14-5 Sample network for configuring NTP server/client mode............................................................14-10 Figure 14-6 Flowchart for configuring NTP server/client mode......................................................................14-11 Figure 14-7 Sample network for configuring NTP peer mode.........................................................................14-13 Figure 14-8 Flowchart for configuring NTP peer mode..................................................................................14-14 Figure 14-9 Flowchart for configuring the NTP server/client mode with ID authentication...........................14-16 Figure 17-1 Flowchart for configuring a basic ACL........................................................................................17-11 Figure 17-2 Flowchart for configuring an advanced ACL...............................................................................17-12 Figure 17-3 Flowchart for configuring a layer 2 ACL.....................................................................................17-14 Figure 17-4 Flowchart for configuring a customized ACL..............................................................................17-16 Figure 17-5 First 64 bytes of a layer 2 frame...................................................................................................17-23 xviii
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Figures
Figure 20-1 Flowchart for configuring the firewall function...........................................................................20-10 Figure 21-1 Sample network for configuring the ADSL2+ PPPoE/IPoE service..............................................21-4 Figure 21-2 Flowchart for configuring the ADSL2+ PPPoE/IPoE service........................................................21-6 Figure 21-3 Sample network for configuring the ADSL2+ IPoA service......................................................... 21-9 Figure 21-4 Flowchart for configuring the ADSL2+ IPoA service.................................................................21-11 Figure 21-5 Sample network for configuring the ADSL2+ PPPoA service....................................................21-14 Figure 21-6 Flowchart for configuring the ADSL2+ PPPoA service..............................................................21-16 Figure 21-7 Flowchart for configuring an ADSL2+ line profile-1..................................................................21-20 Figure 21-8 Flowchart for configuring an ADSL2+ line profile-2..................................................................21-21 Figure 21-9 Flowchart for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile..........................................................................21-30 Figure 21-10 Status conversion of the ADSL2+ port.......................................................................................21-43 Figure 22-1 Sample network for configuring the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE service................................................22-5 Figure 22-2 Flowchart for configuring the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE service..........................................................22-7 Figure 22-3 Sample network for configuring the SHDSL IPoA service..........................................................22-10 Figure 22-4 Flowchart for configuring the SHDSL IPoA service...................................................................22-12 Figure 22-5 Sample network for configuring the SHDSL PPPoA service......................................................22-16 Figure 22-6 Flowchart for configuring the SHDSL PPPoA service................................................................22-18 Figure 22-7 Flowchart for adding an SHDSL line profile...............................................................................22-22 Figure 22-8 Flowchart for adding an SHDSL alarm profile............................................................................22-25 Figure 22-9 Inter-conversion between the SHDSL port states.........................................................................22-32 Figure 23-1 Sample network for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service................................................23-4 Figure 23-2 Flowchart for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service..........................................................23-6 Figure 23-3 Sample network for configuring the VDSL2 IPoA service..........................................................23-11 Figure 23-4 Flowchart for configuring the VDSL2 IPoA service....................................................................23-13 Figure 23-5 Sample network for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoA service.......................................................23-18 Figure 23-6 Flowchart for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoA service................................................................23-20 Figure 23-7 Flowchart for adding a VDSL2 line profile..................................................................................23-25 Figure 23-8 Flowchart for adding a VDSL2 channel profile...........................................................................23-32 Figure 23-9 Flowchart for adding a VDSL2 line alarm profile........................................................................23-38 Figure 23-10 Flowchart for adding a VDSL2 channel alarm profile...............................................................23-41 Figure 23-11 Inter-conversion between these states........................................................................................23-47 Figure 24-1 Sample network for configuring the upstream link protection.......................................................24-3 Figure 24-2 Flowchart for configuring the upstream link protection.................................................................24-4 Figure 25-1 Sample network for configuring the Ethernet access service.........................................................25-4 Figure 25-2 Flowchart for configuring the Ethernet access service...................................................................25-5 Figure 25-3 Sample network for configuring the subtended network................................................................25-6 Figure 25-4 Flowchart for configuring the subtended network..........................................................................25-7 Figure 25-5 Sample network for subtending devices.........................................................................................25-8 Figure 25-6 Flowchart for configuring subtending devices...............................................................................25-9 Figure 26-1 Sample network of the ATM-DSLAM access................................................................................26-2 Figure 26-2 Sample network for configuring the ATM-DSLAM access...........................................................26-3 Figure 26-3 Flowchart for configuring the ATM-DSLAM access.................................................................... 26-4 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xix
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Figures
Figure 27-1 Sample network for configuring the MPLS based on binding the PVC with the PW profile........27-3 Figure 27-2 Flowchart for configuring the MPLS based binding the PVC with the PW profile.......................27-4 Figure 27-3 Sample network of the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW template......................27-6 Figure 27-4 Flowchart for configuring the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW profile..............27-8 Figure 28-1 Sample network for establishing an MPLS TE tunnel by using RSVP-TE...................................28-3 Figure 28-2 Flowchart for establishing an MPLS TE tunnel.............................................................................28-4 Figure 29-1 Sample network for configuring the wholesale service..................................................................29-3 Figure 29-2 Flowchart for configuring the wholesale service............................................................................29-5 Figure 30-1 Sample network for configuring the QinQ VLAN leased line service...........................................30-3 Figure 30-2 Flowchart for configuring the QinQ VLAN leased line service.....................................................30-4 Figure 31-1 Sample network of the IGMP proxy application............................................................................31-4 Figure 31-2 Flowchart for configuring IGMP proxy.........................................................................................31-5 Figure 31-3 Sample network for configuring the IGMP snooping....................................................................31-7 Figure 31-4 Flowchart for configuring the IGMP snooping..............................................................................31-9 Figure 31-5 Sample network for configuring the subtended multicast service................................................31-11 Figure 31-6 Flowchart for configuring multicast service in subtending mode (MA5600_A).........................31-13 Figure 31-7 Flowchart for configuring multicast service in subtending mode (MA5600_B).........................31-13 Figure 31-8 Sample network of the multicast service in MSTP networking...................................................31-16 Figure 31-9 Flowchart for configuring multicast service in MSTP networking on MA5600_A, MA5600_B and MA5600_C........................................................................................................................................................31-19 Figure 31-10 Flowchart for configuring multicast service in MSTP networking on MA5600_D...................31-19 Figure 32-1 Sample network for configuring the triple play service -multiple PVCs for multiple services.....32-4 Figure 32-2 Flowchart for configuring the triple play service-multiple PVCs for multiple services................32-6 Figure 32-3 Sample network for configuring the triple play service - single PVC for multiple services........32-10 Figure 32-4 Flowchart for configuring the triple play service - single PVC for multiple services..................32-12 Figure 32-5 Sample network for configuring the triple play service by means of single PVC for multiple services ...........................................................................................................................................................................32-15 Figure 32-6 Flowchart for configuring the triple play service-single-PVC for multi-service.........................32-17 Figure 32-7 Sample network for configuring the triple play service - single PVC for multiple services (based on the service encapsulation type)..........................................................................................................................32-21 Figure 32-8 Flowchart for configuring the triple play service - single PVC for multiple services (based on the service encapsulation type)...............................................................................................................................32-23 Figure 33-1 Sample network for configuring Ethernet OAM............................................................................33-3 Figure 33-2 Flowchart for configuring Ethernet OAM......................................................................................33-5 Figure 34-1 Sample network of detection of MPLS OAM for static LSP connectivity....................................34-2 Figure 34-2 Flowchart for detection of MPLS OAM for static LSP connectivity.............................................34-4 Figure 34-3 Sample network of MPLS OAM protection switchover................................................................34-6 Figure 34-4 Flowchart for configuring MPLS OAM protection switchover.....................................................34-8 Figure 35-1 Flowchart for configuring an EMU................................................................................................35-5 Figure 36-1 Sample MSTP network of the MA5600.........................................................................................36-3 Figure 37-1 Sample subtended network of the MA5600...................................................................................37-3
xx
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Tables
Tables Table 1-1 Data plan for configuring the license application................................................................................1-4 Table 1-2 Related operation for configuring the license server...........................................................................1-7 Table 1-3 Related operation for configuring the ESN for the device...................................................................1-8 Table 2-1 Features of the different maintenance modes.......................................................................................2-2 Table 2-2 Data plan for the network ..................................................................................................................2-13 Table 2-3 Data plan for the network ..................................................................................................................2-14 Table 2-4 Data plan for the network...................................................................................................................2-16 Table 2-5 Data plan for the network...................................................................................................................2-17 Table 2-6 Data plan for the network...................................................................................................................2-19 Table 2-7 Data plan for the network...................................................................................................................2-20 Table 2-8 Data plan for the network...................................................................................................................2-21 Table 2-9 Data plan for the network ..................................................................................................................2-22 Table 3-1 Features of the interface config modes................................................................................................3-4 Table 3-2 Edit functions.......................................................................................................................................3-6 Table 3-3 Meaning of the CLI characters supported by the MA5600..................................................................3-7 Table 3-4 Options for viewing information displayed on multiple screens.........................................................3-9 Table 3-5 Common CLI error prompts...............................................................................................................3-10 Table 3-6 Related operation for obtaining online help information...................................................................3-12 Table 3-7 Related operation for enabling or disabling interactive command execution....................................3-13 Table 3-8 Related operation for enabling or disabling CLI trap reporting.........................................................3-14 Table 3-9 Related operation for switching the terminal language......................................................................3-15 Table 3-10 Related operation for setting the timeout exit time..........................................................................3-17 Table 3-11 Related operation for locking the terminal.......................................................................................3-18 Table 4-1 Data plan for configuring the outband NMS........................................................................................4-4 Table 4-2 Data plan for configuring the inband NMS..........................................................................................4-6 Table 4-3 Related operation for setting the SNMP version................................................................................4-10 Table 4-4 Related operation for adding a community and setting its read/write authorities..............................4-10 Table 4-5 Related operation for enabling traps sending.....................................................................................4-11 Table 4-6 Related operation for setting the IP address of a destination host of traps........................................ 4-12 Table 4-7 Related operation for setting the source interface for traps sending..................................................4-13 Table 4-8 Related operation for setting the system contact information............................................................4-13 Table 4-9 Related operation for setting the system location information.......................................................... 4-14 Table 4-10 Related operation for configuring an SNMP V3 user......................................................................4-15 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xxi
Tables
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide Table 4-11 Related operation for configuring an SNMP V3 group...................................................................4-16 Table 4-12 Related operation for configuring an SNMP MIB view..................................................................4-17 Table 4-13 Related operations for configuring the local SNMP engine ID.......................................................4-18 Table 4-14 Related operations for enabling the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000 .............................................................................................................................................................................4-19 Table 4-15 Related operation for setting the handshake interval.......................................................................4-20 Table 4-16 Related operation for configuring the IP address of the outband NMS interface............................4-21 Table 4-17 Related operation for configuring an NMS route.............................................................................4-22 Table 4-18 Related operation for configuring the IP address of the inband NMS interface..............................4-23 Table 5-1 Data plan for configuring a log host....................................................................................................5-3 Table 5-2 Related operations for configuring a log host......................................................................................5-4 Table 5-3 Related operations for configuring a log host......................................................................................5-5 Table 5-4 Related operations for deactivating a log host.....................................................................................5-5 Table 6-1 User authorities....................................................................................................................................6-2 Table 6-2 Parameter descriptions of a user profile...............................................................................................6-3 Table 6-3 Related operations for adding a user profile........................................................................................6-5 Table 6-4 User Attributes.....................................................................................................................................6-6 Table 6-5 Related operations for adding a user....................................................................................................6-7 Table 6-6 Related operations for modifying the profile bound with a user..........................................................6-8 Table 6-7 Related operations for modifying a user level.....................................................................................6-9 Table 6-8 Related operations for changing a user password..............................................................................6-10 Table 6-9 The related operations for modifying the permitted reenter number.................................................6-11 Table 6-10 Related operations for modifying the appended information...........................................................6-12 Table 6-11 Related operation for disconnection an online user.........................................................................6-13 Table 6-12 Related operations for deleting a user..............................................................................................6-14 Table 7-1 Service board status..............................................................................................................................7-2 Table 7-2 Related operation for setting the description of a shelf........................................................................7-3 Table 7-3 Related operations for resetting the control boards..............................................................................7-4 Table 7-4 Related operation for adding a service board offline...........................................................................7-5 Table 7-5 Related operation for confirming a service board................................................................................7-6 Table 7-6 Related operation for prohibiting a service board................................................................................7-8 Table 7-7 Related operation for managing a subboard.......................................................................................7-10 Table 8-1 Data plan for configuring the remote user authentication....................................................................8-5 Table 8-2 Related operation for specifying the RADIUS server template...........................................................8-9 Table 8-3 Related operation for setting the IP address and port number of a server.........................................8-10 Table 8-4 Related operation for setting the response timeout interval of a RADIUS server.............................8-12 Table 8-5 Related operation for setting the maximum retransmit count of the RADIUS request packets........8-13 Table 8-6 Related operations for configuring an authentication scheme...........................................................8-17 Table 8-7 Related operations for creating a domain...........................................................................................8-18 Table 8-8 Related operation for specifying the RADIUS server template.........................................................8-19 Table 8-9 Related operations for specifying the authentication scheme............................................................8-21 Table 8-10 Related operation for creating a local RSA key pair........................................................................8-22 Table 8-11 Related operations for configuring an SSH user..............................................................................8-24
xxii
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Tables
Table 9-1 VLAN types and applications..............................................................................................................9-3 Table 9-2 VLAN attributes...................................................................................................................................9-4 Table 9-3 Data plan for configuring a smart VLAN............................................................................................9-6 Table 9-4 Data plan for configuring a MUX VLAN............................................................................................9-8 Table 9-5 Data plan for configuring a super VLAN...........................................................................................9-10 Table 9-6 Related operations for creating a VLAN............................................................................................9-15 Table 9-7 Related operation for configuring the VLAN attribute......................................................................9-16 Table 9-8 Related operation for adding an upstream port to a VLAN...............................................................9-18 Table 9-9 Related operations for adding a service port to a VLAN...................................................................9-19 Table 9-10 Related operations for adding service ports in batches....................................................................9-21 Table 9-11 Related operation for setting the description of a service port.........................................................9-22 Table 10-1 Data plan for configuring DHCP standard mode.............................................................................10-4 Table 10-2 Data plan for configuring DHCP option60 mode............................................................................10-7 Table 10-3 Data plan for configuring MAC address segment mode................................................................10-10 Table 10-4 Related operation for creating a DHCP server group....................................................................10-13 Table 10-5 Related operations for setting working mode of a DHCP server...................................................10-14 Table 10-6 Related operations for binding a DHCP server group with a VLAN interface..............................10-15 Table 10-7 Related operations for creating a DHCP option60 domain............................................................10-16 Table 10-8 Related operations for binding a DHCP server group with a DHCP option60 domain.................10-17 Table 10-9 Related operation for configuring the gateway of a DHCP option60 domain...............................10-18 Table 10-10 Related operations for creating a DHCP MAC address segment.................................................10-19 Table 10-11 Related operation for setting the range of a DHCP MAC address segment................................10-20 Table 10-12 Related operations for binding a DHCP server group with a DHCP MAC address segment......10-21 Table 10-13 Related operations for configuring the gateway of a DHCP MAC address segment..................10-22 Table 11-1 Data plan for configuring the ARP proxy........................................................................................11-3 Table 11-2 Related operations for adding a static ARP entry............................................................................11-6 Table 11-3 Data plan of the ARP proxy.............................................................................................................11-6 Table 11-4 Related operation for enabling the ARP proxy................................................................................11-7 Table 12-1 Data plan for configuring the static route at the user side................................................................12-4 Table 12-2 Data plan for configuring RIP..........................................................................................................12-7 Table 12-3 Data plan for configuring OSPF....................................................................................................12-10 Table 12-4 Data plan for configuring the route policy.....................................................................................12-14 Table 12-5 Related operation for adding a static route.....................................................................................12-17 Table 12-6 Related operation for enabling RIP process...................................................................................12-19 Table 12-7 Related operation for setting the RIP version................................................................................12-20 Table 12-8 Related operation for configuring zero field check for RIP-1 packets..........................................12-21 Table 12-9 Related operation for setting the cost of the default route.............................................................12-22 Table 12-10 Related operation for enabling route summarization...................................................................12-23 Table 12-11 Related operation for specifying default routing metric..............................................................12-24 Table 12-12 Related operation for importing routes of other protocols...........................................................12-25 Table 12-13 Related operation for disabling receiving host routes..................................................................12-26 Table 12-14 Related operation for configuring the RIP preference.................................................................12-27 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xxiii
Tables
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide Table 12-15 Related operation for configuring the route filtering policy........................................................12-28 Table 12-16 Related operation for verifying the source IP address of a RIP route update..............................12-29 Table 12-17 Related operation for disabling RIP packet transmission on an interface....................................12-31 Table 12-18 Related operation for configuring the IP Address of a Peer router..............................................12-32 Table 12-19 Related operation for configuring a summary route IP address...................................................12-32 Table 12-20 Related operation for enabling an interface to receive and transmit RIP packets........................12-33 Table 12-21 Related operation for enabling the split horizon function............................................................12-34 Table 12-22 Related operation for enabling the poison reverse function.........................................................12-34 Table 12-23 Related operation for configuring the RIP-2 authentication mode..............................................12-35 Table 12-24 Related operation for configuring the additional metric of a route..............................................12-36 Table 12-25 Related operation for configuring the RIP timer..........................................................................12-37 Table 12-26 Related operation for enabling OSPF.......................................................................................... 12-39 Table 12-27 Related operation for setting an OSPF router ID.........................................................................12-41 Table 12-28 Related operation for entering OSPF area config mode.............................................................. 12-42 Table 12-29 Related operation for configuring subnets for an area.................................................................12-43 Table 12-30 Related operations for configuring a Stub area............................................................................12-43 Table 12-31 Related operation for configuring an NBMA adjacent router......................................................12-44 Table 12-32 Related operation for setting OSPF preference............................................................................12-45 Table 12-33 Related operation for prohibiting an interface from transmitting OSPF packets.........................12-46 Table 12-34 Related operation for configuring the maximum OSPF route count........................................... 12-46 Table 12-35 Related operation for enabling the OSPF logging function.........................................................12-47 Table 12-36 Description of the network types................................................................................................. 12-48 Table 12-37 Related operation for configuring the network type on an OSPF interface.................................12-49 Table 12-38 Related operation for configuring OSPF cost..............................................................................12-50 Table 12-39 Related operation for configuring OSPF packet authentication...................................................12-50 Table 12-40 Related operation for configuring the MTU of the DD packet....................................................12-51 Table 12-41 Related operation for setting the interval for sending Hello packets...........................................12-52 Table 12-42 Related operation for setting the dead time between adjacent routers.........................................12-53 Table 12-43 Related operation for setting the Hello packet poll interval.........................................................12-54 Table 12-44 Related operation for setting the LSA transmit delay..................................................................12-55 Table 12-45 Related operation for setting LSA retransmit interval between adjacent routers........................ 12-55 Table 12-46 Related operation for setting the SPF calculation interval for OSPF...........................................12-56 Table 12-47 Related operation for configuring route summarization between areas.......................................12-57 Table 12-48 Related operation for configuring summarization of routes imported by OSPF......................... 12-58 Table 12-49 Related operation for importing routes from other protocols into OSPF.....................................12-59 Table 12-50 Related operations for setting parameters for OSPF to import external routes........................... 12-60 Table 12-51 Parameters for defining a route policy.........................................................................................12-61 Table 12-52 Related operation for configuring a route policy.........................................................................12-62 Table 12-53 Related operation for defining the route policy matching rule.................................................... 12-63 Table 12-54 Related operation for modifying the attributes of the filtered route............................................ 12-64 Table 13-1 Related operations for enabling the MSTP function........................................................................13-4 Table 13-2 Related operation for setting the working mode of MSTP..............................................................13-6
xxiv
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Tables
Table 13-3 Related operation for setting the MD5-Key for the MD5 encryption algorithm configured on the MST region...................................................................................................................................................................13-8 Table 13-4 Related operations for configuring the MST region name...............................................................13-9 Table 13-5 Related operations for mapping the specified VLAN to the specified MSTP instance.................13-10 Table 13-6 Related operations for mapping all VLANs to the MSTP instances.............................................13-11 Table 13-7 Related operations for setting the MSTP revision level of the device...........................................13-12 Table 13-8 Related operation for activating the configuration of the MST region..........................................13-14 Table 13-9 Related operation for specifying the device as a root bridge or a backup root bridge...................13-15 Table 13-10 Related operations for setting the priority of the device in the specified spanning tree instance ...........................................................................................................................................................................13-17 Table 13-11 Related operation for setting the maximum hop of the MST region...........................................13-18 Table 13-12 Related operation for setting the diameter of the switching fabric..............................................13-19 Table 13-13 Related operation for setting the calculation standard for the path cost......................................13-20 Table 13-14 Related operations for setting the Forward Delay of the specified network bridge.....................13-22 Table 13-15 Related operations for setting the Hello Time of the specified network bridge..........................13-23 Table 13-16 Related operations for setting the Max Age of the specified network bridge..............................13-25 Table 13-17 Related operation for setting the timeout time factor of the specified network bridge................13-26 Table 13-18 Related operations for setting the maximum transmission rate of the specified port..................13-27 Table 13-19 Related operation for setting the specified port as an edge port..................................................13-28 Table 13-20 Related operation for setting the path cost of the port in the specified spanning tree instance. ...........................................................................................................................................................................13-30 Table 13-21 Related operation for setting the priority of the specified port....................................................13-31 Table 13-22 Related operation for setting the point-to-point link connection of the specified port................13-32 Table 13-23 Related operation for enabling the BPDU protection function of the device..............................13-34 Table 13-24 Related operations for enabling the loop protection function of the device................................13-35 Table 13-25 Related operations for enabling the root protection function of the device.................................13-36 Table 14-1 Data plan for configuring NTP broadcast mode..............................................................................14-4 Table 14-2 Data plan for configuring NTP multicast mode...............................................................................14-7 Table 14-3 Data plan for configuring NTP server/client mode........................................................................14-10 Table 14-4 Data plan for configuring NTP peer mode.....................................................................................14-13 Table 14-5 Related operations for configuring NTP ID authentication...........................................................14-17 Table 14-6 Related operation for configuring the NTP master clock..............................................................14-19 Table 14-7 Related operations for configuring NTP broadcast server mode...................................................14-20 Table 14-8 Related operations for configuring NTP broadcast client mode....................................................14-21 Table 14-9 Related operations for configuring the NTP multicast mode.........................................................14-23 Table 14-10 Related operations for configuring NTP server/client mode.......................................................14-24 Table 14-11 Related operation for configuring NTP peer mode......................................................................14-25 Table 14-12 Related operations for configuring the authority of access to a local device's NTP service.......14-26 Table 14-13 Related operations for configuring an interface for transmitting or receiving NTP packets.......14-27 Table 15-1 Related operation for adding a static MAC address.........................................................................15-3 Table 15-2 Related operation for configuring MAC address filtering...............................................................15-6 Table 16-1 Related operation for configuring the synwait timer.......................................................................16-3 Table 16-2 Related operation for configuring the finwait timer.........................................................................16-3 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xxv
Tables
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide Table 16-3 Related operation for configuring the socket buffer........................................................................16-4 Table 16-4 Related operations for enabling the IP packets debugging..............................................................16-5 Table 16-5 Related operations for enabling the IP packets debugging..............................................................16-6 Table 17-1 ACL types........................................................................................................................................17-3 Table 17-2 Mapping between the traffic classes and parameters.......................................................................17-7 Table 17-3 Description of traffic classes............................................................................................................17-8 Table 17-4 Data plan for configuring the basic ACL.......................................................................................17-10 Table 17-5 Data plan for configuring the advanced ACL................................................................................17-12 Table 17-6 Data plan for configuring the layer 2 ACL....................................................................................17-13 Table 17-7 Data plan for configuring the customized ACL.............................................................................17-15 Table 17-8 ACL number range.........................................................................................................................17-17 Table 17-9 Related operations for creating an ACL.........................................................................................17-17 Table 17-10 Related operation for setting the step...........................................................................................17-19 Table 17-11 Related operation for creating a basic ACL rule..........................................................................17-20 Table 17-12 Related operation for creating an advanced ACL rule.................................................................17-21 Table 17-13 Related operation for creating a layer 2 ACL rule.......................................................................17-22 Table 17-14 Description of letters and their offset values................................................................................17-23 Table 17-15 Related operation for creating a used defined ACL rule..............................................................17-24 Table 17-16 Related operation for activating the ACL of a port......................................................................17-25 Table 18-1 Related operations for configuring the traffic entry.........................................................................18-5 Table 18-2 Relationship between the weight values and the actual queues.......................................................18-6 Table 18-3 Related operations for setting the queue scheduling........................................................................18-7 Table 18-4 Related operation for configuring the traffic restriction..................................................................18-9 Table 18-5 Related operation for adding a priority tag to the traffic that matches the ACL rule.................... 18-10 Table 18-6 Related operation for collecting the statistics of the traffic that matches the ACL rule................18-11 Table 18-7 Related operation for configuring the traffic mirroring.................................................................18-12 Table 18-8 Related operation for redirecting the traffic that matches the ACL rule........................................18-13 Table 18-9 Related operation for setting the rate limit for an upstream port...................................................18-13 Table 19-1 Related operation for setting the Ethernet encapsulation type.........................................................19-6 Table 19-2 Related operations for enabling the DHCP option82.......................................................................19-7 Table 19-3 Related operation for binding the IP address...................................................................................19-9 Table 19-4 Related operations for enabling anti MAC spoofing..................................................................... 19-10 Table 19-5 Related operations for enabling anti MAC spoofing..................................................................... 19-11 Table 20-1 Related operations for enabling anti DoS attack..............................................................................20-4 Table 20-2 Related operation for enabling the function of anti IP attack..........................................................20-5 Table 20-3 Related operation for enabling the function of anti ICMP attack....................................................20-5 Table 20-4 Related operation for enabling the function of source route filtering..............................................20-6 Table 20-5 Related operation for configuring MAC address filtering...............................................................20-7 Table 20-6 Related operations for configuring the firewall black list function.................................................20-9 Table 20-7 Related operation for configuring the firewall function.................................................................20-11 Table 20-8 Related operations for configuring an accessible address segment............................................... 20-11 Table 20-9 Related operations for configuring the inaccessible address segment...........................................20-12
xxvi
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Tables
Table 21-1 Encapsulation mode mapping between the MA5600 and the modem.............................................21-3 Table 21-2 Data plan for configuring the ADSL2+ PPPoE/IPoE service..........................................................21-5 Table 21-3 Data plan for configuring the ADSL2+ IPoA service......................................................................21-9 Table 21-4 Data plan for configuring the ADSL2+ PPPoA service.................................................................21-14 Table 21-5 Parameters of an ADSL2+ line profile...........................................................................................21-23 Table 21-6 Related operations for adding an ADSL2+ line profile.................................................................21-25 Table 21-7 Related operations for adding an extended ADSL2+ line profile..................................................21-28 Table 21-8 Parameters of an ADSL2+ alarm profile.......................................................................................21-31 Table 21-9 Related operations for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile..............................................................21-33 Table 21-10 Related operations for activating an ADSL2+ port......................................................................21-35 Table 21-11 Related operations for enabling IPoA protocol conversion.........................................................21-37 Table 21-12 Related operation for setting the aging time of IPoA forwarding entry.......................................21-38 Table 21-13 Related operations for setting the default gateway of the IPoA user...........................................21-38 Table 21-14 Related operations for enabling PPPoA protocol conversion......................................................21-41 Table 21-15 Related operation for enabling PPPoA/PPPoE MRU negotiation...............................................21-43 Table 21-16 Related operations for querying an ADSL2+ port.......................................................................21-44 Table 21-17 Related operation for enabling an ADSL modem to automatically configure the PVC..............21-45 Table 22-1 Encapsulation type mapping between the MA5600 and the modem...............................................22-3 Table 22-2 Data plan for configuring the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE service............................................................22-5 Table 22-3 Data plan for configuring the SHDSL IPoA service......................................................................22-11 Table 22-4 Data plan for configuring the SHDSL PPPoA service...................................................................22-16 Table 22-5 Parameters of an SHDSL line profile.............................................................................................22-23 Table 22-6 Parameters of an SHDSL alarm profile.........................................................................................22-26 Table 22-7 Related operations for adding an SHDSL alarm profile................................................................22-27 Table 22-8 Related operation for configuring the SHDSL multi-pair binding................................................22-29 Table 22-9 Related operation for configuring the SHDSL EFM multi-port binding.......................................22-30 Table 22-10 Related operations for activating an SHDSL port........................................................................22-31 Table 23-1 Data plan for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service............................................................23-4 Table 23-2 Data plan for configuring the VDSL2 IPoA service......................................................................23-11 Table 23-3 Data plan for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoA service...................................................................23-19 Table 23-4 Parameters of a VDSL2 line profile...............................................................................................23-28 Table 23-5 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 line profile......................................................................23-31 Table 23-6 Parameters of a VDSL2 channel profile........................................................................................23-34 Table 23-7 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 channel profile...............................................................23-34 Table 23-8 Parameters of a VDSL2 line template............................................................................................23-36 Table 23-9 Related operations for configuring a VDSL2 line template...........................................................23-37 Table 23-10 Parameters of a VDSL2 line alarm profile...................................................................................23-39 Table 23-11 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 line alarm profile.........................................................23-40 Table 23-12 Parameters of VDSL2 channel alarm profile...............................................................................23-42 Table 23-13 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 channel alarm profile...................................................23-42 Table 23-14 Parameters for configuring a VDSL2 alarm template..................................................................23-44 Table 23-15 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 alarm template.............................................................23-44 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xxvii
Tables
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide Table 23-16 Related operations for activating a VDSL2 port..........................................................................23-47 Table 23-17 Related operations for querying a VDSL2 port...........................................................................23-48 Table 24-1 Data plan for configuring the upstream link protection...................................................................24-4 Table 24-2 Related operation for configuring a protection group......................................................................24-6 Table 25-1 Ethernet ports of the MA5600..........................................................................................................25-3 Table 25-2 Data plan for the Ethernet access service.........................................................................................25-4 Table 25-3 Related operation for enabling the flow control of an Ethernet port.............................................25-14 Table 25-4 Related operations for enabling traffic suppression.......................................................................25-16 Table 25-5 Related operation for enabling the Ethernet port aggregation.......................................................25-17 Table 25-6 Related operation for enabling the mirroring function of an Ethernet port...................................25-18 Table 25-7 Related operation for adding an Ethernet Port to a VLAN............................................................25-19 Table 25-8 Related operation for configuring the outer QinQ VLAN of the Ethernet port.............................25-20 Table 26-1 Data plan for configuring the ATM-DSLAM access.......................................................................26-3 Table 26-2 Related operation for setting the OPTIC port mode........................................................................26-7 Table 26-3 Related operation for setting the OPTIC port type..........................................................................26-8 Table 26-4 Parameters of an IMA group............................................................................................................26-9 Table 26-5 Related operations for adding an IMA group................................................................................26-10 Table 26-6 Related operations for setting the IMA group mode......................................................................26-12 Table 26-7 Related operations for adding an IMA link....................................................................................26-13 Table 26-8 Related operations for setting the line type of an E3 port..............................................................26-14 Table 26-9 Related operation for setting the E3 port type................................................................................26-15 Table 26-10 Related operations for setting the Tx clock of an E3 port............................................................26-16 Table 27-1 Data plan for configuring the MPLS based on binding the PVC with the PW profile....................27-3 Table 27-2 Data plan for configuring the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW profile.................27-6 Table 27-3 Related operations for configuring the LSR ID.............................................................................27-11 Table 27-4 Related operations for enabling MPLS..........................................................................................27-12 Table 27-5 Related commands for configuring the static LSP.........................................................................27-13 Table 27-6 Related operations for configuring ingress LSR of the static LSP................................................27-13 Table 27-7 Related operations for configuring egress LSR of the static LSP..................................................27-14 Table 27-8 Related operations for configuring LSP CAR...............................................................................27-15 Table 27-9 Related operations for enabling the MPLS LDP............................................................................27-17 Table 27-10 Related operations for configuring parameters of LDP basic discovery.....................................27-19 Table 27-11 Related operations for configuring the parameters of the LDP extended discovery...................27-20 Table 27-12 Related operations for configuring parameters of the LDP basic session....................................27-21 Table 27-13 Related operations for configuring parameters of the LDP extended session.............................27-21 Table 27-14 Related operations for configuring the LDP LSP triggering policy.............................................27-23 Table 27-15 Related operations for configuring the LDP label retention mode..............................................27-24 Table 27-16 Related operations for configuring the LDP loopback detection.................................................27-25 Table 27-17 Related operations for configuring the LDP MD5 authentication...............................................27-27 Table 27-18 Related operation for enabling the LDP MD5 MTU signaling function.....................................27-28 Table 27-19 Related operation for enabling the MPLS L2VPN......................................................................27-29 Table 27-20 Related operations for binding a PVC with a PW template.........................................................27-31
xxviii
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Tables
Table 27-21 Related operations for binding a VLAN with a PW template......................................................27-31 Table 28-1 Data plan for establishing an MPLS TE tunnel by using RSVP-TE................................................28-3 Table 28-2 Related operation for enabling MPLS TE feature............................................................................28-7 Table 28-3 Related operation for creating an MPLS TE tunnel.........................................................................28-8 Table 28-4 Related operations for configuring bandwidth of links..................................................................28-10 Table 28-5 Related operations for enabling OSPF TE.....................................................................................28-11 Table 28-6 Related operations for configuring the MPLS TE explicit path.....................................................28-12 Table 28-7 Related operations for configuring constraints for an MPLS TE tunnel........................................28-13 Table 28-8 Related operations for configuring CSPF of an MPLS..................................................................28-14 Table 28-9 Related operation for establishing an MPLS TE tunnel by using RSVP-TE.................................28-15 Table 28-10 Related operations for configuring RSVP Hello extension......................................................... 28-18 Table 28-11 Related operation for configuring the resource reservation style................................................ 28-19 Table 28-12 Related operations for configuring RSVP timers.........................................................................28-20 Table 28-13 Related operations for configuring RSVP message transmission reliability ..............................28-22 Table 28-14 Related operation for enabling RSVP-TE Srefresh......................................................................28-23 Table 28-15 Related operation for enabling RSVP-TE reservation confirmation mechanism........................28-24 Table 28-16 Related operation for enabling RSVP authentication.................................................................. 28-25 Table 28-17 Related operation for configuring tie-breaking of CSPF.............................................................28-27 Table 28-18 Related operation for configuring route pining............................................................................28-28 Table 28-19 Related operations for configuring administrative group and affinity property.......................... 28-30 Table 28-20 Related operation for configuring reoptimization of CR-LSP.....................................................28-31 Table 28-21 Related operation for configuring loop detection........................................................................ 28-33 Table 28-22 Related operation for configuring route record and label record.................................................28-34 Table 28-23 Related operations for configuring parameters of tunnel establishment......................................28-35 Table 28-24 Related operation for configuring tunnel priority........................................................................28-36 Table 29-1 Data plan for configuring the wholesale service..............................................................................29-3 Table 30-1 Data plan for configuring the QinQ VLAN leased line service.......................................................30-3 Table 30-2 Related operation for enabling transparent transmission of BPDUs................................................30-6 Table 31-1 Data plan for configuring IGMP proxy............................................................................................31-4 Table 31-2 Data plan for configuring IGMP snooping......................................................................................31-7 Table 31-3 Data plan for configuring the subtended multicast service............................................................31-11 Table 31-4 Data plan for the sample network of the multicast service in MSTP networking......................... 31-17 Table 31-5 Related operations for configuring the IGMP upstream port.........................................................31-25 Table 31-6 Related operation for configuring a subtending port..................................................................... 31-26 Table 31-7 Related operation for configuring a program for a static subtending port.....................................31-27 Table 31-8 Related operation for enabling the IGMP proxy authorization......................................................31-29 Table 31-9 Related operation for setting the robustness variable.....................................................................31-31 Table 31-10 Related operation for setting the general query interval..............................................................31-32 Table 31-11 Related operation for setting the maximum response time to the general query.........................31-33 Table 31-12 Related operation for setting the number of specific queries.......................................................31-34 Table 31-13 Related operation for setting the specific query interval..............................................................31-36 Table 31-14 Related operation for setting the maximum response time for the specific query.......................31-37 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xxix
Tables
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide Table 31-15 Related operation for setting the unsolicited report interval........................................................31-38 Table 31-16 Related operation for setting the TTL for a V2 router.................................................................31-39 Table 31-17 Related operation for setting the preview recognition time.........................................................31-40 Table 31-18 Related operation for enabling the user action report function....................................................31-42 Table 31-19 Related operation for enabling the proxy of the IGMP report packet..........................................31-43 Table 31-20 Related operation for enabling the proxy of the IGMP leave packet...........................................31-44 Table 31-21 Related operations for adding a program.....................................................................................31-48 Table 31-22 Related operation for enabling the bandwidth management function..........................................31-50 Table 31-23 Related operation for modifying an authority profile..................................................................31-54 Table 31-24 Related operations for adding a BTV user...................................................................................31-56 Table 31-25 Related operations for modifying the attributes of a user............................................................31-57 Table 31-26 Related operation for blocking a BTV user.................................................................................31-58 Table 31-27 Related operation for binding a user with an authority profile....................................................31-59 Table 31-28 Related operation for enabling the function of monitoring BTV users........................................31-61 Table 31-29 Related operation for enabling the preview function...................................................................31-62 Table 31-30 Related operation for setting the preview auto reset time............................................................31-64 Table 31-31 Related operation for resetting the preview record......................................................................31-66 Table 31-32 Related operations for enabling the logging function..................................................................31-67 Table 31-33 Related operation for setting the logging interval........................................................................31-69 Table 31-34 Related operations for configuring log reporting.........................................................................31-70 Table 32-1 Modes to provide the triple play service..........................................................................................32-2 Table 32-2 Data plan for configuring the triple play service -multiple PVCs for multiple services..................32-4 Table 32-3 Data plan for configuring the triple play service - single PVC for multiple services....................32-10 Table 32-4 Data plan for configuring the triple play service by means of single PVC for multiple services ...........................................................................................................................................................................32-16 Table 32-5 Data plan for configuring the triple play service - single PVC for multiple services (based on the service encapsulation type)............................................................................................................................................32-21 Table 33-1 Data plan for configuring Ethernet OAM........................................................................................33-4 Table 33-2 Related operation for creating an MD..............................................................................................33-7 Table 33-3 Related operations for creating an MA............................................................................................33-8 Table 33-4 Related operation for creating an MEP............................................................................................33-9 Table 33-5 Related operation for creating an RMEP.......................................................................................33-10 Table 33-6 Related operation for enabling the CFM globally..........................................................................33-11 Table 33-7 Related operation for enabling CFM alarm globally.....................................................................33-12 Table 33-8 Related operation for enabling the administration function of an MEP........................................33-13 Table 33-9 Related operation for enabling the CC transmission of an MEP...................................................33-14 Table 33-10 Related operation for enabling the global detection function of an RMEP.................................33-15 Table 33-11 Related operation for enabling detection function of the RMEP.................................................33-16 Table 33-12 Related operation for configuring the priorities for transmitting CCMs/LTMs of an MEP........33-17 Table 33-13 Related operation for configuring the interval for an MA to transmit a CC................................33-18 Table 33-14 Related operations for configuring loop detection function.........................................................33-20 Table 33-15 Related operations for configuring Linktrace function................................................................33-21 Table 34-1 Data plan for detection of MPLS OAM for static LSP connectivity...............................................34-3
xxx
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Tables
Table 34-2 Data plan for the MPLS OAM protection switchover.....................................................................34-7 Table 34-3 Related operations for configuring the MPLS OAM function of the ingress................................34-12 Table 34-4 Related operations for configuring the MPLS OAM function of the egress................................. 34-13 Table 34-5 Related operations for configuring the tunnel protection group....................................................34-14 Table 34-6 Related operation for switching over the protection group manually............................................34-15 Table 34-7 Related operations for enabling the protection group to output the debugging information.........34-16 Table 35-1 Correspondence between the POWER4845 DIP switch and the slave node number......................35-3 Table 35-2 Correspondence between the H801ESC DIP switch and the slave node number............................35-3 Table 35-3 Correspondence between the FAN DIP switch and the slave node number....................................35-4 Table 35-4 Data plan for EMU configuration....................................................................................................35-4 Table 35-5 Related operations for adding an EMU............................................................................................35-9 Table 35-6 Commands for configuring the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU..........................................................35-10 Table 35-7 Related operations for configuring the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU..............................................35-12 Table 35-8 Commands for configuring an H561ESC EMU............................................................................ 35-12 Table 35-9 Related operations for configuring an H561ESC EMU.................................................................35-13 Table 35-10 Commands for configuring a POWER4845 EMU.......................................................................35-14 Table 35-11 Related operations for configuring a POWER4845 EMU...........................................................35-16 Table 35-12 Related operations for configuring the FAN alarm report...........................................................35-17 Table 35-13 Related operations for setting the fan speed adjustment mode....................................................35-18 Table 35-14 Related operations for setting the FAN speed..............................................................................35-19 Table 36-1 Data plan for the sample MSTP network.........................................................................................36-4 Table 37-1 Data plan for the sample subtended network...................................................................................37-4
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xxxi
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
About This Document
About This Document Purpose This document describes the configuration of various services supported by the MA5600/ MA5603. The description covers the following topics: l
Purpose
l
Networking
l
Data plan
l
Prerequisite(s)
l
Note
l
Configuration flowchart
l
Configuration procedure
l
Result
This document helps users to know the configuration of various services on the MA5600/ MA5603.
Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Version
MA5600/MA5603
V300R003
N2000 BMS
V200R011
This document uses the MA5600 as an example since the MA5600 and the MA5603 support the same software functions, although their hardware is different. Particular description for the MA5603 is not provided here.
Intended Audience The intended audience of this document is: Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
About This Document l
Installation and commissioning engineers
l
System maintenance engineers
l
Data configuration engineers
Organization This document consists of the following chapters and is organized as follows.
2
Chapter…
Describes…
1 Managing the License
The license feature and its configuration process.
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
How to configure the maintenance terminal
3 Getting Started With CLI
The basic CLI operations on the MA5600
4 Configuring the Network Management
How to configure the network management system
5 Configuring the Log Host
How to configure the log host
6 Managing Users
User levels and user management operations
7 Managing the Device
How to configure the hardware of the MA5600
8 Configuring the Remote User Authentication
How to configure the remote users authentication
9 Configuring the VLAN
How to configure various VLANs, including standard VLAN, smart VLAN, MUX VLAN and super VLAN
10 Configuring the DHCP Relay
How to configure DHCP relay to obtain IP addresses dynamically
11 Configuring the ARP & ARP Proxy
How to configure ARP and ARP proxy
12 Configuring the Routing Protocol
How to configure the static and dynamic routing protocols supported by the MA5600
13 Configuring MSTP
How to configure MSTP
14 Configuring NTP
How to configure the four NTP modes
15 Configuring MAC Address
How to configure MAC addresses and the MAC address pool
16 Configuring TCP/IP Connection
How to configure TCP and IP connections
17 Configuring ACL
ACL and how to configure ACL on the MA5600
18 Configuring the QoS
QoS and how to configure QoS on the MA5600
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
About This Document
Chapter…
Describes…
19 Configuring User Security
How to configure user security on the MA5600
20 Configuring System Security
How to configure system security on the MA5600
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
The ADSL2+ technology and how to configure the ADSL2 + access service on the MA5600
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
The SHDSL technology and how to configure the SHDSL access service on the MA5600
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
The VDSL2 technology and how to configure the VDSL2 access service on the MA5600
24 Configuring Protection for Upstream Link
The service protection on the upstream port of the MA5600
25 Configuring Device Subtending
The Ethernet technology and how to subtend MA5600 devices
27 Configuring MPLS Access
MPLS applications to the MA5600.
28 Configuring MPLS RSVP-TE
MPLS RSVP-TE applications to the MA5600
29 Configuring the VLAN Stacking Wholesale Service
How to configure the wholesale service on the MA5600
30 Configuring the QinQ VLAN Leased Line Service
How to configure the private line service on the MA5600
31 Configuring the Multicast Service
How to configure the multicast service on the MA5600
32 Configuring the Triple Play Service
How to configure the triple play service on the MA5600
33 Configuring the Ethernet OAM
Applications of Ethernet OAM to the MA5600
34 Configuring the MPLS OAM
Applications of MPLS OAM to the MA5600
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
The EMUs supported by the MA5600 and how to configure them
36 MSTP Networking Example
How to configure the integrated networking of MSTP
37 Subtending Networking Example
How to configure subtending integrated networking
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and abbreviations used in the document
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
About This Document
Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
4
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italic.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
About This Document
Convention
Description
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
GUI Conventions Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in Boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the “>” signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operation
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
About This Document
Update History Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in 04 (2007-11-30) This is the fourth release. The following contents are modified: l
31 Configuring the Multicast Service
l
32.2 Configuration Example of Triple Play - Multiple PVCs for Multiple Services
Updates in 03 (2007-10-18) This is the third release. The following contents are added: l
License management
l
SHDSL.bis line
The following contents are modified: l
14.1 Overview:The NTP automatically adjusts the local time through time zone settings
l
12.8.12 Setting the VLAN-Based Transparent Transmission for OSPF Packets:VLAN-based transparent transmission of OSPF multicast packets
l
9.1 Overview:Service ports support standard VLANs for L2 interconnection
l
21.6 Adding an Extended ADSL2+ Line Profile:The ADSL2+ extended line profile supports L2 low-consumption mode
Updates in 02 (2007-01-10) This is the second release. The following chapters are modified or added: l
MSTP Configuration
l
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
l
Protection Configuration for Upstream Link
l
MPLS OAM Configuration
l
Ethernet OAM Configuration
Updates in 01 (2006-07-18) This is the first release.
6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1
1 Managing the License
Managing the License
About This Chapter This chapter describes the license feature and its configuration process. 1.1 Overview of the License This section describes the license function and its application to the MA5600. 1.2 License Principles This section describes the function principle and implementation principle of the license. 1.3 Configuration Example of the License Application This operation enables you to configure the license application. 1.4 Configuring the License Server This operation enables you to configure the IP address of the license server and configure the TCP port number used for the communication between the MA5600 and the license server. 1.5 Configuring the ESN This operation enables you to configure the equipment serial number (ESN) for the device. The ESN uniquely identifies the device on the license server.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-1
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1 Managing the License
1.1 Overview of the License This section describes the license function and its application to the MA5600.
Service Description With the license function enabled, the license server performs license control on the function entries and resource entries supported by the MA5600 and provides individualized services for customers.
Service Specifications The control entries of the license function include function entries and resource entries. A function entry refers to the entry whose license is controlled based on the function. The controllable function entries supported by the MA5600 include: l
The ETH OAM function
l
The G.SHDSL.bis function
l
The G.SHDSL binding function
l
The illegal access control function of the broadband metropolitan area network (MAN)
l
The MPLS function
l
The port rate measurement function
A resource entry refers to the entry whose license is controlled based on the count. The controllable resource entries supported by the MA5600 include: l
BTV user count
l
BTV program count
l
Count of conversion from xPOA to xPOE
l
Count of ADSL2+/SHDSL/VDSL2 port
l
Count of ADSL2+ port using the Annex M feature
l
Count of ADSL2+ port using the INP+ feature NOTE
l
If you need to use the license function supported by the MA5600, consider the deployment of the license server in data planning.
l
It is recommended to install the license server on a same computer with the network management system (NMS) server. If no NMS server exists, deploy one license server in the network.
1.2 License Principles This section describes the function principle and implementation principle of the license.
1-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1 Managing the License
License Function Principle l
The MA5600 adopts the network license scheme. That is, the license server is deployed in the network. The license server can be installed on a same computer with the NMS server. The two servers are different components. The license server can be also installed on a separated server. Each digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM) device functions as a license client. The license server manages the licenses of all the clients in a centralized manner.
l
In each management range of the license server, each product has one license file. In general, a management range can be a district or a city. The license file is stored on the license server. The license file defines the resource entries of the product. Since one license server can manage multiple products, multiple license files can be stored on one license server.
License Implementation Principle l
In the system initialization process of the MA5600, each service module must register their controlled resource entries and function entries. After the system runs in the normal state, the management module of a license client obtains the authorization information about the license controlling entries of the license client from the license server according to the registration information.
l
When you configure a service module through the command line or NMS, the device checks whether the resource entries of the service module are overloaded or the function entries of the service module are authorized. –
For license-controlled resource entries, if the service entries are overloaded, the system terminates the service configuration and prompts that the license resources are insufficient.
–
For license-controlled function entries, if the function entries are not authorized, the system prompts you that the functions are not authorized.
–
If the resource entries are not overloaded or the function entries are authorized, the system allows you to continue the service configuration.
–
For a license-controlled resource entry, the license resource applied for the service module is released in deleting the service configuration.
1.3 Configuration Example of the License Application This operation enables you to configure the license application.
Prerequisite l
The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l
All boards of the MA5600 are normal.
l
The license function is enabled.
Networking Figure 1-1 shows the sample network for configuring the license application. The license function is enabled on the MA5600. The license server is installed on the same computer as the NMS server (N2000 BMS). The license management tool installed on the N2000 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1 Managing the License
client configures and manages the license file. MA5600_A communicates with the license server through port 0/7/0. The TCP port number is 10010. Figure 1-1 Sample network for configuring the license application N2000 BMS&License server
100.100.100.1/24
Internet N2000 client Router 60.60.60.2/24 60.60.60.1/24
...... MA5600_A
MA5600_B
MA5600_N
Data Plan Table 1-1 lists the data plan for configuring the license application. Table 1-1 Data plan for configuring the license application Item
Data
License server
IP address: 100.100.100.1/24 TCP port number: 10010
MA5600_A
Uplink port: 0/7/0 VLAN ID: 10 IP address of the layer 3 interface: 60.60.60.1/24
Router
IP address of the port connecting to MA5600_A: 60.60.60.2/24
NOTE
1-4
l
The configuration at the MA5600 side is the same. This section takes the configuration of MA5600_A as an example.
l
This section describes only the configuration at the device side. For how to configure the license server, refer to the related configuration manual of the license server.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1 Managing the License
Configuration Flowchart Figure 1-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the license application. Figure 1-2 Flowchart for configuring the license application Start
Configure the interface communicating with the license server
Configute the device ESN
Specify the license server
Save the data
End
Procedure Step 1 Configure the interface that is for communicating with the license server. 1.
Create a VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 smart
2.
Configure the uplink port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0 huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 10
3.
Configure the layer 3 interface. huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#quit huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10 huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 60.60.60.1 24
Step 2 Configure the equipment serial number (ESN). huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#quit huawei(config)#license esn 60.60.60.1
Step 3 Specify the license server. huawei(config)#license server ipaddress 100.100.100.1 tcpport 10010
Step 4 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1 Managing the License
Result After the configuration, run the display license info command to check whether the communication between the device and the license server is normal. MA5600_A is initialized, each service module can register the controlled resource entries or function entries in the normal state.
1.4 Configuring the License Server This operation enables you to configure the IP address of the license server and configure the TCP port number used for the communication between the MA5600 and the license server.
Context l
The IP address of the license server and the TCP port number must be consistent with the data in the actual network plan.
l
When the IP address of the license server and the TCP port number change, you need to re-configure the device.
l
Two IP addresses of the license server can be configured at the device side. The two IP addresses must be different from each other. Only one TCP port number can be configured at the device side.
Procedure Step 1 Run the license server command to configure the license server. Step 2 Run the display license info command to query the license basic information. ----End
Example To configure the IP address of license server 1 as 10.10.10.1, that of license server 2 as 20.20.20.1, and TCP port number as 1024, do as follows: huawei(config)#license server ipaddress 10.10.10.1 20.20.20.1 tcpport 1024 huawei(config)#display license info License switch: enable ESN: 10.71.55.192 IP address of the first server: 10.10.10.1 IP address of the second server: 20.20.20.1 TCP port number: 1024 Communication status: abnormal License status: unregistered NOTE
1-6
l
When the upper layer device is not connected, the communication status of the license client is abnormal. The license status of the license client is unregistered. In this case, no controlled resource can be configured and no controlled function can be enabled.
l
When the related configuration is complete in the network, the communication status of the license client is normal. The license status of the license client is registered. In this case, new controlled resources can be configured and controlled functions can be enabled within the management range of the license.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1 Managing the License
Related Operation Table 1-2 lists the related operation for configuring the license server. Table 1-2 Related operation for configuring the license server To...
Run the Command...
Configure the ESN
license esn
Query the features controlled by the license and the information about the features
display license feature
1.5 Configuring the ESN This operation enables you to configure the equipment serial number (ESN) for the device. The ESN uniquely identifies the device on the license server.
Context The ESN must be the IP address of the port connecting to the license server. When the IP address of the port connecting to the license server changes, you should re-configure the ESN for the device.
Procedure Step 1 Run the license esn command to configure the ESN for the device. Step 2 Run the display license info command to query the license basic information. ----End
Example Assume that the device connects to the license server through the maintenance network port. The IP address of the maintenance network port is 60.60.60.1. To configure the ESN for the device, do as follows: NOTE
Run the interface meth command to enter the MEth mode. Then run the ip address command to configure the IP address of the maintenance network port. huawei(config)#license esn 60.60.60.1 huawei(config)#display license info License switch: enable ESN: 60.60.60.1 IP address of the first server: 100.100.100.1 IP address of the second server: 200.200.200.1 TCP port number: 1024 Communication status: abnormal License status: unregistered
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-7
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1 Managing the License NOTE
l
When the upper layer device is not connected, the communication status of the license client is abnormal. The license status of the license client is unregistered. In this case, no controlled resource can be configured and no controlled function can be enabled.
l
When the related configuration is complete in the network, the communication status of the license client is normal. The license status of the license client is registered. In this case, new controlled resources can be configured and controlled functions can be enabled within the management range of the license.
Related Operation Table 1-3 lists the related operation for configuring the ESN for the device. Table 1-3 Related operation for configuring the ESN for the device
1-8
To...
Run the Command...
Configure the license server
license server
Query the features controlled by the license and the information about the features
display license feature
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
About This Chapter This chapter describes the different maintenance modes of the MA5600 through a maintenance terminal and features of the features of the maintenance modes. 2.1 Overview This section describes the different maintenance modes of the MA5600 through the maintenance terminal and features of the different maintenance modes. 2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port This operation enables you to log in to and configure the MA5600 using the HyperTerminal of the Windows operating system. 2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Port This operation enables you to log in to and configure the MA5600 through the remote serial port. 2.4 Configuring the Terminal Through the Outband Management Channel This operation enables you to connect the maintenance terminal to the MA5600 over a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN), and configure the MA5600 through the outband management channel. 2.5 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband Management Channel This operation enables you to configure the MA5600 through the inband management channel. 2.6 Configuring the Terminal Through SSH This operation enables you to connect the maintenance terminal to the MA5600 over a LAN or a WAN and configure the MA5600 through SSH.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-1
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2.1 Overview This section describes the different maintenance modes of the MA5600 through the maintenance terminal and features of the different maintenance modes. You can maintain the SmartAX MA5600 Multi-service Access Module (the MA5600 for short) through a maintenance terminal in command line interface (CLI) mode. The configuration of a maintenance terminal involves: l
2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port
l
2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Port
l
2.4 Configuring the Terminal Through the Outband Management Channel
l
2.5 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband Management Channel
l
2.6 Configuring the Terminal Through SSH
Table 2-1 lists the features of the different maintenance modes. Table 2-1 Features of the different maintenance modes Maintenance mode
Description
Feature
Local serial port
Uses the HyperTerminal of the operating system for configuration.
No network management software is needed.
Remote serial port
Uses the HyperTerminal of the operating system for configuration.
It connects modems at both the MA5600 side and the maintenance terminal side.
Inband management channel
Uses the service channel of the MA5600 to manage the network device.
l
Advantages: It adopts flexible networking, without needing extra networking device, thus saving networking cost
l
Disadvantages: The maintenance work cannot be carried out if the service channel fails.
l
Advantages: It provides reliable device management channel. The fault can be located in time even if the managed device fails.
l
Disadvantage: An extra network device is required to set up the maintenance channel.
Outband management channel
2-2
Uses the maintenance network port (ETH) of the control board (SCU) of the MA5600 to manage the system.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Maintenance mode
Description
Feature
SSH mode
Uses the service channel of the MA5600, or the maintenance network port of the SCU board to manage the system.
Secure Shell (SSH) ensures network security by the authentication, encryption and identification functions. When a user telnets to the MA5600 from an insecure network, SSH protects the MA5600 from malicious events such as IP address spoofing and clear text password interception.
2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port This operation enables you to log in to and configure the MA5600 using the HyperTerminal of the Windows operating system.
Networking Figure 2-1 shows the networking for configuring the MA5600 through the local serial port. Figure 2-1 Networking for configuring the MA5600 through the local serial port RS-232 cable
Serial port
CON ETH MON
SCU
MA5600
PC
Configuration Flowchart Figure 2-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the local serial port.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-3
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Figure 2-2 Flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the local serial port Start
Connect the serial port cable
Run the HyperTerminal
Set the HyperTerminal parameters
Define the terminal type
Set ASCII code
Log in to the system
End
Procedure Step 1 Connect the serial port cable. Use a RS-232 serial port cable to connect the serial port of the PC to the CON port of the SCU board, as shown in Figure 2-1. Step 2 Start the HyperTerminal. 1.
Set up a connection. Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication > HyperTerminal to start the HyperTerminal and set up a serial port connection. Input the name that is to be connected to the MA5600. Click OK.
2.
Configure the serial port. Select the standard character terminal or PC terminal serial port that is actually connected to the MA5600 (assuming it to be serial COM2). Click OK.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the terminal. In Step 2, click OK. Then, set the serial port parameters in the dialog box as shown in Figure 2-3. The parameters are set as follows:
2-4
l
Bits per second: 9600
l
Data bits: 8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide l
Parity: None
l
Stop bits: 1
l
Flow control: None
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
NOTE
l
When setting the baud rate, make sure the baud rate of the HyperTerminal is consistent with that of the serial port. By default, the baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s.
l
There may be illegible characters in the input information after you log in to the system. This is usually due to baud rate inconsistency between the HyperTerminal and the system. In this case, use a different baud rate to log in to the system. The system supports the baud rates of 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s, 57600 bit/s and 115200 bit/s.
Figure 2-3 Setting parameters of the terminal
Click OK. Step 4 Define the terminal emulation type. Select File > Properties in the HyperTerminal interface. Click the Settings tab. Select VT100 or Auto Detection as the type of terminal emulation, as shown in Figure 2-4.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-5
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Figure 2-4 Setting the terminal emulation type
Step 5 Set ASCII code. Click ASCII Setup. Set the line delay and character delay as 200 ms, as shown in Figure 2-5. NOTE
When you paste text to the HyperTerminal, character delay controls the character transmit speed, and line delay controls the interval of sending every line. A too short delay leads to the loss of characters. When the pasted text is displayed abnormally, you can modify the setting.
2-6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Figure 2-5 Setting ASCII code
----End
Result In the HyperTerminal interface, press Enter. The system displays a message, requesting you to enter the user name. Enter the user name and password for user registration (by default, the super user name is root and password is admin), and wait till the command line prompt (MA5600>) appears. If the login fails, click the Hang-up icon first, and then the Dial icon. If you still fail to log in, return to the previous steps to check the parameter settings and physical connections, and then try again.
2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Port This operation enables you to log in to and configure the MA5600 through the remote serial port.
Prerequisite Before using a serial port for remote maintenance, connect a modem at both the MA5600 and the PC sides. In this way, you can set up a remote connection between the PC and the MA5600 through modem dialup. The modem at the MA5600 side is referred to as the called modem. The modem at the PC side is referred to as the calling modem. The modems shall meet the following requirements: l
Both the calling and called modems comply with the related standards, and support AT command set.
l
The called modem must be an external modem.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-7
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal l
The calling modem can be either a built-in modem or an external modem. For better compatibility and the ease of status monitoring, you are recommended to adopt an external modem made by the vendor of the called modem.
l
The following configuration is based on modems of the same type. In actual applications, you can configure the modem by referring to the related AT command set.
Networking Figure 2-6 shows the networking for configuring the MA5600 through the remote serial port. Figure 2-6 Networking for configuring the MA5600 through the remote serial port Serial port cable Telephone line CON ETH MON
Modem PSTN
Telephone line SCU
MA5600
Serial port cable Modem
PC
Configuration Flowchart Figure 2-7 shows the flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the remote serial port. Figure 2-7 Flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the remote serial port Start
Set the called Modem parameters
Set the calling Modem parameters
Set up the configuration environment
Start the HyperTerminal for dialup
Log in to the system
End
2-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Procedure Step 1 Set the called modem parameters. Only three signal lines, namely SD, RD and SG, are used for connecting the MA5600 and the modem. Therefore, before connecting the modem with the MA5600, shield the handshake signals and flow control signals of the modem. The configuration of a modem needs an intelligent terminal. The following modem configuration is based on the HyperTerminal operating under Windows. 1.
Connect the serial port of the modem with that of the maintenance terminal using the dedicated cable for the modem, and power on the system. Installing a driver is not required at this step.
2.
Assume that the modem is connected to COM2 port. Start the HyperTerminal, and select Direct to COM2 in the column of Connect using in the dialog box that appears. Set the serial port parameters as follows: 9600 bit/s for baud rate, 8 for data bits, 1 for stop bits, None for parity, None for flow control. NOTE
After the connection, you may find that the terminal cannot display anything. This is because the display function of the modem is disabled at the previous configuration operation. To enable the terminal to display input and output information, run the AT&F command to restore the default settings and press Enter.
3.
Check the modem. In the HyperTerminal, enter the AT&F command to restore the default settings of the modem. Observe if the screen displays "OK". If yes, the modem is normal.
4.
In the HyperTerminal, enter the following commands: ATS0=1 //Enable the auto replay function (ringing sound). AT&D //Ignore DTR signals. AT&K0 //Disable the flow control function. AT&R1 //Ignore the RTS signals. AT&S0 //Set DSR as high level. ATEQ1&W //Disable the modem’s response to the command while executing the command and saving the configurations. NOTE
After the execution of the last command, entering the AT command disables the echo function of the terminal and prohibits it from displaying the execution results. Due to the limitation of the bit rate of the modem, a baud rate of 9600 bit/s or 19200 bit/s is recommended for the serial port of the MA5600. If necessary, you can run the baudrate command to modify the baud rate of the serial port of the MA5600. To prevent an extremely high bit rate on the line between the two modems, you can set AT$MB=9600 (or another value) before running the ATEQ1&W command.
Step 2 Set the calling modem parameters. After power-on, the calling modem can function in the normal state without any configuration. However, if you connect the maintenance terminal with the modem using a standard cable, shield the handshake signals and flow control signals of the modem before the connection. For details on this shield operation, refer to the settings of the called modem parameters. Step 3 Set up the configuration environment. Figure 2-6 shows the configuration environment. 1. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Connect the called modem. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-9
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Plug the telephone line into the LINE port of the called modem. Connect the serial port of the called modem with the maintenance port CON of SCU board on the MA5600 using the dedicated serial port cable for the MA5600, and power on the modem. 2.
Connect the calling modem. For an external modem, plug the telephone line into the LINE port of the calling modem, connect the serial port of the calling modem with that of the maintenance terminal using dedicated cable for the modem, and power on the modem. For a built-in modem, you only need to plug the telephone line into the LINE port of the calling modem.
Step 4 Start the HyperTerminal. 1.
Set up a new connection. Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication > HyperTerminal to start the HyperTerminal and input the name. Click OK.
2.
Configure the serial port. Select the standard character terminal or PC terminal serial port that is actually connected to the MA5600 (assuming serial port COM2). Click OK.
Step 5 Set the parameters of the HyperTerminal. In the above Step 2, click OK. Then, set the serial port parameters in the dialog box as shown in Figure 2-8. The parameters are set as follows: l
Baud rate: 9600 bit/s
l
Data bits: 8
l
Parity: None
l
Stop bits: 1
l
Flow control: None NOTE
2-10
l
When setting the baud rate, make sure that the baud rate of the HyperTerminal is consistent with that of the serial port. By default, the baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s.
l
After login, illegible characters may be found among the input information. This is usually caused by baud rate inconsistency between the HyperTerminal and the system. In this case, try to use another baud rate to log in to the system. The system supports the baud rates of 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s, 57600 bit/s and 115200 bit/s.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Figure 2-8 Setting the parameters of the HyperTerminal
Click OK. The HyperTerminal interface appears. Step 6 Dial up on the HyperTerminal. 1.
For an external modem, follow the steps below: To set up a connection with an external modem, select a serial port, rather than a modem, from the Connect using drop down list in the HyperTerminal. In the HyperTerminal interface, you can enter the AT command for dialup, for example ATDTXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXX represents the telephone number of the line connected with the remote modem. For details about the dialup commands, refer to the AT command set. ATDT0 W 020XXXXXXXX means to dial "0" for connection with the external line. Wait for the dialing tone from the exchange, and then dial the telephone number of 020XXXXXXXX.
2.
For a built-in modem, the procedure is as follows: Run the HyperTerminal. Set the called number. Select the modem from the Connect using drop down list. Click Configure in the properties setting interface to set the modem properties. Select Bring up terminal window after dialing in the Options tab of the properties setting interface. Click OK to confirm the setting. Click Dial to proceed with the dialing. You need not use any ATDT commands for dialing.
----End
Result After dialup, the "OH" and "RI" LEDs on the modem connecting to the PC turn on. The modem generates a kind of sound, which indicates the progress of the connection. After the connection is set up, the two modem CD LEDs (for carrier detection) turn on, and the HyperTerminal Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-11
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
interface displays "CONNECT9600 (or 19200)". This indicates that the inter-modem connection is set up successfully. If "NO CARRIER" is displayed, the connection fails. Check the hardware connections and the telephone line. Press Enter until the login interface appears. After configuring the MA5600, run the hang-up command of the HyperTerminal to break the connection.
WARNING l
In the process of modem connection setup, pressing any key in the keyboard will interrupt the ongoing call.
l
After a remote maintenance operation, you need to disconnect the line, rather than merely shutting down the HyperTerminal. Otherwise, modems of a certain model may remain online all the time, causing failure in the next dialup connection.
2.4 Configuring the Terminal Through the Outband Management Channel This operation enables you to connect the maintenance terminal to the MA5600 over a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN), and configure the MA5600 through the outband management channel.
Networking-LAN Figure 2-9 shows the networking for local configuration through a LAN. Figure 2-9 Networking for local configuration through a LAN CON ETH MON
SCU
MA5600
LAN
PC
2-12
PC
PC
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Use a straight through cable to connect the MA5600 with the LAN. Make sure that the IP address of the maintenance network port of the control board and that of the PC used for maintaining the MA5600 are located in the same subnet. NOTE
You can also use a crossover cable to connect the network port of the maintenance terminal with the maintenance network port of the control board to maintain the MA5600.
Data Plan-LAN Table 2-2 lists the data plan for the network. Table 2-2 Data plan for the network Item
Data
maintenance network port of the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.2/24
PC used for maintaining the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.1/24
NOTE
You can also use a crossover cable to connect the network port of the maintenance terminal with the maintenance network port of the control board to maintain the MA5600.
Networking-WAN Figure 2-10 shows the connection between a WAN and the maintenance network port of the control board. Figure 2-10 Connection between a WAN and the maintenance network port of the control board
PC LAN
CON ETH MON
WAN Router
PC
PC SCU
MA5600
Data Plan-WAN Table 2-3 lists the data plan for the network.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-13
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Table 2-3 Data plan for the network Item
Data
maintenance network port of the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.1/24
PC used for maintaining the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.21.1/24
Router port connecting to the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.254/24
Configuration Flowchart Figure 2-11 shows the flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the outband management channel. Figure 2-11 Flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the outband management channel Start
Set up the configuration environment
Set the IP address of the ETH port
Add a route for the NMS
Run Telnet
Log in to the system
End
Procedure Step 1 Set up the configuration environment. Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-10 show the sample networks for configuring the MA5600 through the outband management channel. You can set up the environment as required. Step 2 Set the IP address of the maintenance network port. huawei(config)#interface meth 0 huawei(config-if-meth0)#ip address 10.10.20.1 24
Step 3 Add a route for the network management system (NMS). 2-14
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
l
If you set up the WAN configuration environment as shown in Figure 2-9, no route needs to be added.
l
If you set up the WAN configuration environment as shown in Figure 2-10, add a next hop route to the NMS.
huawei(config)#ip route-static 10.10.21.0 24 10.10.20.254
Step 4 Run the telnet application. Choose Start > Run on the PC. Enter the telnet command, followed by the IP address of the maintenance network port of the MA5600 in the Open field. Click OK to run the telnet application, as shown in Figure 2-12. Figure 2-12 Running the telnet application
Step 5 Log in to the system. By default, the super user uses root as the user name and admin as the password. Huawei MA5600 Multi-service Access Module. Copyright (C) Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2002-2007. All rights reserved. >>User name:root >>User password:
----End
Result After you log in to the system, you can perform the configuration successfully.
2.5 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband Management Channel This operation enables you to configure the MA5600 through the inband management channel.
Networking-LAN Figure 2-13 shows the networking for the maintenance through the GE port over a LAN.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-15
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Figure 2-13 Networking for the maintenance through the GE port over a LAN CON ETH MON GE 0/7/0
SCU
MA5600 LAN
PC
PC
PC
Data Plan-LAN Table 2-4 lists the data plan for the network. Table 2-4 Data plan for the network Item
Data
Inband management interface of the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.1/24
PC used for maintaining the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.3/24
Networking-WAN Figure 2-14 shows the networking for the maintenance through the GE port over a WAN. Figure 2-14 Networking for the maintenance through the GE port over a WAN CON ETH MON
IP PC
GE 0/7/0
Router SCU
MA5600
Data Plan-WAN Table 2-5 lists the data plan for the network. 2-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Table 2-5 Data plan for the network Item
Data
GE port of the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.1/24
PC used for maintaining the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.21.1/24
Router port connecting to the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.254/24
Configuration Flowchart Figure 2-15 shows the flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the inband management channel. Figure 2-15 Flowchart for configuring the MA5600 through the inband management channel Start
Set up the configuration environment
Create an NMS VLAN
Set the IP address of the VLAN interface
Set the inband NMS route
Run the Telnet
Log in to the system
End
Procedure Step 1 Set up the configuration environment. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-17
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Figure 2-13 and Figure 2-14 show the sample network for configuring the MA5600 through the inband management channel. You can set up the environment based on your own conditions. Step 2 Create an NMS VLAN and add the upstream port to it. Run the vlan command to create an NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 30 standard huawei(config)#port vlan 30 0/7 0
Step 3 Set the IP address of the VLAN layer 3 interface. Run the ip address command to set the IP address and subnet mask of the MA5600 VLAN layer 3 interface. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 30 huawei(config-if-vlanif30)#ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0
Step 4 Set inband NMS route. If the configuration environment is set up as shown in Figure 2-13, no route needs to be configured. If the configuration environment is set up as shown in Figure 2-14, add the route of next hop. huawei(config-if-vlanif30)#quit huawei(config)#ip route-static 10.10.21.0 24 10.10.20.254
Step 5 Run the telnet application. Choose Start > Run on the PC. Enter the telnet command, followed by the IP address of the maintenance network port of the SCU board in the Open field. Click OK to run the telnet application as shown in Figure 2-16. Figure 2-16 Running the telnet application
Step 6 Log in the system. By default, the Super user uses root and admin as the user name and password. When you log in, the system prompts the following Huawei MA5600 Multi-service Access Module. Copyright (C) Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2002-2007. All rights reserved. >>User name:root >>User password:
----End 2-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Result After login, you can configure the terminal for maintenance.
2.6 Configuring the Terminal Through SSH This operation enables you to connect the maintenance terminal to the MA5600 over a LAN or a WAN and configure the MA5600 through SSH.
Networking-LAN Figure 2-17 shows the connection for setting up the SSH configuration environment in LAN outband mode. Figure 2-17 Setting up the SSH configuration environment in LAN outband mode CON ETH MON
SCU
MA5600
LAN
PC
PC
PC
Data Plan-LAN Table 2-6 lists the data plan for the network. Table 2-6 Data plan for the network Item
Data
MA5600
IP address of the maintenance network port: 10.10.20.2/24 User name: huawei User authentication mode: RSA public key authentication
PC used for maintaining the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.1/24 Client software: PuTTY.exe, PuTTYGen.exe, sshkey.exe NOTE You can search and download the client software from the Internet.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-19
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Networking-WAN Figure 2-18 shows the connection for setting up the SSH configuration environment in WAN outband mode. Figure 2-18 Setting up the SSH configuration environment in WAN outband mode
PC LAN
CON ETH MON
WAN Router
PC
PC SCU
MA5600
Data Plan-WAN Table 2-7 lists the data plan for the network. Table 2-7 Data plan for the network Item
Data
MA5600
IP address of the maintenance network port: 10.10.20.2/24 User name: huawei User authentication mode: RSA public key authentication
PC used for maintaining the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.21.1/24 Client software: PuTTY Password conversion tool: PuTTY.exe, PuTTYGen.exe, sshkey.exe NOTE You can search and download the client software from the Internet.
Router port connecting to the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.254/24
Networking-LAN Figure 2-19 shows the connection for setting up the SSH configuration environment in LAN inband mode.
2-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Figure 2-19 Setting up the SSH configuration environment in LAN inband mode CON ETH MON GE 0/7/0
SCU
MA5600 LAN
PC
PC
PC
Data Plan-LAN Table 2-8 lists the data plan for the network. Table 2-8 Data plan for the network Item
Data
MA5600
IP address of the VLAN layer 3 interface: 10.10.20.2/24 User name: huawei User authentication mode: RSA public key authentication
PC used for maintaining the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.1/24 Client software: PuTTY.exe, PuTTYGen.exe, sshkey.exe NOTE You can search and download the client software from the Internet.
Networking-WAN Figure 2-20 shows the connection for setting up the SSH configuration environment in WAN inband mode. Figure 2-20 Setting up the SSH configuration environment in WAN inband mode CON ETH MON
IP PC
GE 0/7/0
Router SCU
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
MA5600
2-21
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Data Plan-WAN Table 2-9 lists the data plan for the network. Table 2-9 Data plan for the network Item
Data
MA5600
IP address of VLAN layer-3 interface: 10.10.20.2/24 User name: huawei User authentication mode: RSA public key authentication
PC used for maintaining the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.21.1/24 Client software: PuTTY Password conversion tool: PuTTY.exe, PuTTYGen.exe, sshkey.exe NOTE You can search and download the client software from the Internet.
Router port connecting to the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.254/24
Configuration Flowchart Figure 2-21 shows the flowchart for configuring the SSH environment. For details on configuration, refer to "8.6 Configuring SSH."
2-22
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Figure 2-21 Flowchart for configuring in SSH mode Start
Set the IP address of the maintenance network port/VLAN layer 3 interface
Add a route for the NMS
Create a user
rsa, all, password-public key authentication modes
Set authentication mode for the SSH user
passwordauthentication mode
Create the key pair for the SSH server
Generate the RSA public key
Generate the public key for the SSH user
Authorize the public key to the SSH user
Use the SSH software to log in to the system
End
Procedure Step 1 Set up the configuration environment. You can set up the configuration environment shown in Figure 2-17, Figure 2-18, Figure 2-19 and Figure 2-20. Step 2 Set the IP address of the maintenance network port/VLAN layer 3 interface. l
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
To set the IP address of the maintenance network port, do as follows: Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-23
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#interface meth 0 huawei(config-if-meth0)#ip address 10.10.20.2 255.255.255.0 l
To set the IP address of the VLAN layer 3 interface, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface vlanif 30 huawei(config-if-vlanif30)#ip address 10.10.20.2 255.255.255.0
Step 3 Add a route for the NMS. To set up a LAN configuration environment based on Figure 2-17 or Figure 2-19, you need not add any route for the NMS. To set up a WAN configuration environment based on Figure 2-18 or Figure 2-20, you must add a route of next hop for the NMS as follows: huawei(config)#ip route-static 10.10.21.0 24 10.10.20.254
Step 4 Create a user. To create a user of operator level with user name and password huawei and reenter log times 4, do as follows: huawei(config)#terminal user name User Name(display terminal type The terminal type: VT100
3.3.8 Setting Timeout Exit Time This operation enables you to set timeout exit time. During the time, if the user fails to type in any information on the terminal, the system will let the user exit from the system.
Context By default, the system will let the user exit from the system as long as the user fails to type in any information on the terminal for 5 minutes.
Procedure Step 1 Run the idle-timeout command to set the timeout exit time. Step 2 Run the display idle-timeout command and you can find the timeout exit time has been set correctly. ----End
Example To set the timeout exit time to 23 minutes, do as follows: huawei>idle-timeout 23 huawei>display idle-timeout The timeout value is set to 23 minutes currently. If there is no input from terminal during this time, the user will be disconnected
Related Operation Table 3-10 lists the related operation for setting the timeout exit time. Table 3-10 Related operation for setting the timeout exit time
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
To…
Run the Command…
To set the timeout exit time to the default 120 minutes
undo idle-timeout
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-17
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
3 Getting Started With CLI
3.3.9 Locking the Terminal This operation enables you to lock the terminal to prevent others from accessing the terminal by using the current user name.
Context Once a terminal is locked, if you press any button on the terminal, the system will prompts you to enter the password. After entering the correct password, you can operate the terminal.
Procedure Run the terminal hold command to lock the terminal. ----End
Example To lock the current CLI terminal and then unblock it, do as follows: huawei(config)#terminal hold Hold Password(display cpu 0/7 CPU occupancy: 12%
3.3.13 Showing the Memory Usage This operation enables you to check the memory usage of the control board.
Context You can query the memory usage of the control board only.
Procedure Run the display mem command to show the memory usage of the control board. ----End
Example To query the memory usage of the control board, do as follows: huawei>display mem 0/7 Memory occupancy: 47%
3.3.14 Testing Network State This operation enables you to check the network connectivity and whether the host is reachable, and check all gateways passed by data packets sent from a host to the destination, and locate network faults.
Context The commands used to test network state include ping and tracert. l
ping To check the network connectivity and the host reachability, run the ping command.
l
tracert To send test packets from the transmit host to the destination host, run the tracert command. With this command, you can check the connectivity of a network and locate faults in the network. The following gives the execution process of the tracert command: –
The host sends a packet with the Time to Live (TTL) of 1 to the destination.
–
During the first hop, the system returns an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet to indicate the failure in sending the packet due to TTL timeout.
–
The host sends a packet with the TTL of 2. The system also returns TTL timeout in the second hop. The process continues in this way until the packet reaches the destination.
3-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
3 Getting Started With CLI
By doing so, the system can record the source address of each ICMP TTL timeout message, and provide a path along which an IP packet goes all the way to the destination.
Procedure l
Run the ping command to test the network state.
l
Run the tracert command to test the network state.
----End To test the network connectivity using the ping command, do as follows: huawei(config)#ping 10.11.52.240 PING 10.11.52.240: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=0 ttl=64 time Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=64 time Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=2 ttl=64 time Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=64 time Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=64 time --- 10.11.52.240 Ping statistics --5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0.00% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 10/10/13 ms
= = = = =
10 10 13 10 10
ms ms ms ms ms
To test the network connectivity using the tracert command, do as follows: huawei#tracert 10.11.106.133 traceroute to 10.11.106.133 max hops 30 ,packet 40 bytes press CTRL_C to break 1 253 ms 476 ms 508 ms 10.11.120.62 2 * * * Request timed out. 3 * * * Request timed out. 4 4 ms 4 ms 5 ms 10.11.106.133
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-21
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4
4 Configuring the Network Management
Configuring the Network Management
About This Chapter This chapter describes how to manage the MA5600 through the N2000 BMS and the related configuration. 4.1 Overview This section describes the network management protocols, the NMS that the MA5600 supports, and the purpose of this chapter. 4.2 Basic Concepts This section describes the concepts involved in the network configuration. 4.3 Configuration Example of an Outband NMS This operation enables you to connect the MA5600 to the N2000 through the maintenance network port. Then, you can maintain the MA5600 through an outband management channel. 4.4 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS This operation enables you to connect the MA5600 to the N2000 through the GE port. Then, you can maintain the MA5600 through an inband management channel. 4.5 SNMP Agent Configuration This operation enables you to configure an SNMP agent when you want to maintain the MA5600 through the manager. 4.6 Configuring the IP Address of the Outband NMS Interface This operation enables you to configure the IP address of the outband NMS interface (maintenance network port). 4.7 Configuring an NMS Route This operation enables you to create a static route between the MA5600 and the manager. 4.8 Configuring the IP Address of the Inband NMS Interface This operation enables you to configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-1
4 Configuring the Network Management
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4.1 Overview This section describes the network management protocols, the NMS that the MA5600 supports, and the purpose of this chapter.
Service Description Based on Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), the MA5600 communicates with the NMS through its network management interface. Here, the iManager N2000 Fixed Network Integrated Management System (N2000) is used as the NMS. The N2000 can manage and maintain the MA5600 through the network port of the MA5600. The MA5600 uses traps to send the status information to the N2000 to report some urgent and important events.
Service Specification This chapter describes the network configuration performed on the MA5600 to realize normal communication between the MA5600 and the N2000, including outband NMS configuration and inband NMS configuration. NOTE
To realize normal communication between the MA5600 and the N2000, you must also perform configurations on the N2000. For details, refer to the SmartAX MA5600 Multi-service Access Module Commissioning Guide.
4.2 Basic Concepts This section describes the concepts involved in the network configuration.
SNMP SNMP is a prevailing network management protocol. It includes two parts: l
Network management station (manager)
l
Agent
SNMP ensures normal transmission of administrative message between any two points. It eases up the administrator's following operations on any node of the network: l
Retrieving information
l
Modifying information
l
Locating a fault
l
Diagnosing a fault
l
Planning the capacity
l
Generating a report
Manager 4-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
A manager runs the client software. It can send GetRequest, GetNextRequest and SetRequest messages to the agent.
Agent An agent is the server software running on a network device. When receiving request messages from the manager, the agent: l
Reads or writes the management variables based on the message type.
l
Generates and sends the response messages to the manager.
On the other hand, in case of device cold start, warm start, failure and fault recovery, the agent sends traps to report such events to the manager.
Trap Traps refer to the unsolicited messages sent from a managed device to the manager to report some urgent and important events.
4.3 Configuration Example of an Outband NMS This operation enables you to connect the MA5600 to the N2000 through the maintenance network port. Then, you can maintain the MA5600 through an outband management channel.
Networking Figure 4-1 shows a sample network for configuring the outband NMS. Figure 4-1 Sample network for configuring the outband NMS IP NMS
Router
CON ETH MON
SCU
MA5600
Data Plan Table 4-1 lists the data plan for configuring the outband NMS. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-3
4 Configuring the Network Management
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Table 4-1 Data plan for configuring the outband NMS Item
Data
Maintenance network port (ETH) of the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.1/24
NMS
(Primary) IP address: 10.10.21.1/24 (Secondary) IP address: 10.10.21.2/24
Router port connecting to the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.254/24
Configuration Flowchart Figure 4-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the outband NMS. Figure 4-2 Flowchart for configuring the outband NMS Start
Set the IP address of the ETH port
Add a route for the outband NMS
Set the SNMP parameters
Enable traps sending
Set the IP address of the target host for traps Set the source address for traps sending
Save the data
End
NOTE
4-4
l
This section describes how to configure the MA5600 only. To set up the network connection, you also need to configure the router.
l
If the telnet environment has been set up according to "2.4 Configuring the Terminal Through the Outband Management Channel ", skip steps 1 and 2.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
Procedure Step 1 Set the IP address of the maintenance network port. huawei(config)#interface meth 0 huawei(config-if-meth0)#ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0
Step 2 Add a route for the outband NMS. huawei(config-if-meth0)#quit huawei(config)#ip route-static 10.10.21.0 24 10.10.20.254
Step 3 Set the SNMP parameters. l
Creating the community name huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
l
Setting the system contact huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075528780808
l
Setting the system location huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Setting the SNMP version NOTE
The setting of the MA5600 shall accord with that in the N2000. Assume that the N2000 adopts SNMP V1. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v1
Step 4 Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
Step 5 Set the IP address of the target host for traps. huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.10.21.1 securityname private huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.10.21.2 securityname private
Step 6 Set the IP address of the maintenance network port as the source address for traps sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source meth 0
Step 7 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration, you can manage the MA5600 through the N2000.
4.4 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS This operation enables you to connect the MA5600 to the N2000 through the GE port. Then, you can maintain the MA5600 through an inband management channel.
Networking Figure 4-3 shows a sample network for configuring the inband NMS. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
Figure 4-3 Sample network for configuring the inband NMS IP N2000 Router
CON ETH MON
GE 0/7/0
SCU
MA5600
Data Plan Table 4-2 lists the data plan for configuring the inband NMS. Table 4-2 Data plan for configuring the inband NMS Item
Data
Inband NMS port of the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.2 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
NMS
(Primary) IP address: 10.10.21.1/24 (Secondary) IP address: 10.10.21.2/24
Router port connecting to the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.20.254 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
SNMP Agent
Version: V3 User name: user1 Group name: group1 View name: hardy
Configuration Flowchart Figure 4-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the inband NMS.
4-6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
Figure 4-4 Flowchart for configuring the inband NMS Start
Set the IP address of the inband NMS port
Add a route for the inband NMS
Set the SNMP parameters
Enable traps sending
Set the IP address of the target host for traps Set the source address for traps sending
Save the data
End
NOTE
l
This section describes how to configure the MA5600 only. To set up the network connection, you also need to configure the router.
l
If the telnet environment has been set up according to "2.4 Configuring the Terminal Through the Outband Management Channel ", skip steps 1 and 2.
Procedure Step 1 Set the IP address of the inband NMS port (GE port). l
Create an NMS VLAN huawei(config)#vlan 1000 standard
l
Add the upstream port to the VLAN huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/7 0
l
Enter the VLAN interface mode huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1000
l
Set the IP address of the VLAN interface huawei(config-if-vlanif1000)#ip address 10.10.20.2 255.255.255.0
Step 2 Add a route for the inband NMS. huawei(config)#ip route-static 10.10.21.0 24 10.10.20.254
Step 3 Set the SNMP parameters. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-7
4 Configuring the Network Management l
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Set the SNMP version. NOTE
The setting of the MA5600 shall accord with that in the N2000. Assume that the N2000 adopts SNMP V3. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v3 l
Set the SNMP user. huawei(config)#snmp-agent usm-user v3 user1 group1 authentication-mode md5 authkey privacy-mode des56 prikey
l
Set the SNMP group. huawei(config)#snmp-agent group v3 group1 privacy read-view hardy write-view hardy
l
Set the SNMP view. huawei(config)#snmp-agent mib-view hardy include ip
l
Set the ID and contact information about the administrator. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075528780808
l
Set the device location information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
Step 4 Enable traps sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
Step 5 Set the IP address of the target host for traps. huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.10.21.1 securityname private huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.10.21.2 securityname private
Step 6 Set the IP address of the inband NMS as the source address for traps sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 1000
Step 7 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration you can manage the MA5600 successfully through the N2000.
4.5 SNMP Agent Configuration This operation enables you to configure an SNMP agent when you want to maintain the MA5600 through the manager. 4.5.1 Setting the SNMP Version This operation enables you to set the version of the SNMP running in the system. 4.5.2 Adding a Community Name and Setting Its Read/Write Authorities This operation enables you to add a community name and set its read/write authorities. 4.5.3 Enabling Trap Sending This operation enables the MA5600 to send traps to the N2000. 4.5.4 Setting the IP address of a Destination Host of Traps This operation enables you to set the IP address of a destination host of traps. 4.5.5 Setting the Source Interface for Sending Traps This operation enables you to set the source interface for sending traps. 4-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
4.5.6 Setting the System Contact Information This operation enables you to system contact information. 4.5.7 Setting the System Location Information This operation enables you to set the system location information. 4.5.8 Configuring an SNMP V3 User This operation enables you to add or modify an SNMP V3 user. 4.5.9 Configuring an SNMP V3 Group This operation enables you to configure an SNMP V3 group. After a group is configured, you can control the access authorities of all the users in the group. 4.5.10 Configuring an SNMP MIB View This operation enables you to configure an SNMP MIB view. 4.5.11 Configuring the Local SNMP Engine ID This operation enables you to configure an engine ID that uniquely identifies an SNMP entity. 4.5.12 Enabling the Handshake Function between the MA5600 and the N2000 This operation enables you to enable the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000. 4.5.13 Setting the Handshake Interval This operation enables you to set the handshake interval.
4.5.1 Setting the SNMP Version This operation enables you to set the version of the SNMP running in the system.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent sys-info version command to set the SNMP version. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent sys-info version command to query the configured SNMP version. ----End
Example To set the SNMP version as V1 and V2C, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v1 v2c huawei(config)#display snmp-agent sys-info version { |contact|location }: Command: display snmp-agent sys-info version SNMP version running in the system: SNMPv1 SNMPv2c
Related Operation Table 4-3 lists the related operation for setting the SNMP version.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-9
4 Configuring the Network Management
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Table 4-3 Related operation for setting the SNMP version To…
Run the Command…
Delete the set SNMP version information
undo snmp-agent sys-info version
4.5.2 Adding a Community Name and Setting Its Read/Write Authorities This operation enables you to add a community name and set its read/write authorities.
Context l
The default read-only community name in the Huawei iManager N2000 BMS is public, and the read-write community name in the N2000 is private.
l
The MA5600 supports up to 10 community names.
l
The read and write community names set in the MA5600 shall accord with those in the manager.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent community command to add a community name and set its read/write authorities. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent community command to query a community name. ----End
Example To add a read-only community named public, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#display snmp-agent community read Community name: public Storage type: nonVolatile View name: ViewDefault Total number is 1
Related Operation Table 4-4 lists the related operation for adding a community and setting its read/write authorities. Table 4-4 Related operation for adding a community and setting its read/write authorities
4-10
To…
Run the Command…
Delete a community name
undo snmp-agent community
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
4.5.3 Enabling Trap Sending This operation enables the MA5600 to send traps to the N2000.
Context By default, the MA5600 is prohibited from sending traps to the N2000.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent trap enable standard command to enable traps sending. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent trap enable command to check whether traps sending is enabled. ----End
Example To enable the MA5600 to send traps to the N2000, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard huawei(config)#display snmp-agent trap enable Trap is enabled
Related Operation Table 4-5 lists the related operation for enabling traps sending. Table 4-5 Related operation for enabling traps sending To…
Run the Command…
Disable traps sending
undo snmp-agent trap enable standard
4.5.4 Setting the IP address of a Destination Host of Traps This operation enables you to set the IP address of a destination host of traps.
Context The N2000 can receive traps only when the IP address of a destination host of traps is set correctly.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent target-host trap command to set the IP address of a destination host of traps. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent target-host command to query the destination host of traps. ----End Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-11
4 Configuring the Network Management
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Example To set the IP address of the destination host of traps as 10.71.53.108, and run the community name “private”, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.71.53.108 securityname private v3 huawei(config)#display snmp-agent target-host Traphost list: Traphost address: 10.71.53.108 Traphost portnumber: 162 Traphost securityname: private Traphost trapversion: v3 Total number is 1
Related Operation Table 4-6 lists the related operation for setting the IP address of a destination host of traps. Table 4-6 Related operation for setting the IP address of a destination host of traps To…
Run the Command…
Delete the IP address of the destination host of traps
undo snmp-agent target-host
4.5.5 Setting the Source Interface for Sending Traps This operation enables you to set the source interface for sending traps.
Context The IP address of the interface for traps sending is the source IP address of the traps.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent trap source command to set the source interface for sending traps. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent trap-source command to query the source interface for sending traps. ----End
Example To set the source interface for traps sending as the layer 3 interface of VLAN 1000, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 1000 huawei(config)#display snmp-agent trap-source Trap source interface name: vlanif1000
Related Operation Table 4-7 lists the related operation for setting the source interface for traps sending. 4-12
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
Table 4-7 Related operation for setting the source interface for traps sending To…
Run the Command…
Delete the source interface for sending traps
undo snmp-agent trap source
4.5.6 Setting the System Contact Information This operation enables you to system contact information.
Context By default, system contact information is R&D Shenzhen, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent sys-info contact command to set the system contact information. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent sys-info contact command to query the system contact information. ----End
Example To set the system contact information as HW-075528780808, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075528780808 huawei(config)#display snmp-agent sys-info contact { |location|version }: Command: display snmp-agent sys-info contact The contact person for this managed node: HW-075528780808
Related Operation Table 4-8 lists the related operation for setting the system contact information. Table 4-8 Related operation for setting the system contact information To…
Run the Command…
Restore the default system contact information
undo snmp-agent sys-info contact
4.5.7 Setting the System Location Information This operation enables you to set the system location information. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-13
4 Configuring the Network Management
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Context By default, the system location information is Shenzhen China.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent sys-info location command to set the system location information. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent sys-info location command to display the system location information. ----End
Example To set the system location information as Shanghai China, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shanghai China huawei(config)#display snmp-agent sys-info location { |contact|version }: Command: display snmp-agent sys-info location The physical location of this node: Shanghai China
Related Operation Table 4-9 lists the related operation for setting the system location information. Table 4-9 Related operation for setting the system location information To…
Run the Command…
Restore the default system location information
undo snmp-agent sys-info location
4.5.8 Configuring an SNMP V3 User This operation enables you to add or modify an SNMP V3 user.
Context l
The MA5600 supports up to 20 SNMP users.
l
If the entered user name is an existing one, the system will update the configuration of the user.
l
If you do not enter the user authentication and encryption modes, the user can access the equipment without authentication or encryption.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent usm-user command to configure an SNMP V3 user. 4-14
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent usm-user command to query the SNMP V3 user. ----End
Example To add an SNMP V3 user named user, belonging to a group named group, with the authentication mode of md5, the authentication password of 1, the encryption mode of des56, and the encryption password of 2, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent usm-user v3 user group authentication-mode md5 1 privacymode des56 2 huawei(config)#display snmp-agent usm-user user User name: user Engine ID: 800007DB0300E0FC995050 Group name: group Authentication mode: md5, Privacy mode: des56 Storage type: nonVolatile User status: active
Related Operation Table 4-10 lists the related operation for configuring an SNMP V3 user. Table 4-10 Related operation for configuring an SNMP V3 user To…
Run the Command…
Delete an SNMP V3 user
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3
4.5.9 Configuring an SNMP V3 Group This operation enables you to configure an SNMP V3 group. After a group is configured, you can control the access authorities of all the users in the group.
Context l
The MA5600 supports up to 20 SNMP V3 groups.
l
By default, the system has a read view named viewDefault with the range of internet subtree; the write view and notify view are blank.
l
If the entered group name is an existing one, the system will update the configuration of the group.
l
A specified view can be a non-existing view. In this case, the users in the group fail to access anywhere.
l
A user can access views in three modes:
l
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
–
With authentication and encryption
–
With authentication but no encryption
–
With no authentication or encryption
If the access mode level is lower than the security level of the configured group, the user will fail to access. If the corresponding groups have multiple security levels, the user can Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-15
4 Configuring the Network Management
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
select the group with the highest security level, and then access the view corresponding to the group.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent group v3 command to configure an SNMP V3 group. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent group command to query the SNMP V3 group. ----End
Example To configure a group named group, with authentication but no encryption, with the read view of internet, and with blank write and notify views, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent group v3 group authentication read-view internet huawei(config)#display snmp-agent group group Group name: group Security model: v3 AuthnoPriv Readview: internet Writeview: Notifyview: Storage type: nonvolatile
Related Operation Table 4-11 lists the related operation for configuring an SNMP V3 group. Table 4-11 Related operation for configuring an SNMP V3 group To…
Run the Command…
Delete an SNMP V3 group
undo snmp-agent group v3
4.5.10 Configuring an SNMP MIB View This operation enables you to configure an SNMP MIB view.
Context l
The number of sub-trees of all the views cannot exceed 20.
l
By default, the system has a read view named ViewDefault, with the range of internet subtree view.
l
The view named ViewDefault cannot be deleted or updated.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent mib-view command to configure an SNMP MIB view. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent mib-view command to query the SNMP MIB view. ----End 4-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
Example To configure a view named view1, including ip sub-tree, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent mib-view view1 include ip huawei(config)#display snmp-agent mib-view view1 View name: view1 MIB subtree: ip Subtree mask: Storage type: nonVolatile View type: include View status: active
Related Operation Table 4-12 lists the related operation for configuring an SNMP MIB view. Table 4-12 Related operation for configuring an SNMP MIB view To…
Run the Command…
Delete an SNMP MIB view
undo snmp-agent mib-view
4.5.11 Configuring the Local SNMP Engine ID This operation enables you to configure an engine ID that uniquely identifies an SNMP entity.
Context With no manually configured ID, the MA5600 will automatically initialize one at startup.
Procedure Step 1 Run the snmp-agent local-engineid command to configure the local SNMP engine ID. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent local-engineid command to query the local SNMP engine ID. ----End
Example To configure the engine ID of the local SNMP entity as 010101011000, do as follows: huawei(config)#snmp-agent local-engineid 0101010110000 Command: snmp-agent local-engineid 01010101110000 Info: Modify the local-engineid will disable the configured SNMPv3 user, all of user local-engineid changes to the modified one after system reset, proceed?[ Y/N]:y huawei(config)#display snmp-agent local-engineid SNMP local EngineID: 010101011000
Related Operation Table 4-13 lists the related operations for configuring the local SNMP engine ID. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-17
4 Configuring the Network Management
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Table 4-13 Related operations for configuring the local SNMP engine ID To…
Run the Command…
Restore the default local SNMP engine ID
undo snmp-agent local-engineid
Display the remote SNMP engine ID information
display snmp-agent remote-engineid
4.5.12 Enabling the Handshake Function between the MA5600 and the N2000 This operation enables you to enable the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000.
Context By default, the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000 is disabled.
Procedure Step 1 Run the system handshake enable command to enable the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000. Step 2 Run the display system handshake command to query the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000. ----End
Example To enable the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000, do as follows: huawei(config)#system handshake enable huawei(config)#display system handshake system handshake : enable system handshake interval : 300s ---------------------------------------------IP of NMS Status between NMS and device ---------------------------------------------10.71.53.108 in register ----------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 4-14 lists the related operations for enabling the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000.
4-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
Table 4-14 Related operations for enabling the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000 To…
Run the Command…
Disable the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000
system handshake disable
Set the handshake interval
system handshake interval
4.5.13 Setting the Handshake Interval This operation enables you to set the handshake interval.
Context l
By default, the handshake interval between the MA5600 and the N2000 is zero second.
l
The handshake interval between the MA5600 and the N2000 determines the handshake frequency.
l
–
When the interval is short, and the number of network elements under the N2000 is large, the N2000 will be over-tasked to handle increasing handshake packets.
–
When the interval is long, and the MA5600 and the N2000 are disconnected, the N2000 will fail to find the fault in time.
You can set an appropriate handshake interval according to actual conditions.
Procedure Step 1 Run the system handshake interval command to set the handshake interval. Step 2 Run the display system handshake command to query he handshake interval. ----End
Example To set the handshake interval to 10 seconds, do as follows: huawei(config)#system handshake interval 10 huawei(config)#display system handshake system handshake : enable system handshake interval : 10s ---------------------------------------------IP of NMS Status between NMS and device ---------------------------------------------10.71.53.108 in register ----------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 4-15 lists the related operation for setting the handshake interval.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-19
4 Configuring the Network Management
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Table 4-15 Related operation for setting the handshake interval To…
Run the Command…
Configure the handshake function between the MA5600 and the N2000
system handshake
4.6 Configuring the IP Address of the Outband NMS Interface This operation enables you to configure the IP address of the outband NMS interface (maintenance network port).
Context l
By default, the IP address of the maintenance network port (ETH port on the control board) is 10.11.104.1, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.
l
Make sure that the IP address of the ETH port is located in the same subnet as that of the gateway or the PC used for maintaining the MA5600.
l
After setting the IP address, keep the record for future reference.
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface meth command to enter meth mode. Step 2 Run the ip address command to set the IP address of the ETH port on the control board. Step 3 Run the display interface meth command to query the IP address of the ETH port on the control board. ----End
Example To the IP address of the ETH port as 10.10.10.1 and the subnet mask as 255.255.255.0, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface meth 0 huawei(config-if-meth0)#ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0 huawei(config)#display interface meth 0 meth0 current state : UP Line protocol current state : UP Description : HUAWEI, MA5600 Series, meth0 Interface The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 bytes Internet Address is 10.10.10.1/24 IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fcaa-8516 Auto-duplex(Full), Auto-speed(100M) 5 minutes input rate 1549 bytes/sec, 14 packets/sec 5 minutes output rate 168 bytes/sec, 1 packets/sec 10508484 packets input, 1472712535 bytes 2213003 packets output, 712283310 bytes
4-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
Related Operation Table 4-16 lists the related operation for configuring the IP address of the outband NMS interface. Table 4-16 Related operation for configuring the IP address of the outband NMS interface To…
Run the Command…
Remarks
Delete the IP address of the outband NMS interface
undo ip address
In meth mode.
4.7 Configuring an NMS Route This operation enables you to create a static route between the MA5600 and the manager.
Context l
The system supports up to 4096 static routes.
l
When the MA5600 and the N2000 are located in different subnets, a route shall be configured for the gateway to forward IP packets.
Procedure Step 1 Run the ip route-static command to configure a static route. Step 2 Run the display ip routing-table command to query the current routing configuration. ----End
Example To create a route to subnet 10.71.8.0 (where the manager is located), and the gateway as 10.71.53.1, do as follows: huawei(config)#ip route-static 10.71.8.0 255.255.255.0 10.71.53.1 huawei(config)#display ip routing-table verbose Routing Table : Public Destinations : 3 Routes : 3 Destination: 10.0.0.0/8 Protocol: Static Preference: 60 NextHop: 10.71.62.1 RelayNextHop: 0.0.0.0 Label: NULL BkNextHop: BkLabel: State: Tag:
Process ID: Cost: Interface: Neighbour: Tunnel ID: SecTunnel ID: 0.0.0.0 BkInterface: NULL Tunnel ID: SecTunnel ID: Active Adv GotQ Age: 0
Destination: 10.71.62.0/24 Protocol: Direct Preference: 0
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
0 0 meth0 0.0.0.0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 7d06h27m42s
Process ID: 0 Cost: 0
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-21
4 Configuring the Network Management NextHop: 10.71.62.36 RelayNextHop: 0.0.0.0 Label: NULL BkNextHop: 0.0.0.0 BkLabel: NULL State: Active Adv Tag: 0
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide Interface: Neighbour: Tunnel ID: SecTunnel ID: BkInterface: Tunnel ID: SecTunnel ID: Age:
meth0 0.0.0.0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 7d06h27m42s
Related Operation Table 4-17 lists the related operation for configuring an NMS route. Table 4-17 Related operation for configuring an NMS route. To...
Run the Command...
Delete an existing route
undo ip route-static
4.8 Configuring the IP Address of the Inband NMS Interface This operation enables you to configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface.
Context l
The MA5600 realizes inband NMS through the Ethernet port on the control board.
l
To prevent login and access to the MA5600 from the user end, it is recommended that the standard VLAN be used as the NMS VLAN.
Procedure Step 1 Run the vlan command to create an NMS VLAN. Step 2 Run the interface vlanif command to enter VLAN interface mode. Step 3 Run the ip address command to set the IP address of the VLAN interface. Step 4 Run the display interface vlanif command to query the IP address of the VLAN interface. ----End
Example To set the IP address of the inband NMS interface as 10.10.10.2 and the subnet mask as 255.255.255.0, do as follows: huawei(config)#vlan 1000 standard huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1000 huawei(config-if-vlanif1000)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 huawei(config)#display interface vlanif 1000 vlanif400 current state : UP Line protocol current state : UP Description : HUAWEI, MA5600 Series, Vlanif400 Interface The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 bytes Internet Address is 10.10.10.2/24
4-22
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 Configuring the Network Management
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-1240-4243
Related Operation Table 4-18 lists the related operation for configuring the IP address of the inband NMS interface. Table 4-18 Related operation for configuring the IP address of the inband NMS interface
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
To…
Run the Command…
Remarks
Delete the IP address of the existing inband NMS interface
undo ip address
In VLAN interface mode.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-23
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
5
5 Configuring the Log Host
Configuring the Log Host
About This Chapter This chapter describes the functions of the log host of theMA5600 and how to configure the log host. 5.1 Overview This section describes the functions of the log and the application of the log to the MA5600. 5.2 Configuration Example of a Log Host This example shows how to configure a log host. After the configuration, the logs reported by the MA5600 can be displayed on the log lost. 5.3 Configuring a Log Host This operation enables you to configure a log host, that is, add and activate the log host. 5.4 Deleting a Log Host This operation enables you to delete a log host. 5.5 Deactivating a Log Host This operation enables you to deactivate a log host. 5.6 Querying Logs This operation enables you to query logs.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-1
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Log Host
5.1 Overview This section describes the functions of the log and the application of the log to the MA5600.
Function Logs can serve as important references for system maintenance and troubleshooting. In the MA5600, you can query the executed commands and other important information recorded in logs.
5.2 Configuration Example of a Log Host This example shows how to configure a log host. After the configuration, the logs reported by the MA5600 can be displayed on the log lost. l
The related inband NMS configuration has been complete. You can telnet to the MA5600 to maintain it through PC 1 and PC 2.
l
PC 3 is installed with FTP or TFTP software, and can receive and save the logs reported by the MA5600.
Networking Figure 5-1 shows a sample network for configuring a log host. In the networking, PCs 1, 2 and 3 connect to the GE port of the MA5600 over a LAN. PC 3 works as the log host of the MA5600. Figure 5-1 Sample network for configuring a log host CON ETH MON GE 0/7/0
SCU
MA5600 LAN
PC1
PC2
PC3
Data Plan Table 5-1 lists the data plan for configuring a log host. 5-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Log Host
Table 5-1 Data plan for configuring a log host Item
Data
Inband management interface (GE port) of the MA5600
IP address: 10.10.10.2/24
PC 3
IP address: 10.10.10.1/24
Procedure Step 1 Add a log host. huawei(config)#loghost add 10.10.10.1 huawei
Step 2 Activate the log host. huawei(config)#loghost activate name huawei
Step 3 Check the connectivity between the MA5600 and the log host to verify that the MA5600 can communicate with the log host smoothly. Step 4 Configure the TFTP software of the log host. 1.
Enable the syslog server function.
2.
Set the directory for saving the reported logs.
----End
Result After the configuration: l
You can query the logs in the directory for saving the logs.
l
The logs record the operation commands executed on PCs 1 and 2 to the system. They are the same as those queried on the MA5600.
5.3 Configuring a Log Host This operation enables you to configure a log host, that is, add and activate the log host.
Context l
The MA5600 can log important operations in the UNIX host (also referred to as the log server) of the internal network through the syslog mechanism.
l
After configuring a log host, you need to enable the log host service of the log server, and configure the directory for saving logs and the log file name to enable real-time reporting of logs.
Procedure Step 1 Run the loghost add command to add a log host. Step 2 Run the loghost activate command to activate the log host. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Log Host
Step 3 Run the display loghost list command to display the log host. ----End
Example To add log host named huawei with IP address of 10.10.10.1, do as follows: huawei(config)#loghost add 10.10.10.1 huawei huawei(config)#loghost activate name huawei huawei(config)#display loghost list name huawei Log server configuration: IP address : 10.10.10.1 Host name : huawei Terminal state : Normal
Related Operation Table 5-2 lists the related operations for configuring a log host. Table 5-2 Related operations for configuring a log host To…
Run the Command…
Deactivate a log host
loghost deactivate
Delete a log host
loghost delete
Set the source interface sending log
syslog source
5.4 Deleting a Log Host This operation enables you to delete a log host.
Procedure Step 1 Run the loghost delete command to delete a log host Step 2 Run the display loghost list command to display the log host. ----End
Example To delete the log host with IP address 10.10.10.1, do as follows: huawei(config)#loghost delete ip 10.10.10.1 huawei(config)#display loghost list ip 10.10.10.1 Failure: The log server not exist
Related Operation Table 5-3 lists the related operations for configuring a log host. 5-4
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Log Host
Table 5-3 Related operations for configuring a log host To…
Run the Command…
Add a log host
loghost add
Activate a log host
loghost activate
Deactivate a log host
loghost deactivate
5.5 Deactivating a Log Host This operation enables you to deactivate a log host.
Context The system sends log information only to the activated log hosts.
Procedure Step 1 Run the loghost deactivate command to deactivate a log host. Step 2 Run the display loghost list command to display the log host. ----End
Example To deactivate the log host with IP address 10.10.10.1, do as follows: huawei#loghost deactivate ip 10.10.10.1 huawei#display loghost list ip 10.10.10.1 Log server configuration: IP address : 10.10.10.1 Host name : huawei Terminal state : Deactivate
Related Operation Table 5-4 lists the related operations for deactivating a log host. Table 5-4 Related operations for deactivating a log host
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
To…
Run the Command…
Activate a log host
loghost activate
Add a log host
loghost add
Delete a log host
loghost delete
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Log Host
5.6 Querying Logs This operation enables you to query logs.
Context l
The MA5600 can keep logs of the latest 512 operations. System administrators can query the latest executed operation commands through logs. The executed query commands cannot be recorded in the logs.
l
Up to 512 logs can be stored in the system. When there are more than 512 records, the old records will be overwritten.
l
Query and record the system logs at once in the case of system failure, to avoid loss of logs that are helpful for fault locating.
l
To record the operation correctly, make sure that the system time is correct before service configuration.
Procedure Run the display log command to query logs. ----End
Example To query the logs of operations performed by user "root" on July 9, 2007, do as follows: huawei(config)#display log name root 2007-07-09 { |time1|- }: Command: display log name root 2007-07-09 --------------------------------------------------------------------------No. UserName Domain IP-Address 10 root - 10.70.41.163 Time: 2007-07-09 14:12:20 Cmd: config --------------------------------------------------------------------------No. UserName Domain IP-Address 9 root - 10.70.41.163 Time: 2007-07-09 14:12:18 Cmd: enable --------------------------------------------------------------------------No. UserName Domain IP-Address 8 root - 10.70.41.163 Time: 2007-07-09 13:06:53 Cmd: disable --------------------------------------------------------------------------No. UserName Domain IP-Address 7 root - 10.70.41.163 Time: 2007-07-09 13:06:12 Cmd: quit ---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----
5-6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
6 Managing Users
6
Managing Users
About This Chapter This chapter describes the classification of users supported by the MA5600 and how to add, modify, delete, or disconnect a user. 6.1 Overview This section describes the definition of users and user levels and authorities supported by the MA5600. 6.2 Adding a User Profile This operation enables you to add a user profile. To add a new user, you need bind this user profile to manage operators. 6.3 Adding a User This operation enables you to add a user who can log in to the MA5600 to maintain it. 6.4 Modifying the User Attributes You can modify the user attributes, such as user profile, authority, password, the permitted reenter number and the appended information. 6.5 Disconnecting an Online User This operation enables you to disconnect an online user to prevent the user from logging in to the MA5600. 6.6 Deleting a User This operation enables you to delete a user which is not permitted to log in to the MA5600.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
6-1
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
6 Managing Users
6.1 Overview This section describes the definition of users and user levels and authorities supported by the MA5600.
Service Description Users herein refer to persons who configure and maintain the MA5600 through CLI.
Service Specification In terms of authority, MA5600 users can be divided into four levels: l
Common user
l
Operator
l
Administrator
l
Super user
Users at all levels can only add a user with lower levels than theirs. Table 6-1 lists the authorities for users at all levels. Table 6-1 User authorities User Level
Authority
Common user
Common users perform basic system operation and simple query operation.
Operator
Operator can configure the MA5600 and services.
Administrator and super user
Common: l
Perform all operations.
l
Maintain the MA5600 user accounts and user authority.
Difference: l
Only one super user exists in the system, while multi administrators in the system.
l
The super user is of the highest level in the system.
l
Super user can create the administrator level account, while administrator has no authority to add a super user.
6.2 Adding a User Profile This operation enables you to add a user profile. To add a new user, you need bind this user profile to manage operators.
6-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
6 Managing Users
Context l
There exists one root profile in the system. This profile disables restrictions on users so that root users can log in to the system smoothly after a system upgrade. It is not recommended to bind the root profile when you add a new user.
l
The system provides three default profiles whose levels are administrator, operator and common user respectively. They are convenient for unified management and the operation of adding users.
l
Up to 12 profiles can be added.
l
To add a user profile, you need to configure the following parameters: –
Use profile name
–
Min. length of user name
–
Min. length of password
–
Validity period of the user name
–
Validity period of the password
–
Permitted start time of logon by a user
–
Permitted end time of logon by a user
For details, refer to Table 6-2. Table 6-2 Parameter descriptions of a user profile
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Parameters
Description
Min. length of user name
The min. length of user name can be 6 to 15 alphanumeric characters and it must be equal to or longer than 6 alphanumeric characters.
Min. length of password
The min. length of password can be 6 to 15 alphanumeric characters and it must be equal to or longer than 6 alphanumeric characters.
Validity period of the user name
It ranges from 0 to 999 days. If it is set to 0 day, then the validity lasts forever. By default, it is 30 days. The system checks the validity of user names by day and when a user logs on to the system. Before three days of the expiration, the system generates an alarm informing the user of expiration day. The system generates an alarm informing the user of expiration once the system identifies the expiration of a user name.
Validity period of the password
It ranges from 0 to 999 days. If it is set to 0 day, then the validity lasts forever. By default, it is 30 days. The validity period of the password should not be equal to or shorter than that of the user name. The system checks the validity of passwords by day and when a user logs on to the system. Before three days of the expiration, the system generates an alarm informing the user of expiration day and asking the user to modify the password in time.
Permitted start time of logon by a user
Together with the parameter of permitted end time of logon by a user, it specifies the permitted period for a user to log on to the system. A user can log on to the system only in the permitted period.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
6-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
6 Managing Users
Parameters
Description
Permitted end time of logon by a user
Together with the parameter of permitted start time of logon by a user, it specifies the permitted period for a user to log on to the system. A user can log on to the system only in the permitted period. If a user logs on to the system at the permitted start time but does not log out at the permitted end time, the system will force the user to log out and stop the user to configure the system.
Procedure Step 1 Run the terminal user-profile add command to add a user profile. Step 2 Run the display terminal user-profile command to query information on the user profile. ----End
Example Assume that: l
Use profile name: userprofile
l
Min. length of user name: 8 alphanumeric characters
l
Min. length of password: 8 alphanumeric characters
l
Validity period of the user name: 30 day
l
Validity period of the password: 30 day
l
Permitted start time of logon by a user: 09:00
l
Permitted end time of logon by a user: 19:00
To add the user profile, do as follows: huawei(config)#terminal user-profile add User profile name( Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]:1 > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:y Note: Setting to these mode of G992.3~5 will lead that the adsl ports that are not support adsl2+ not be activated ADSL transmission mode: > 0: All (G992.1~5,T1.413) > 1: Full rate(G992.1/3/5 or T1.413) > 2: g.lite(G992.2/4) (ADSL over ISDN board doesn't support g.lite mode) > 3: T1.413(ADSL over ISDN board doesn't support T1.413 mode) > 4: g.dmt (G992.1/3/5) > 5: g.hs (G992.1~5, G992.5 is prior) > 6: G992.1 > 7: G992.2 > 8: G992.3 > 9: G992.4 > 10:G992.5 > 11: ADSL all (G992.1~2,T1.413) > 12: ADSL&ADSL2(G992.1/3 or T1.413) Please select (0~12) [0]: 4
> > > > > > > > > > > > >
21-22
Trellis mode 0-disable 1-enable (0~1) [1]: Downstream channel bit swap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1) [1]: Upstream channel bit swap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1) [1]: Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)[n]:y Maximum downstream interleaved delay(0~255 ms) [16]:8 Maximum upstream interleaved delay(0~255 ms) [6]:2 Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]: Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]: Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]: 1024 Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [24544]: 32000
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
> Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~6000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~6000 Kbps) [1024]: 512 Add profile 3 successfully
Table 21-5 lists parameters of an ADSL2+ line profile. Table 21-5 Parameters of an ADSL2+ line profile Parameter
Description
Profile Index
You can input the line profile index or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile index. The profile index is unique.
ADSL2+ transmission mode
Currently, there are six ADSL/ADSL2+ working modes: G992.1, G992.2, G992.3, G992.4, G992.5 and T1.413. l
G992.2 adopts rather narrow frequency spectrum and low upstream/downstream rate. Its frequency spectrum is only half of that of G992.1 or T1.413; its maximum upstream and downstream rates are 512 kbit/s and 1536 kbit/s respectively.
l
G992.1 and the T1.413 adopt similar rates: up to 8160 kbit/s in downstream, and up to 896 kbit/s in upstream.
Trellis mode
The Trellis coding algorithm is used to boost SNR and enhance line stability. It is usually enabled.
Upstream/Downstream channel bit swap
When the conditions of an ADSL2+ channel get worse, the SNR of a sub-carrier may deteriorate, resulting in failure in bearing the bits allocated to the sub-carrier. With the bit swap function, the system can swap the allocated bits from one sub-carrier to another to avoid possible disconnection due to the variation in characteristics.
channel mode
There are two channel modes: interleave mode and fast mode. Compared with fast mode, the interleave mode is characterized by stable line connection, and longer transmission delay. l
For common Internet access services, the interleave mode is recommended.
l
For services that are delay sensitive, such as Video On Demand (VOD), fast mode is recommended.
Maximum downstream/ upstream interleaved depth
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
The larger the interleave delay, the higher the ADSL2+ connection stability, but the longer the transmission delay.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-23
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
21-24
Parameter
Description
Adapt mode in downstream/ upstream
There are three adapt modes: l
1-fixed
l
2-adaptAtStartup
l
3-adaptAtRuntime
SNR margin for modem
The SNR margin refers to the additional tolerable SNR that does not lead to the deterioration of the current line rate. The larger the modem SNR margin, the higher the connection stability, but the lower of the activated physical connection rate.
Minimum SNR margin in downstream/upstream
In the process of ADSL2+ connection setup, if the calculated SNR margin is lower than the preset one, the port activation will fail.
Maximal SNR margin in downstream/upstream
In the process of ADSL2+ connection setup, if the calculated target SNR margin of an ADSL2+ line is higher than the preset max. SNR margin, the system will limit the downstream max. SNR margin to the preset max. value.
Target SNR margin in downstream/upstream
The target SNR margin is the preserved SNR margin to ensure normal communication in the case of line SNR deterioration. The larger the target SNR margin, the lower the chance of occurrence of the line error, the safer the system may be, but the lower the data transmission rate. Therefore, the target SNR margin shall be adjusted based on the actual line conditions.
Downstream/Upstream SNR margin for rate downshift
When the SNR margin reaches this value, the system starts to adjust the rate downwards.
Downstream/Upstream SNR margin for rate upshift
When the SNR margin reaches this value, the system starts to adjust the rate upwards.
Minimum upshift time in downstream/upstream
When the SNR margin reaches "SNR margin for rate upshift", the system will keep the current rate for a certain period before adjusting the rate upwards.
Minimum downshift time in downstream/upstream
When the SNR margin reaches "SNR margin for rate downshift", the system will keep the current rate for a certain period before adjusting the rate downwards.
Minimum bit rate in downstream/upstream
In the process of ADSL2+ connection setup, if the calculated upward/downward rate is lower than this value, the port activation will fail.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
Parameter
Description
Maximum bit rate in downstream/upstream
In setting up the ADSL2+ connection, if the line is in good condition and the calculated downstream/upstream rate of an ADSL2+ line is higher than the preset max. value, the system will limit the rate to the preset value while increasing the SNR margin. If the line is in poor condition, and the calculated downstream/upstream rate is lower than the set max. rate, the system will set up the ADSL2+ connection at the calculated rate, while maintaining the target SNR margin.
Related Operation Table 21-6 lists the related operations for adding an ADSL2+ line profile. Table 21-6 Related operations for adding an ADSL2+ line profile To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Quickly add an ADSL2+ line profile
adsl line-profile quickadd
The system adopts non-interactive mode for inputting parameters of the command. The command serves as a complement to the command adsl line profile add.
Delete an ADSL2+ line profile
adsl line-profile delete
You cannot delete the default line profiles or a referenced line profile.
Modify an ADSL2+ line profile
adsl line-profile modify
After the line profile is modified, the system prompts that the profile takes effect immediately
Quickly modify an ADSL2+ line profile
adsl line-profile quickmodify
The system adopts non-interactive mode for inputting parameters of the command. The command serves as a complement to the command adsl line profile modify.
Display an ADSL2+ line profile
display adsl line-profile
-
21.6 Adding an Extended ADSL2+ Line Profile This operation enables you to add an extended ADSL2+ line profile. The extended ADSL2+ line profile is used to configure the extended parameters for an ADSL2+ port when the port is activated. This helps to filter the sub-carrier that are unsuitable for carrying data.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-25
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Context An extended ADSL2+ line profile is used to configure the extended parameters for an ADSL2 + port when the port is activated. The following are three major parameters: l
missingtone When you set this parameter to the specified sub-carrier of the line, these sub-carriers has no power output, and no bit is allocated to them. If the noise of some bands is very unstable, you can set this parameter to forbid this band. In this way, the line will not be affected by the band. Some bands have special purposes in some regions. To prevent interference to these bands, you can set the parameter to forbid these bands.
l
Impulse Noise Protection (INP) INP defines the capacity of resisting the impulse interference of the ADSL channel. Its unit is DMT SYMBOL. If INP is 1, it means that the current ADSL channel can resist the impulse noise of one DMT SYMBOL.
l
Maximum downstream power spectral density (PSD) margin The maximum downstream PSD margin ranges from –40 dBm/Hz to –52 dBm/Hz. By default, it is –40 dBm/Hz.
l
L2 low power management mode configuration The system allows you to set the switch for automatic entering or exiting L2 low power mode, allowing or prohibiting the board automatically to enter or exit L2 low power mode according to the data traffic.
The MA5600 supports up to 32 extended ADSL2+ line profiles. After an extended ADSL2+ line profile is configured, bind it with the ports and then directly reference it for activating the ADSL2+ ports. NOTE
l
The H561ADBF board supports Annex.B working mode only. If the Annex type is incorrect and the incorrect extended line profile is used to activate the port, the system automatically selects a suitable parameter to ensure that the port can be activated normally.
l
The H569ADEE board does not support Annex.B working mode. If the entered Annex type is Annex.B and the incorrect extended line profile is used to activate the port,the system automatically selects a suitable parameter to ensure that the port can be activated normally.
Procedure Step 1 Run the adsl extline-profile add command to add an extended ADSL2+ line profile. Step 2 Run the display adsl extline-profile command to query a configured extended ADSL2+ line profile. ----End
Example Add an extended ADSL2+ line profile and disable the tones 40-50, and then validate the configuration. To set the minimum pulse noise protection parameter for the downstream line as noProtection, transmission mode as G992.1, and Annex type as Annex.A, do as follows: 21-26
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
huawei(config)#adsl extline-profile add { |profile-index }: Command: adsl extline-profile add Start adding profile Notes: If pilot tone is included in the forbidden tones ,the link may not be activated When port activated with annexA in mode G992.1, 64tone is pilot When port activated with annexB in mode G992.1, 96tone is pilot Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Will you configure the disabled tone? (y/n)[n]:y > How many sections do you want to configure?(1-4)[4]: > No.1 Please input the start index of the disabled tone(32-511)[32]:40 > Please input the end index of the disabled tone(32-511)[32]:50 > Do you want to validate the settings of this section? (y/n)[n]:y > No.2 Please input the start index of the disabled tone(32-511)[32]: > Please input the end index of the disabled tone(32-511)[32]: > Do you want to validate the settings of this section? (y/n)[n]:y > No.3 Please input the start index of the disabled tone(32-511)[32]: > Please input the end index of the disabled tone(32-511)[32]: > Do you want to validate the settings of this section? (y/n)[n]:y > No.4 Please input the start index of the disabled tone(32-511)[32]: > Please input the end index of the disabled tone(32-511)[32]: > Do you want to validate the settings of this section? (y/n)[n]:y > Will you configure the minimum INP in downstream? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum INP on downstream direction: > 0--auto > 1--noProtection(0) > 2--halfSymbol(0.5) > 3--singleSymbol(1) > 4--twoSymbols(2) > 5--fourSymbols(4) Please select (0~5) [0]: > Will you configure the minimum INP in upstream? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum INP on uptream direction: > 0--auto > 1--noProtection(0) > 2--halfSymbol(0.5) > 3--singleSymbol(1) > 4--twoSymbols(2) > 5--fourSymbols(4) Please select (0~5) [0]: > Will you configure the maximum PSD mask in downstream? (y/n)[n]:y > Maximum PSD mask in downstream(40~52 -dBm/Hz) [40]: > Warning: The configuration of transmission mode in extline-profle will replace the one configured in line-profile when the transmission mode is enabled! > Will you enable the transmission mode?(y/n)[n]:y ADSL transmission mode in standard : > 1: G992.1 2: G992.2 3: G992.3 4: G992.5 5: T1.413 > Please input the standard possible in use(1-5)[1,3-4]: ADSL annex type : > 1: Annex.A 2: Annex.B 3: Annex.L 4: Annex.M > Please input the Annex possible in use(1-4)[1-4]: > Will you configure the L2 parameter?(y/n)[n]:y > L2 mode state: 0-disable,1-enable,2-force(0~2)[0]:2 > Warning: System can not support to force into or out of L2 power mode by manually now! > L2 mode state: 0-disable,1-enable,2-force(0~2)[0]:1 > Minimum L0 time interval between L2 exit and next L2 entry(0~255s)[255]: > Minimum L2 time interval between L2 entry and first L2 trim(0~255s)[30]: > Maximum aggregate transmit power reduction per L2 request or L2 power trim(0~ 31db)[3]: > Total maximum aggregate transmit power reduction in L2(0~31db)[9]: Add profile 1 successfully huawei(config)#display adsl extline-profile 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-27
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Profile Index : 1
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide Name: ADSL EXTLINEPROFILE 1
Minimum INP in downstream(DMT Symbol) Minimum INP in upstream(DMT Symbol) Maximum PSD mask in downstream(-dBm/Hz) ADSL transmission mode in standard ADSL annex type L2 mode state Minimum L0 time(s) Minimum L2 time(s) L2 interval power(db) L2 total power(db)
:auto :auto :40 :G992.1,G992.3,G992.5 :Annex.A,Annex.B,Annex.L,Annex.M :enable :255 :30 :3 :9
Current configuration of each section: Sections Value Effective Section 1 40 - 50 y Section 2 32 - 32 y Section 3 32 - 32 y Section 4 32 - 32 y ------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 21-7 lists the related operations for adding an extended ADSL2+ line profile. Table 21-7 Related operations for adding an extended ADSL2+ line profile To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Quickly add an extended ADSL2+ line profile
adsl extline-profile quickadd
The system adopts non-interactive mode for inputting parameters of the command. It is a complement to the adsl extline-profile add command.
Delete an extended ADSL2+ line profile
adsl extline-profile delete
You cannot delete a referenced extended line profile.
Modify an extended ADSL2+ line profile
adsl extline-profile modify
After the profile is modified, the system prompts the profile takes effect immediately.
Quickly modify an extended ADSL2+ line profile
adsl extline-profile quickmodify
The system adopts non-interactive mode for inputting parameters of the command.
Bind/unbind an extended ADSL2+ line profile
(undo)extline-config
To bind an extended ADSL2+ line profile with all ports on a board at a time, run the extline-config all command.
21.7 Adding an ADSL2+ Alarm Profile This operation enables you to add an ADSL2+ alarm profile. After the alarm profile is configured and bound successfully, it can be directly used to activate the ports.
Prerequisite The ADSL2+ line meets the requirements of service provisioning. 21-28
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
Context When adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile, you should pay attention to the following points: l
The MA5600 has a default ADSL2+ alarm profile named DEFVAL and numbered 1. You can modify the profile but cannot delete it.
l
The ADSL2+ alarm profile contains a series of alarm thresholds to measure and monitor an activated ADSL2+ line. When a statistic reaches the threshold, the MA5600 sends the alarm to the loghost and NMS.
Configuration Flowchart Figure 21-9 shows the flowchart for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-29
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Figure 21-9 Flowchart for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile Set threshold of negative difference between current and past transmit rate in interleaved mode
Configure ADSL2+ alarm profile
Set alarm profile index Set LOF seconds in ATU-R Set LOF seconds in ATU-C Set LOS seconds in ATU-R Set LOS seconds in ATU-C Set LOP seconds in ATU-R Set LOL seconds in ATU-C Set errored seconds in ATU-R Set LOP seconds in ATU-C Set severely errored seconds in ATU-R
Set errored seconds in ATU-C
Set unavailable seconds in ATU-R No Report initialization failure?
Set threshold of positive difference between current and past transmit rate in fast mode
Yes Set failed fast retrain seconds in ATU-C Set severely errored seconds in ATU-C Set unavailable seconds in ATU-C Set threshold fo positive difference between current and past transmit rate in fast mode Set threshold of positive difference between current and past transmit rate in interleaved mode
Set threshold of positive difference between current and past transmit rate in interleaved mode Set threshold of negative difference between current and past transmit rate in fast mode Set threshold of negative difference between current and past transmit rate in interleaved mode
End
Set threshold of negative difference betwen current and past transmit rate in fast mode
Procedure Run the adsl alarm-profile add command to add an ADSL2+ alarm profile. ----End 21-30
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
Example To add an ADSL2+ alarm profile, with the index of 2, do as follows: huawei(config-if-adsl-0/2)#adsl alarm-profile add 2 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]:50 > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]:10 > The number of Loss of Link Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0]: > Enable or disable the Initial failure trap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1) [0]: > The number of failed fast retrain seconds (0~900) [0]:10 > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968Kbps) [0]:100 > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968Kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968Kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968Kbps) [0]: > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]:10 > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]:10 > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]:10 > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~5968Kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~5968Kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~5968Kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~5968Kbps) [0]: Add profile 2 successfully
Table 21-8 lists the parameters of an ADSL2+ alarm profile. Table 21-8 Parameters of an ADSL2+ alarm profile
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Parameters
Description
Index
You can enter a profile index or press Enter to enable the system to designate an index for it. The profile index is unique.
The number of loss of frame Seconds
Within any given 15-minute period, if the number of downstream frame second loss exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
The number of loss of signal Seconds
Within any given 15-minute period, if the number of lost signal seconds exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-31
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Parameters
Description
The number of loss of link seconds
Within any given 15-minute period, if the number of lost link seconds exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
The number of loss of power seconds
Within any given 15-minute period, if the number of lost power seconds exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
The number of errored seconds
Within any given 15-minute period, if the number of errored seconds exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
The number of failed fast retrain seconds
Within any given 15-minute period, if the number of failed retrain events exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
The number of severely errored seconds
Within any given 15-minute period, if the number of severely errored seconds exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
The number of unavailable seconds
Within any given 15-minute period, if the number of unavailable seconds exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode
Within any given 15-minute period, if the positive difference between the current and the past transmit rates in fast mode exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode
Within any given 15-minute period, if the negative difference between the current and the past transmit rates in fast mode exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode
Within any given 15-minute period, if the positive difference between the current and the past transmit rates in interleaved mode exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode
Within any given 15-minute period, if the negative difference between the current and the past transmit rates in interleaved mode exceeds the preset value, an alarm is generated.
Related Operation Table 21-9 lists the related operations for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile.
21-32
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
Table 21-9 Related operations for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Quickly add an ADSL2+ alarm profile
adsl alarm-profile quickadd
The system adopts non-interactive mode for inputting the parameters of the command. The command serves as a complement to the adsl alarm profile add command.
Delete an ADSL2+ alarm profile
adsl alarm-profile delete
You cannot delete the default alarm profiles or a referenced alarm profile.
Modify an ADSL2+ alarm profile
adsl alarm-profile modify
After the profile is modified, the system prompts that the profile takes effect immediately.
Quickly modify an ADSL2+ alarm profile
adsl alarm-profile quickmodify
The system adopts the non-interactive mode for inputting parameters of the command. The command serves as a complement to the adsl alarm profile modify command.
Display an ADSL2+ alarm profile
display adsl alarmprofile
-
Bind an ADSL2+ alarm profile
alarm-config
A configured alarm profile can take effect only after it is bound with an ADSL2+ port.
21.8 Activating an ADSL2+ Port This operation enables you to activate an ADSL2+ port for transmitting service data.
Prerequisite The ADSL2+ line profile has been configured.
Context l
Activating (or activation) refers to the training between the ATU-C and the ATU-R. During the training process, the system checks the line distance and line state based on settings included in the line profile, such as upstream/downstream line rate and SNR margin. The ATU-C negotiates with the ATU-R to check whether the MA5600 can work well under the existing conditions.
l
If the training succeeds, the ATU-C can communicate with the ATU-R. At the moment, the port works in activated state, and is ready for service data transmission.
l
When the ATU-R is online, the activation process ends upon the completion of the training. When the ATU-R gets offline, the communication is terminated, and the ATU-C is in listening state. Once the ATU-R gets online, the training process begins automatically. When the training succeeds, the port is activated.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-33
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service l
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
To activate an ADSL2+ port, you need to bind it with an ADSL2+ line profile. If no profile is specified, the system will use the profile bound with the port last time to activate ADSL2 + port.
Procedure Step 1 Run the activate command to activate an ADSL2+ port. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the activated port. ----End To activate all ports on ADSL2+ board in slot0/2 using line profile 1, do as follows: huawei(config-if-adsl-0/2)#activate all profile-index 1 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/2)#display port state all 32 Activated 1 1 -33 Activated 1 1 -34 Activated 1 1 -35 Activated 1 1 -36 Activated 1 1 -37 Activated 1 1 -38 Activated 1 1 -39 Activated 1 1 -40 Activated 1 1 -41 Activated 1 1 -42 Activated 1 1 -43 Activated 1 1 -44 Activated 1 1 -45 Activated 1 1 -46 Activated 1 1 -47 Activated 1 1 -48 Activated 1 1 -49 Activated 1 1 -50 Activated 1 1 -51 Activated 1 1 -52 Activated 1 1 -53 Activated 1 1 -54 Activated 1 1 -55 Activated 1 1 -56 Activated 1 1 -57 Activated 1 1 -58 Activated 1 1 -59 Activated 1 1 -60 Activated 1 1 -61 Activated 1 1 -62 Activated 1 1 -63 Activated 1 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------Total number of activated port : 64 Total number of unactivated port: 0
To activate port 0 on the ADSL2+ board in slot 0/2 using line profile huawei, do as follows: huawei(config-if-adsl-0/2)#activate 0 profile-name huawei huawei(config-if-adsl-0/2)#display port state 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Status Line_Profile Alm_Profile Ext_Profile ---------------------------------------------------------------------0 Activated 3 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 21-10 lists the related operations for activating an ADSL2+ port. 21-34
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
Table 21-10 Related operations for activating an ADSL2+ port To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Deactivate an ADSL2+ port
deactivate
After an ADSL port is deactivated, the communication link established during activation between the ATU-C and the ATUR will be disconnected. For service transmission, activate the port again.
Loop back ADSL port
loopback
-
21.9 Configuring the Port Rate Measurement Thresholds for an ADSL2+ Port This operation enables you to configure the upstream and downstream rate measurement thresholds for an ADSL2+ port.
Context l
When an ADSL2+ port is activated, the upstream and downstream rate measurements states change.
l
If the host detects one rate measurement does not meet the system requirement, an alarm will be reported to the NMS.
l
If the host detects both the upstream and downstream rate measurements meet the system requirement, a recovery alarm will be reported.
l
The upstream and downstream rate measurement thresholds are set separately. If you need to monitor both the upstream rate and downstream rate, set the upstream and downstream rate measurement thresholds respectively.
l
The upstream and downstream rate measurement thresholds can be set to rates or percents.
l
The upstream and downstream rate measurement thresholds can be configured for all ADSL boards for one time. They can also be configured for a specified ADSL port.
l
The system generates alarms irrespective of whether the upstream and downstream rate measurement thresholds meet the requirement. This does not affect other processing of a port.
Procedure Step 1 Run the adsl line-monitoring command to set the rate measurement thresholds for an ADSL2 + port. Step 2 Run the display adsl line-monitoring command to query the rate measurement thresholds information of an ADSL2+ port. ----End
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-35
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Example To set the upstream rate measurement threshold of all ADSL boards as 80%, do as follows: huawei(config)#adsl line-monitoring all rate-threshold upstream upstream-rate-pe rcent 80 Command was executed successfully for slot : 0, 1, 2 huawei(config)#display adsl line-monitoring 0/2/0 Port ID : 0/2/0 Port Type : ADSL Line Monitoring Upstream Rate-percent : 80 percent Line Monitoring Downstream Rate-percent : 80 percent
To set the downstream rate measurement threshold of port 0/2/0 as 90%, do as follows: huawei(config)#adsl line-monitoring port 0/2/0 rate-threshold downstream downstream-rate-percent 90 huawei(config)#display adsl line-monitoring 0/2/0 Port ID : 0/2/0 Port Type : ADSL Line Monitoring Upstream Rate-percent : 80 percent Line Monitoring Downstream Rate-percent : 90 percent
21.10 Configuring IPoA/IPoE Protocol Conversion The MA5600 supports the conversion between the IPoA and IPoE protocols. In this way, the IPoA users can access the upper layer IP network to enhance the access ability and network capability of the MA5600. 21.10.1 Enabling IPoA Protocol Conversion This operation enables IPoA/IPoE protocol conversion. 21.10.2 Setting the Aging time of IPoA Forwarding Entry This operation enables you to set the aging time of IPoA forwarding entry. 21.10.3 Setting the Default Gateway of the IPoA User This operation enables you to configure the default gateway of the IPoA user. 21.10.4 Configuring the Encapsulation Type of the IPoA User This operation enable you to configure the encapsulation type of the IPoA user.
21.10.1 Enabling IPoA Protocol Conversion This operation enables IPoA/IPoE protocol conversion.
Procedure Step 1 Run the ipoa enable command to enable IPoA protocol conversion. Step 2 Run the display ipoa config command to query IPoA protocol conversion state. ----End
Example To enable IPoA protocol conversion, do as follows: huawei(config)#ipoa enable
Run the display ipoa config command and you can find the IPoA protocol conversion is enabled. 21-36
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide huawei(config)#display ipoa IPoA status IPoA user default gateway IPoA expire-time
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
config : enable : 0.0.0.0 : 1200 s
Related Operation Table 21-11 lists the related operations for enabling IPoA protocol conversion. Table 21-11 Related operations for enabling IPoA protocol conversion To...
Run the Command...
Disable IPoA protocol conversion
ipoa disable
21.10.2 Setting the Aging time of IPoA Forwarding Entry This operation enables you to set the aging time of IPoA forwarding entry.
Context l
By default, the aging time of IPoA forwarding entry is 1200s.
l
When the aging time times out, the IPoA forwarding entry cannot be updated, and the system regards users offline.
Procedure Step 1 Run the ipoa expire-time command to set the aging time of IPoA forwarding entry. Step 2 Run the display ipoa config command to query the correctly configured aging time of IPoA forwarding entry. ----End
Example To configure the aging time of IPoA forwarding entry as 300s, do as follows: huawei(config)#ipoa expire-time 300
Run the display ipoa config command and you can find the aging time of IPoA forwarding entry is set correctly. huawei(config)#display ipoa IPoA status IPoA user default gateway IPoA expire-time
config : enable : 0.0.0.0 : 300 s
Related Operation Table 21-12 lists the related operation for setting the aging time of IPoA forwarding entry. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-37
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Table 21-12 Related operation for setting the aging time of IPoA forwarding entry To...
Run the Command...
Query the IPoA configuration
display ipoa config
21.10.3 Setting the Default Gateway of the IPoA User This operation enables you to configure the default gateway of the IPoA user.
Context l
By default, the gateway of the IPoA user is 0.0.0.0.
l
The default gateway of the IPoA user is the interface IP address of upper device that connects to the MA5600. But not that of the MA5600 its own.
Procedure Step 1 Run the ipoa deault gateway command to set the default gateway of the IPoA user. Step 2 Run the display ipoa config command to query the default gateway of the IPoA user is set correctly. ----End
Example To set the default gateway of the IPoA user as 10.1.1.1, do as follows: huawei(config)#ipoa default gateway 10.1.1.1
Run the display ipoa config command and you can find that the default gateway of the IPoA user is set correctly. huawei(config)#display ipoa IPoA status IPoA user default gateway IPoA expire-time
config : enable : 10.1.1.1 : 300 s
Related Operation Table 21-13 lists the related operations for setting the default gateway of the IPoA user. Table 21-13 Related operations for setting the default gateway of the IPoA user To...
Run the Command...
Restore the default gateway of the IPoA user
undo ipoa default gateway
21.10.4 Configuring the Encapsulation Type of the IPoA User This operation enable you to configure the encapsulation type of the IPoA user. 21-38
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
Context l
By default, LLC and VC-MUX are used for the IPoA encapsulation. You can set the encapsulation type as needed.
l
When configuring LLC for the IPoA service, pay attention to the following points:
l
–
LLC encapsulation supports both dynamic and static source IP address learning. So you do not need to specify the source IP address if the modem automatically reports the IP address.
–
When a default gateway has been configured for the IPoA service, you need not configure the destination IP address for the IPoA user. In this case, the user’s destination IP address is that of the default gateway.
–
After you have configured IPoA encapsulation for an xDSL port, you can delete a virtual port only after you have changed the encapsulation type to LLC bridge.
–
Make sure the MAC address pool is configured before the encapsulation configuration. Otherwise, the encapsulation configuration fails.
When configuring VC-MUX for the IPoA service, pan attention to the following points: –
Since VC-MUX encapsulation supports only static source IP address learning, you must specify the source IP address.
–
When a default gateway has been configured for the IPoA service, you need not configure the destination IP address for the IPoA user. In this case, the user’s destination IP address is that of the default gateway.
–
After you have configured IPoA encapsulation for an xDSL port, you can delete a virtual port only after you have changed the encapsulation type to LLC bridge.
–
Make sure the MAC address pool is configured before the encapsulation configuration. Otherwise, the encapsulation configuration fails.
Procedure Step 1 Run the encapsulation command to configure the encapsulation type of the IPoA user. Step 2 Run the display encapsulation type command to query the configuration. ----End
Example To configure the encapsulation type of the IPoA user as LLC, do as follows: huawei(config)#encapsulation 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 34 { type }:type { bridge|pppoa|auto|ipoa }:ipoa { llc|vc-mux }:llc { |srcIP|dstIP }: Command: encapsulation 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 34 type ipoa llc Changing encapsulation type may cause service interruption, are you sure to make the operation? (y/n)[n]y Set encapsulation type successfully
Run the display encapsulation type command to query the LLC-IPoA user. huawei(config)#display encapsulation type ipoa llc { |number }: Command: display encapsulation type ipoa llc --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-39
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
F/S /P VPI VCI ENCAP SRCIP DSTIP SRCIP-MODE -------------------------------------------------------------------------0/2 /0 0 34 llc_ip 0.0.0.0 1.1.1.1 dynamic -------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1 Note : F--Frame, S--Slot, P--Port(or Virtual Port, such as IMA GROUP, VLAN ID etc.), The vpi is access-end VLAN ID in vdsl port
To configure the encapsulation type of the IPoA user as VC-MUX, do as follows: huawei(config)#encapsulation { frame/slot/port|frame/slot }:0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 34 { type }:type { bridge|pppoa|auto|ipoa }:ipoa { llc|vc-mux }:vc-mux { srcIP }:srcIP 10.1.1.2 { |dstIP }: Command: encapsulation 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 34 type ipoa vc-mux srcIP 10.1.1.2 Changing encapsulation type may cause service interruption, are you sure to make the operation? (y/n)[n]y Set encapsulation type successfully
Run the display encapsulation type command to query the VC-MUX-IPoA user. huawei(config)#display encapsulation type ipoa vc-mux { |number }: Command: display encapsulation type ipoa vc-mux ---------------------------------------------------------------------------F/S /P VPI VCI ENCAP SRCIP DSTIP SRCIP-MODE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------0/2 /0 0 34 vc_ip 10.1.1.2 10.1.1.1 static ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1 Note : F--Frame, S--Slot, P--Port(or Virtual Port, such as IMA GROUP, VLAN ID etc.), The VPI is access-end VLAN ID in VDSL port
21.11 Configuring PPPoA/PPPoE Protocol Conversion The MA5600 supports the conversion between the PPPoA and PPPoE protocols. In this way, the PPPoA users can access the upper layer IP network to enhance the access ability and network capability of the MA5600. 21.11.1 Enabling PPPoA Protocol Conversion This operation enables you to convert the PPPoA protocol to PPPoE protocol, so that the PPPoA user can access the upper layer IP network. 21.11.2 Configuring the Encapsulation Type of the PPPoA User This operation enables you to configure the encapsulation type of the PPPoA user. 21.11.3 Enabling PPPoA/PPPoE MRU Negotiation This operation enables you to enable PPPoA/PPPoE maximum receive unit (MRU) negotiation.
21.11.1 Enabling PPPoA Protocol Conversion This operation enables you to convert the PPPoA protocol to PPPoE protocol, so that the PPPoA user can access the upper layer IP network.
21-40
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
Procedure Step 1 Run the pppoa enable command to enable PPPoA/PPPoE protocol conversion. Step 2 Run the display pppoa config command to query the PPPoA/PPPoE protocol conversion state. ----End
Example To enable the PPPoA/PPPoE protocol conversion, do as follows: huawei(config)#pppoa enable
Run the display pppoa config command and you can query the PPPoA protocol conversion is enabled. huawei(config)#display pppoa config Global PPPoA-to-PPPoE conversion : Enable Max-receive-unit negotiate function: Disable
Related Operation Table 21-14 lists the related operations for enabling PPPoA protocol conversion. Table 21-14 Related operations for enabling PPPoA protocol conversion To...
Run the Command...
Disable the PPPoA protocol conversion
pppoa disable
21.11.2 Configuring the Encapsulation Type of the PPPoA User This operation enables you to configure the encapsulation type of the PPPoA user.
Context l
By default, LLC and VC-MUX are used for the PPPoA encapsulation. You can set the encapsulation type as needed.
l
For PPPoA access, LLC and VC-MUX encapsulation are similar. Configure it based on the actual access user type.
l
After you have configured PPPoA encapsulation for an xDSL port, you can delete a virtual service port only when you have changed the encapsulation type to LLC bridge.
l
Be sure to configure the MAC address pool before the encapsulation configuration. Otherwise, the encapsulation configuration will fail.
Procedure Step 1 Run the encapsulation command to configure the encapsulation type of the PPPoA user. Step 2 Run the display encapsulation type command to query the configuration. ----End Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-41
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Example To configure the encapsulation type of a PPPoA user as LLC, do as follows: huawei(config)#encapsulation 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 34 { type }:type { bridge|pppoa|auto|ipoa }:pppoa { llc|vc-mux }:llc Command: encapsulation 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 34 type pppoa llc Changing encapsulation type may cause service interruption, are you sure to make the operation? (y/n)[n]y Set encapsulation type successfully
Run the display encapsulation type command to query the LLC-PPPoA user. huawei(config)#display encapsulation type pppoa llc -------------------------------------------------------------------------F/S /P VPI VCI ENCAP SRCIP DSTIP SRCIP-MODE -------------------------------------------------------------------------0/2 /0 0 34 llc_ppp -------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1 Note : F--Frame, S--Slot, P--Port(or Virtual Port, such as IMA GROUP, VLAN ID etc.), The vpi is access-end VLAN ID in vdsl port
21.11.3 Enabling PPPoA/PPPoE MRU Negotiation This operation enables you to enable PPPoA/PPPoE maximum receive unit (MRU) negotiation.
Context The MA5600 determines whether to segment and resemble packets according to the PPPoA/ PPPoE MRU configuration. l
MRU enabled –
l
The PC initiates the PPPoE connection and negotiates by MRU of 1492 bits. In this case, the packets will be segmented and resembled.
MRU disabled –
The MA5600 identifies the PPPoE packets converted from PPPoA packets. It adds a Tag to the packets and then sends them to the upper layer BRAS. The BRAS negotiates with the CPE according to the 1500-byte MRU. By doing so, the size of the MTU between the CPE and the BRAS is equal to that of the standard MTU of the Ethernet. In this case, the packet is not segmented and reassembled.
Procedure Step 1 Run the pppoa mru enable command to enable PPPoA/PPPoE MRU negotiation. Step 2 Run the display pppoa config command to query PPPoA and MRU switch state. ----End
Example To enable the MRU negotiation, do as follows: huawei(config)#pppoa mru enable Run the display pppoa config command to query the PPPoA and MRU configuration. 21-42
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
huawei(config)#display pppoa config Global PPPoA-to-PPPoE conversion : Enable Max-receive-unit negotiate function: Enable
Related Operation Table 21-15 lists the related operation for enabling PPPoA/PPPoE MRU negotiation. Table 21-15 Related operation for enabling PPPoA/PPPoE MRU negotiation To...
Run the Command...
Disable PPPoA/PPPoE MRU negotiation
pppoa mru disable
21.12 Querying an ADSL2+ Port This operation enables you to query the comprehensive information about an ADSL2+ port.
Context An ADSL2+ port may be in activating, activated, deactivated or loopback state. Figure 21-10 shows the status conversion of the ADSL2+ port. Figure 21-10 Status conversion of the ADSL2+ port undo loopback Loopback
Modem training succeeds
activate activating deactivated deactivate
loopback
Modem is off or powered off
activated
deactivate
Procedure Run the display interface adsl command to query the comprehensive information about an ADSL2+ port. ----End
Example To display the comprehensive information about ADSL2+ port 0/2/0, do as follows: huawei#display interface adsl 0/2/0 Adsl 0/2/0 is down The ADSL link is activating Description : -Bind line-profile No.1002 ADSL LINE PROFILE 1002 Bind alarm-profile No. 1 DEFVAL Bind no ext-profile BTV user bind profile name : -Hardware is ATU-C Last UP time : -Last DOWN time : --
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-43
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Current operational mode : No protocol selected / Current downstream Rate : 0 Current upstream Rate : 0 Total count of line training : 1 Total Up stream cells num(cell) : 0 Total Up stream packets num(packet) : 0 Total Down stream cells num(cell) : 0 Total Down stream packets num(packet) : 0 Total Down stream packets discarded due to congestion(packet) : 0 PVC 0/35 PVC encapsulation : Bridge LLC rx-cttr : 5 tx-cttr : 5 VLAN : 100 Max mac-address learning count : 255 Support Down MultiCast Stream : enable Up stream cells num(cell) : 0 Up stream packets num(packet) : 0 Down stream cells num(cell) : 0 Down stream packets num(packet) : 0
Related Operation Table 21-16 lists the related operations for querying an ADSL2+ port. Table 21-16 Related operations for querying an ADSL2+ port To...
Run the Command...
Query the status of an ADSL2+ port
display port state
Query the settings of an ADSL2+ port
display parameter
Query the performance statistics of an ADSL2+ port
display statistics performance
Query the bit allocation
display line bit-allocation
Query the subcarrier SNR of the activated line
display line snr
Query the alarm status of an ADSL2+ port
display alarm state
Query the operation parameters of an activated line
display line operation
Set the switch controlling the detailed display of ADSL2+ line operations
adsl line-operation detail
Query the switch controlling the detailed display of ADSL2+ line operations
display adsl line-operation detail config
21.13 Enabling the Auto PVC Configuration of an ADSL Modem This operation enables a modem to automatically configure the VPI/VCI. 21-44
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service
Prerequisite The modem must support the function of automatically configuring the VPI/VCI.
Procedure Run the modem-learning command to enable the auto PVC configuration of an ADSL modem. ----End
Example To enable the modem in slot 0/2 to automatically configure the PVC, do as follows: huawei(config-if-adsl-0/2)#modem-learning enable
Related Operation Table 21-17 lists the related operation for enabling an ADSL modem to automatically configure the PVC. Table 21-17 Related operation for enabling an ADSL modem to automatically configure the PVC
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Disable the auto PVC configuration of an ADSL modem
modem-learning disable
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
21-45
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Configuring the SHDSL Service
About This Chapter This chapter describes the SHDSL technology and how to configure the SHDSL service on the MA5600. 22.1 Overview This section describes the SHDSL service and its specifications. 22.2 Configuration Example of the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE Service This example shows how to configure the SHDSL service so that the user can access the Internet through the SHDSL lines in the IPoE/PPPoE mode. 22.3 Configuration Example of the SHDSL IPoA Service This example shows how to configure the SHDSL IPoA service so that the user can access the Internet through the SHDSL lines in the IPoA mode. 22.4 Configuration Example of the SHDSL PPPoA Service This example shows how to configure the SHDSL PPPoA service so that the user can access the Internet through the SHDSL lines in the PPPoA mode. 22.5 Adding an SHDSL Line Profile This operation enables you to add an SHDSL line profile. The SHDSL line profile includes a majority of parameters of the ports. After the line profile is configured, it can be used to activate the ports. 22.6 Adding an SHDSL Alarm Profile This operation enables you to add an SHDSL alarm profile. The SHDSL alarm profile is used to set a group of alarm thresholds for measuring and monitoring the performances of an active SHDSL line. When a statistic reaches the threshold, the MA5600 informs the device of the event, and sends alarms to the NMS. 22.7 Binding an SHDSL Alarm Profile This operation enables you to bind an SHDSL alarm profile to SHDSL ports to validate the alarm profile after the SHDSL ports are activated. 22.8 Configuring the SHDSL Multi-Pair Binding This operation enables you to configure the single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) multi-pair binding. The purpose of configuring the SHDSL multi-pair binding is to improve the line rate. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-1
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22.9 Configuring the SHDSL EFM Multi-port Binding This operation enables you to configure the SHDSL multi-port binding. The purpose of configuring the SHDSL EFM multiple-port binding is to improve the line rate. 22.10 Activating an SHDSL Port This operation enables you to activate an SHDSL port for service transmission. 22.11 Querying an SHDSL Port This operation enables you to query the SHDSL port status to check the port conditions. 22.12 Configuring the Clock Mode This operation enables you to configure the clock mode.
22-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
22.1 Overview This section describes the SHDSL service and its specifications.
Service Description The single-line high speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) technology provides a symmetric high-rate leased line access service over twisted pairs to meet the broadband access requirements of the small and medium enterprises or SOHO users. SHDSL provides a distance from 3 km to 6 km. The MA5600 provides the SHDSL service through the SHEA or SHEB board. The SHEB board supports the SHDSL.bis line. l
The SHDSL.bis single twisted pair supports the symmetric rates from 192 kbit/s to 5696 kbit/s. The system can adjust the line rate automatically according to the line conditions. The adjustment granularity is eight kbit/s.
l
In theory, the system supports the binding of up to four pairs. The bi-directional rate ranges from 768 kbit/s to 22784 kbit/s.
The SHDSL port supports the ATM/PTM mode activation. You can configure the corresponding profiles to switch the mode of the SHDSL port between the ATM mode and the PTM mode. l
The system supports the binding of M-pair. In the ATM port encapsulation mode, the system supports the binding of two-pair, three-pair, and four-pair. The rates are respectively twice, three times and four times of the single-pair rate.
l
The system supports the EFM binding. In the PTM port encapsulation mode, the system supports the binding of up to four ports. The rate is the sum of the rates of the four ports. NOTE
The SHEB board divides the 32 ports into eight groups in turn. Each group contains four ports. The port involved in M-pair binding and that involved in EFM binding must belong to the same group.
For details on the SHDSL service, refer to the chapter "SHDSL.bis Access" in the MA5600 Feature Description.
Service Specifications The MA5600 provides the SHDSL service through the SHEA or SHEB board. Each SHEA or SHEB board provides 32 SHDSL ports. Table 22-1 lists the encapsulation type mapping between the MA5600 and the modem. Table 22-1 Encapsulation type mapping between the MA5600 and the modem
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Access Type
Modem Encapsulation Type
MA5600 Encapsulation Type
IPoE
RFC1483 Bridge
Bridge or Auto
PPPoE
RFC1483 Bridge
Bridge or Auto
PPPoE
Bridge or Auto
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Access Type
Modem Encapsulation Type
MA5600 Encapsulation Type
IPoA
RFC1483 Route or IPoA
IPoA or Auto
PPPoA
PPPoA
PPPoA or Auto
22.2 Configuration Example of the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE Service This example shows how to configure the SHDSL service so that the user can access the Internet through the SHDSL lines in the IPoE/PPPoE mode.
Prerequisite l
The SHEB board is in the normal state.
l
The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l
The MA5600 can restrict the user bandwidth through a traffic profile or an SHDSL line profile. When both the traffic profile and the SHDSL line profile work, the smaller one of the bandwidths restricted by the two profiles is used as the user bandwidth.
l
In this example, the traffic is taken as an example. Make sure that the user bandwidth configured in the line profile is larger than that configured in the traffic profile.
Context
Networking Figure 22-1 shows a sample network for configuring the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE service.
22-4
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Figure 22-1 Sample network for configuring the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE service 10.1.1.1/24 Internet Router S
CON ETH MON
H E B
GE0/7/0
SCU
IPoE/PPPoE access
MA5600
Modem
PC
Data Plan Table 22-2 lists the data plan for configuring the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE service. Table 22-2 Data plan for configuring the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE service Item
Data
Remarks
Traffic profile
Index: 1 (the default profile)
Configure the access rate, priority, and priority policy in the traffic profile. When you add a service port, you can specify the traffic profile to restrict the access rate, priority, and priority policy.
l
Rate: 2 Mbit/s
l
Priority: 6
l
Priority policy: Pvc-Setting
In an ideal case, configure the rate of the traffic profile as 2048 kbit/s. The actual qualified rate of the port may be lower than 96%. Therefore, increase the rate to meet the user demands. Line profile
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Index: 2. The parameter values must be the same as those of the default profile (with the index of 1).
To activate the SHDSL port, use the parameters configured in the line profile to negotiate with the CPE. When the two parties negotiate successfully, the SHDSL port is activated and the lines connecting to the port can bear services.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Item
Data
Remarks
Alarm profile
Index: 1 (the default profile)
Configure the alarm threshold of the line parameter in the alarm profile. By binding the threshold to a port, you can monitor the conditions of the lines connecting to the port. In the default alarm profile, all the alarm thresholds are set as 0, which indicates that line monitoring is disabled.
SHEB board
SHDSL port: 0/5/0
-
SHDSL mode: ATM
SCU board
VLAN ID: 10
Keep it consistent with the upper layer device.
Upstream port: 0/7/0
-
Gateway IP address: 10.1.1.1/24
It is the IP address of the upper layer router.
Configuration Flowchart Figure 22-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE service.
22-6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Figure 22-2 Flowchart for configuring the SHDSL IPoE/PPPoE service Start
Add and confirm a board
No Is there an appropriate traffic profile? Yes
Add a traffic profile
Add a VLAN and add port(s) to it
Is the port activated?
No
Yes Deactivate the SHDSL port
Is there an appropriate line profile? Yes
Add a line profile
Is there an appropriate alarm profile? Yes
Add an alarm profile
Bind the alarn profile
Bind the line profile and activate the SHDSL port
Set the service type
Save the data
End
Procedure Step 1 Add an SHEB board and confirm it. Then insert the SHEB board into the MA5600 shelf. The system automatically finds and confirms the SHEB board. If the SHEB board is in the auto-find state, confirm the board through the command line. huawei(config)#board confirm 0/5
Step 2 Check whether there is an appropriate traffic profile. If there is no appropriate traffic profile, add one. huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0 { |to-index }: Command:
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-7
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
display traffic table from-index 0 Traffic parameters for IP service: -------------------------------------------------------------------TID CAR(kbps) Priority Pri-Policy -------------------------------------------------------------------0 960 6 tag-pri 1 2496 6 tag-pri 2 512 0 tag-pri 3 576 2 tag-pri 4 64 4 tag-pri 5 2048 0 tag-pri 6 -0 tag-pri ----------------------------------------------------------------Traffic parameters for ATM service: ------------------------------------------------------------------TID Service Traf CLP01PCR CLP0PCR CLP01SCR CLP0SCR MBS CDVT PPD/EPD/SHAPE Type Type kbps kbps kbps kbps cells 1/10us -------------------------------------------------------------------0 cbr 2 1000 -----off/off/-1 cbr 2 2500 -----off/off/-2 ubr 2 512 -----on /on /-3 nrt-vbr 5 1200 -600 -250 -on /on /-4 rt-vbr 15 128 --64 300 10000000 on /on /off 5 ubr 2 2048 -----on /on /-------------------------------------------------------------------6 ubr 1 ------off/off/-Total Num : 7 Traffic type definition: 1:NoTrafficDescriptor 2:NoClpNoScr 3:ClpNoTaggingNoScr 4:ClpTaggingNoScr 5:NoClpScr 6:ClpNoTaggingScr 7:ClpTaggingScr 8:ClpNoTaggingMcr 9:ClpTransparentNoScr 10:ClpTransparentScr 11:NoClpTaggingNoScr 12:NoClpNoScrCdvt 13:NoClpScrCdvt 14:ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt 15:ClpTaggingScrCdvt --------------------------------------------------------------------
The query result shows that traffic profile 1 is available. Step 3 Create a VLAN and add a service port and an upstream port to it. 1.
Create VLAN 10, and add upstream port 0/7/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 10 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
2.
Add a service port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 shdsl mode atm 0/5/0 vpi 0 vci 35 multiserv ice user-encap pppoe rx-cttr 1 tx-cttr 1 NOTE
If you need to enable services in bathes in actual configuration, refer to "9.12 Adding Service Ports in Batches" to add service ports in batches.
Step 4 Make sure that the port is deactivated. 1.
Run the display port state command to query the port status. If the port is already activated, deactivate it first and then use the new line profile to reactivate it.
2.
Deactivate SHDSL port 0/5/0. huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#deactivate 0
Step 5 Check whether there is an appropriate SHDSL line profile. Line profile 1 is the default line profile with the bandwidth of 2048 kbit/s. In general, use the default line profile. In this example, a new line profile is created. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile add 2 During inputting,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time will be ignored Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:y
22-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Please input profile name:prof_name_test > pathmode(1--ATM;2--PTM)[1]:1 > G.SHDSL interface mode of line (1--two wire;2--four wire;3--six wire;4--eight wire;)[1]: > Do you use the default data to create a line profile?(y/n)[y]:n > G.SHDSL minimum line rate(Value must be multiple of 64, except 2312kbps, 192~5696,2312 kbps)[2048]: 2048 > G.SHDSL maximum line rate (Value must be multiple of 64, except 2312kbps, 192~5696,2312 kbps)[2048]: 2048 > Power Spectral Density mode (1--symmetric;2--asymmetric)[1]: > Transmission mode (1--G.991.2 Annex A;2--G.991.2 Annex B;3--support Annex A&B) [3]: 1 > Remote enable (1--enabled;2--disabled)[1]: > Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled)[1]: > Do you config the target SNR margin?(y/n)[n]:y > Downstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 3 > Downstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 2 > Upstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 9 > Upstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 8 > Target SNR margin bitmap(0x01~0x0f,bit0--down current,bit1-down worst, bit2--up current,bit3--up worst)[1]: Add profile 2 successfully
Step 6 Check whether there is an appropriate alarm profile. If there is no appropriate alarm profile, add one. In this example, the default alarm profile 1 is used. 1.
An SHDSL alarm profile takes effect only when it is bound with a port.
2.
By default, each port is bound with alarm profile 1 in system initialization. If the port has been bound with another alarm profile, rebind it with alarm profile 1.
huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#alarm-config 0 1
Step 7 Activate SHDSL port 0/5/0. Use profile 3 to activate SHDSL port 0. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#activate 0 3
Step 8 Query the port status. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#display port state 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------Port Running Control Line Alarm Running Config Bind ID Status Status Profile Profile Operation Operation Status -------------------------------------------------------------------0 Activated Active 3 1 Normal None Normal --------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 9 Save the data. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration, the user can access the Internet in the IPoE/PPPoE mode.
22.3 Configuration Example of the SHDSL IPoA Service This example shows how to configure the SHDSL IPoA service so that the user can access the Internet through the SHDSL lines in the IPoA mode.
Prerequisite l
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
The SHEB board is in the normal state. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-9
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service l
The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l
With the development of the IP network, IP access becomes the mainstream access mode in DSLAMs. To be compatible with the user side modems that adopt the ATM as the access mode, the MA5600 supports the conversion between the IPoA protocol and the PPPoA protocol and that between the IPoE and the PPPoE protocol, and enables IPoA/PPPoA users to transparently access the upper layer IP network.
l
Currently, the application service of IPoA/PPPoA users is the common Internet service.
l
The MA5600 can restrict the user bandwidth through a traffic profile or an SHDSL line profile. When both the traffic profile and the SHDSL line profile work, the smaller one of the bandwidths restricted by the two profiles is used as the user bandwidth.
l
In this example, the traffic is taken as an example. Make sure that the user bandwidth configured in the line profile is larger than that configured in the traffic profile.
Context
Networking Figure 22-3 shows a sample network for configuring the SHDSL IPoA service. Figure 22-3 Sample network for configuring the SHDSL IPoA service 10.1.1.1/24 Internet Router S
CON ETH MON
H E B
IPoA access
GE0/7/0
SCU
MA5600
Modem
PC
Data Plan Table 22-3 shows the data plan for configuring the SHDSL IPoA service.
22-10
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Table 22-3 Data plan for configuring the SHDSL IPoA service Item
Data
Remarks
Traffic profile
Index: 1 (the default profile)
Configure the access rate, priority, and priority policy in the traffic profile. When you add a service port, you can specify the traffic profile to restrict the access rate, priority, and priority policy.
l
Rate: 2 Mbit/s
l
Priority: 6
l
Priority policy: Pvc-Setting
In an ideal case, configure the rate of the traffic profile as 2048 kbit/s. The actual qualified rate of the port may be lower than 96%. Therefore, increase the rate to meet the user demands. Line profile
Index: 2. The parameter values must be the same as those of the default profile (with the index of 1).
To activate the SHDSL port, use the parameters configured in the line profile to negotiate with the CPE. When the two parties negotiate successfully, the SHDSL port is activated and the lines connecting to the port can bear services.
Alarm profile
Index: 1 (the default profile)
Configure the alarm threshold of the line parameter in the alarm profile. By binding the threshold to a port, you can monitor the conditions of the lines connecting to the port. In the default alarm profile, all the alarm thresholds are set as 0, which indicates that line monitoring is disabled.
SHEB board
SHDSL port: 0/5/0
-
SHDSL mode: ATM
SCU board
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
VLAN ID: 10
Keep it consistent with the upper layer device.
Upstream port: 0/7/0
-
Gateway IP address: 10.1.1.1/24
It is the IP address of the upper layer router.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-11
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Configuration Flowchart Figure 22-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the SHDSL IPoA service. Figure 22-4 Flowchart for configuring the SHDSL IPoA service Start
Add and confirm a board
Is there an appropriate traffic profile Yes
No Add a traffic profile
Create a VLAN and add port(s) to it No Is the port activated? Yes Deactivate the SHDSL port
Is there an appropriate line profile
No
Add a line profile
Yes Is there an appropriate alarm profile Yes
No
Add an alarm profile
Bind the alarm profile Bind the line profile and activate the SHDSL port Configure the MAC address pool
Enable the IPoA protocol conversion
Configure the IPoA default gateway
Set the encapsulation mode
Save the data
End
Procedure Step 1 Add an SHEB board and confirm it. Then insert the SHEB board into the MA5600 shelf. The system automatically finds and confirms the SHEB board. If the SHEB board is in the auto-find state, confirm the board through the command line. huawei(config)#board confirm 0/5
Step 2 Check whether there is an appropriate traffic profile. If there is no appropriate traffic profile, add one. huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0 { |to-index }: Command: display traffic table from-index 0 Traffic parameters for IP service: -------------------------------------------------------------------TID CAR(kbps) Priority Pri-Policy
22-12
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
-------------------------------------------------------------------0 960 6 tag-pri 1 2496 6 tag-pri 2 512 0 tag-pri 3 576 2 tag-pri 4 64 4 tag-pri 5 2048 0 tag-pri 6 -0 tag-pri ----------------------------------------------------------------Traffic parameters for ATM service: ------------------------------------------------------------------TID Service Traf CLP01PCR CLP0PCR CLP01SCR CLP0SCR MBS CDVT PPD/EPD/SHAPE Type Type kbps kbps kbps kbps cells 1/10us -------------------------------------------------------------------0 cbr 2 1000 -----off/off/-1 cbr 2 2500 -----off/off/-2 ubr 2 512 -----on /on /-3 nrt-vbr 5 1200 -600 -250 -on /on /-4 rt-vbr 15 128 --64 300 10000000 on /on /off 5 ubr 2 2048 -----on /on /-------------------------------------------------------------------6 ubr 1 ------off/off/-Total Num : 7 Traffic type definition: 1:NoTrafficDescriptor 2:NoClpNoScr 3:ClpNoTaggingNoScr 4:ClpTaggingNoScr 5:NoClpScr 6:ClpNoTaggingScr 7:ClpTaggingScr 8:ClpNoTaggingMcr 9:ClpTransparentNoScr 10:ClpTransparentScr 11:NoClpTaggingNoScr 12:NoClpNoScrCdvt 13:NoClpScrCdvt 14:ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt 15:ClpTaggingScrCdvt --------------------------------------------------------------------
The query result shows that traffic profile 1 is available. Step 3 Create a VLAN and add a service port and an upstream port to it. 1.
Create VLAN 10, and add upstream port 0/7/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 10 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
2.
Add a service port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 shdsl mode atm 0/5/0 vpi 0 vci 35 multiserv ice user-encap pppoe rx-cttr 1 tx-cttr 1 NOTE
If you need to enable services in bathes in actual configuration, refer to "9.12 Adding Service Ports in Batches" to add service ports in batches.
Step 4 Make sure that the port is deactivated. 1.
Run the display port state command to query the port status. If the port is already activated, deactivate it first and then use the new line profile to reactivate it.
2.
Deactivate SHDSL port 0/5/0. huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#deactivate 0
Step 5 Check whether there is an appropriate SHDSL line profile. If there is no appropriate profile, add one. Line profile 1 is the default line profile with the bandwidth of 2048 kbit/s. In general, use the default line profile. In this example, a new line profile is created. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile add 2 During inputting,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time will be ignored Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:y Please input profile name:prof_name_test > pathmode(1--ATM;2--PTM)[1]:1 > G.SHDSL interface mode of line (1--two wire;2--four wire;3--six wire;4--eight wire;)[1]:
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-13
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
> Do you use the default data to create a line profile?(y/n)[y]:n > G.SHDSL minimum line rate(Value must be multiple of 64, except 2312kbps,192~5696 £¬2312 kbps)[2048]: 2048 > G.SHDSL maximum line rate (Value must be multiple of 64, except 2312kbps,192~5696 £¬2312 kbps)[2048]: 2048 > Power Spectral Density mode (1--symmetric;2--asymmetric)[1]: > Transmission mode (1--G.991.2 Annex A;2--G.991.2 Annex B;3--support Annex A&B) [3]: 1 > Remote enable (1--enabled;2--disabled)[1]: > Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled)[1]: > Do you config the target SNR margin?(y/n)[n]:y > Downstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 3 > Downstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 2 > Upstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 9 > Upstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 8 > Target SNR margin bitmap(0x01~0x0f,bit0--down current,bit1-down worst, bit2--up current,bit3--up worst)[1]: Add profile 2 successfully
Step 6 Check whether there is an appropriate alarm profile. If there is no appropriate alarm profile, add one. In this example, the default alarm profile 1 is used. An SHDSL alarm profile takes effect only when it is bound with a port. By default, each port is bound with alarm profile 1 in system initialization. If the port has been bound with another alarm profile, rebind it with alarm profile 1. huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#alarm-config 0 1
Step 7 Activate SHDSL port 0/5/0. Use profile 3 to activate port 0. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#activate 0 3
Step 8 Configure MAC address pool 0, which begins with 0000-0000-0001. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#mac-pool 0 0000-0000-0001
Step 9 Enable the IPoA protocol conversion. huawei(config)#ipoa enable
Step 10 Configure the default IPoA gateway. huawei(config)#ipoa default gateway 10.1.1.1
Step 11 Set the encapsulation mode of SHDSL port 0/5/0 as LLC-IPoA. huawei(config)#encapsulation 0/5/0 vpi 0 vci 35 type ipoa llc srcIP 10.1.1.20
In the case of IPoA access, select the dynamic IP address (without specifying the source IP address) or the static IP address (specifying the source IP address) for the packets. To switch from a dynamic address to a static address in the IPoA mode, adopt the LLC-Bridge encapsulation first, and then adopt the IPoA static address encapsulation. Step 12 Query the port status. huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#display port state 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------Port Running Control Line Alarm Running Config Bind ID Status Status Profile Profile Operation Operation Status -------------------------------------------------------------------0 Activated Active 3 1 Normal None Normal --------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 13 Save the data. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End 22-14
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Result After the configuration, the user can access the Internet in the IPoA mode.
22.4 Configuration Example of the SHDSL PPPoA Service This example shows how to configure the SHDSL PPPoA service so that the user can access the Internet through the SHDSL lines in the PPPoA mode.
Prerequisite l
The SHEB board is in the normal state.
l
The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l
With the development of the IP network, IP access becomes the mainstream access mode in DSLAMs. To be compatible with the user side modems that adopt the ATM as the access mode, the MA5600 supports the conversion between the IPoA protocol and the PPPoA protocol and that between the IPoE and the PPPoE protocol, and enables IPoA/PPPoA users to transparently access the upper layer IP network.
l
Currently, the application service of IPoA/PPPoA users is the common Internet service.
l
The MA5600 can restrict the user bandwidth through a traffic profile or an SHDSL line profile. When both the traffic profile and the SHDSL line profile work, the smaller one of the bandwidths restricted by the two profiles is used as the user bandwidth.
l
In this example, the traffic is taken as an example. Make sure that the user bandwidth configured in the line profile is larger than that configured in the traffic profile.
Context
Networking Figure 22-5 shows a sample network for configuring the SHDSL PPPoA service.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-15
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Figure 22-5 Sample network for configuring the SHDSL PPPoA service 10.1.1.1/24 Internet Router S
CON ETH MON
H E B
GE0/7/0
SCU
PPPoA access
MA5600
Modem
PC
Data Plan Table 22-4 shows the data plan for configuring the SHDSL PPPoA service. Table 22-4 Data plan for configuring the SHDSL PPPoA service Item
Data
Remarks
Traffic profile
Index: 1 (the default profile)
Configure the access rate, priority, and priority policy in the traffic profile. When you add a service port, you can specify the traffic profile to restrict the access rate, priority, and priority policy.
l
Rate: 2 Mbit/s
l
Priority: 6
l
Priority policy: Pvc-Setting
In an ideal case, configure the rate of the traffic profile as 2048 kbit/s. The actual qualified rate of the port may be lower than 96%. Therefore, increase the rate to meet the user demands. Line profile
22-16
Index: 2. The parameter values must be the same as those of the default profile (with the index of 1).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
To activate the SHDSL port, use the parameters configured in the line profile to negotiate with the CPE. When the two parties negotiate successfully, the SHDSL port is activated and the lines connecting to the port can bear services.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Item
Data
Remarks
Alarm profile
Index: 1 (the default profile)
Configure the alarm threshold of the line parameter in the alarm profile. By binding the threshold to a port, you can monitor the conditions of the lines connecting to the port. In the default alarm profile, all the alarm thresholds are set as 0, which indicates that line monitoring is disabled.
SHEB board
SHDSL port: 0/5/0
-
SHDSL mode: ATM
SCU board
VLAN ID: 10
Keep it consistent with the upper layer device.
Upstream port: 0/7/0
-
Gateway IP address: 10.1.1.1/24
It is the IP address of the upper layer router.
Configuration Flowchart Figure 22-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the SHDSL PPPoA service.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-17
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Figure 22-6 Flowchart for configuring the SHDSL PPPoA service Start
Add and confirm a board
Is there an appropriate traffic profile Yes
No Add a traffic profile
Create a VLAN and add port(s) to it No Is the port activated? Yes Deactivate the SHDSL port
Is there an appropriate line profile
No
Add a line profile
Yes Is there an appropriate alarm profile
No
Yes
Add an alarm profile
Bind the alarm profile Bind the line profile and activate the SHDSL port Configure the MAC address pool Enable the PPPoA protocol conversion
Set the encapsulation mode
Save the data
End
22-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Procedure Step 1 Add an SHEB board and confirm it. Then insert the SHEB board into the MA5600 shelf. The system automatically finds and confirms the SHEB board. If the SHEB board is in the auto-find state, confirm the board through the command line. huawei(config)#board confirm 0/5
Step 2 Check whether there is an appropriate traffic profile. If there is no appropriate traffic profile, add one. huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0 { |to-index }: Command: display traffic table from-index 0 Traffic parameters for IP service: -------------------------------------------------------------------TID CAR(kbps) Priority Pri-Policy -------------------------------------------------------------------0 960 6 tag-pri 1 2496 6 tag-pri 2 512 0 tag-pri 3 576 2 tag-pri 4 64 4 tag-pri 5 2048 0 tag-pri 6 -0 tag-pri ----------------------------------------------------------------Traffic parameters for ATM service: ------------------------------------------------------------------TID Service Traf CLP01PCR CLP0PCR CLP01SCR CLP0SCR MBS CDVT PPD/EPD/SHAPE Type Type kbps kbps kbps kbps cells 1/10us -------------------------------------------------------------------0 cbr 2 1000 -----off/off/-1 cbr 2 2500 -----off/off/-2 ubr 2 512 -----on /on /-3 nrt-vbr 5 1200 -600 -250 -on /on /-4 rt-vbr 15 128 --64 300 10000000 on /on /off 5 ubr 2 2048 -----on /on /-------------------------------------------------------------------6 ubr 1 ------off/off/-Total Num : 7 Traffic type definition: 1:NoTrafficDescriptor 2:NoClpNoScr 3:ClpNoTaggingNoScr 4:ClpTaggingNoScr 5:NoClpScr 6:ClpNoTaggingScr 7:ClpTaggingScr 8:ClpNoTaggingMcr 9:ClpTransparentNoScr 10:ClpTransparentScr 11:NoClpTaggingNoScr 12:NoClpNoScrCdvt 13:NoClpScrCdvt 14:ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt 15:ClpTaggingScrCdvt --------------------------------------------------------------------
The query result shows that traffic profile 1 is available. Step 3 Create a VLAN and add a service port and an upstream port to it. 1.
Create VLAN 10, and add upstream port 0/7/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 10 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
2.
Add a service port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 shdsl mode atm 0/5/0 vpi 0 vci 35 multiserv ice user-encap pppoe rx-cttr 1 tx-cttr 1 NOTE
If you need to enable services in bathes in actual configuration, refer to "9.12 Adding Service Ports in Batches" to add service ports in batches.
Step 4 Make sure that the port is deactivated. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-19
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1.
Run the display port state command to query the port status. If the port is already activated, deactivate it first and then use the new line profile to reactivate it.
2.
Deactivate SHDSL port 0/5/0. huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#deactivate 0
Step 5 Query whether there is an appropriate line profile. 1.
If there is no appropriate line profile, add one.
2.
Line profile 1 is the default line profile with the bandwidth of 2048 kbit/s. In general, use the default line profile. In this example, a new line profile is created. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile add 2 During inputting,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time will be ignored Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:y Please input profile name:prof_name_test > pathmode(1--ATM;2--PTM)[1]:1 > G.SHDSL interface mode of line (1--two wire;2--four wire;3--six wire;4-eight wire;)[1]: > Do you use the default data to create a line profile?(y/n)[y]:n > G.SHDSL minimum line rate(Value must be multiple of 64, except 2312kbps, 192~5696,2312 kbps)[2048]: 2048 > G.SHDSL maximum line rate (Value must be multiple of 64, except 2312kbps, 192~5696,2312 kbps)[2048]: 2048 > Power Spectral Density mode (1--symmetric;2--asymmetric)[1]: > Transmission mode (1--G.991.2 Annex A;2--G.991.2 Annex B;3--support Annex A&B)[3]: 1 > Remote enable (1--enabled;2--disabled)[1]: > Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled)[1]: > Do you config the target SNR margin?(y/n)[n]:y > Downstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 3 > Downstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 2 > Upstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 9 > Upstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 8 > Target SNR margin bitmap(0x01~0x0f,bit0--down current,bit1-down worst, bit2--up current,bit3--up worst)[1]: Add profile 2 successfully
Step 6 Check whether there is an appropriate alarm profile. 1.
If there is no appropriate alarm profile, add one. In this example, the default alarm profile 1 is used.
2.
An SHDSL alarm profile takes effect only when it is bound with a port.
3.
By default, each port is bound with alarm profile 1 in system initialization. If the port has been bound with another alarm profile, rebind it with alarm profile 1. huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#alarm-config 0 1
Step 7 Bind SHDSL port 0/5/0 by using the default alarm profile. Alarm profile 1 is the default alarm. In general, use the default alarm profile. You can also configure other alarm profiles on demands. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#alarm-config 0 1
Step 8 Activate SHDSL port 0/5/0. Use alarm profile 3 to activate SHDSL port 0. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#activate 0 3
Step 9 Configure the MAC address pool. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#mac-pool 0 1000-0000-0001
22-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Step 10 Enable the PPPoA protocol conversion. huawei(config)#pppoa enable
Step 11 Set the encapsulation type of SHDSL port 0/5/0 as LLC-PPPoA. huawei(config)#encapsulation 0/5/0 vpi 0 vci 35 type pppoa llc
Step 12 Query the port status. huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#display port state 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------Port Running Control Line Alarm Running Config Bind ID Status Status Profile Profile Operation Operation Status -------------------------------------------------------------------0 Activated Active 3 1 Normal None Normal --------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 13 Save the data. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration, you can access the Internet in the PPPoA mode.
22.5 Adding an SHDSL Line Profile This operation enables you to add an SHDSL line profile. The SHDSL line profile includes a majority of parameters of the ports. After the line profile is configured, it can be used to activate the ports.
Context Each SHDSL line of the MA5600 is associated with a specific channel mode, and is bound with a line profile. A configuration table can hold up to 103 line profiles. The H569SHEB board supports the high rate SHDSL.bis feature. The SHDSL port can be activated in the ATM/PTM mode, thus realizing ATM/PTM switching in the manner of profile configuration. Two default profiles, profile 1 and profile 100, cannot be deleted but can be modified. Five default SHDSL line profiles, profiles 1, 100, 101, 102, and 103, cannot be deleted but can be modified.
Configuration Flowchart Figure 22-7 shows the flowchart for adding an SHDSL line profile.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-21
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Figure 22-7 Flowchart for adding an SHDSL line profile Start
Set the index of the line profile Set the transmission mode Whethert to set the name of the SHDSL line profile?
No
Set the remote enable function
Yes Set the name of the line profile
Select the SHDSL encapsulation mode
Set the interface mode of the SHDSL line
Set the probe enable function
No Whether to set the target SNR margin Yes Set the downstream current target SNR margin
Yes
Whether to use the default parameters to create a new profile?
Set the downstream worst case target SNR margin
No Set the SHDSL min. line rate
Set the upstream current target SNR margin
Set the SHDSL max. line rate
Set the upstream worst case target SNR margin
Set the power spectral density mode
Set the target SNR margin bitmap
End
Procedure Run the shdsl line-profile add command to add an SHDSL line profile. ----End
22-22
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Example To add an SHDSL line profile with the index of 3, do as follows: huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile add 3 During inputting,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time will be ignored Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:y Please input profile name:prof_name_test > pathmode(1--ATM;2--PTM)[1]:1 > G.SHDSL interface mode of line (1--two wire;2--four wire;3--six wire;4--eight wire;)[1]: > Do you use the default data to create a line profile?(y/n)[y]:n > G.SHDSL minimum line rate(Value must be multiple of 64, except 2312kbps, 192~5696,2312 kbps)[2048]: 2048 > G.SHDSL maximum line rate (Value must be multiple of 64, except 2312kbps, 192~5696,2312 kbps)[2048]: 2048 > Power Spectral Density mode (1--symmetric;2--asymmetric)[1]: > Transmission mode (1--G.991.2 Annex A;2--G.991.2 Annex B;3--support Annex A&B) [3]: 1 > Remote enable (1--enabled;2--disabled)[1]: > Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled)[1]: > Do you config the target SNR margin?(y/n)[n]:y > Downstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 3 > Downstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 2 > Upstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 9 > Upstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]: 8 > Target SNR margin bitmap(0x01~0x0f,bit0--down current,bit1-down worst, bit2--up current,bit3--up worst)[1]: Add profile 2 successfully
Parameter Description Table 22-5 lists the parameters of an SHDSL line profile. Table 22-5 Parameters of an SHDSL line profile
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Parameter
Description
Profile index
You can enter a profile index or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile index.
pathmode
Selects line encapsulation mode. ATM and PTM are supported.
G.SHDSL interface mode of line
Selects interface mode of line.
G.SHDSL minimum line rate
Specifies the minimum line rate.
G.SHDSL maximum line rate
In the process of setting up an SHDSL connection, if the calculated downstream/upstream rate of an SHDSL line is higher than the set maximum value, the system will limit the rate to the set value while increasing the SNR margin. If the calculated downstream/upstream rate is lower than the set maximum rate, the system will set up the SHDSL connection at the calculated rate, while maintaining the target SNR margin.
Power spectral density mode
There are two types of PSD: symmetrical and asymmetrical.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-23
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Parameter
Description
Transmission mode
There are three types of SHDSL transmission modes: l
ITU-T G.991.2 Annex A
l
ITU-T G.991.2 Annex B
l
Annex A&B
Remote enable
It specifies whether to manage the STU-R.
Probe enable
l
If this function is enabled, the system implements the line probe function to search the best line rate.
l
If this function is disabled, the system skips the line rate adaptation process to shorten the time to set up the G.SHDSL line.
l
By default, the probe function is disabled.
l
The target SNR margin is the preserved SNR margin to ensure normal communication in the case of line SNR deterioration. The larger the target SNR margin, the less chances of occurrence of the line error, and the safer the system can be. Meanwhile, the larger the target SNR margin, the lower the maximum data transmission rate.
l
Therefore, the target SNR margin must be adjusted based on the actual line conditions.
Downstream/Upstream current target SNR margin
Downstream/Upstream worst case target SNR margin
It specifies the downstream/upstream SNR threshold in the worst case.
Target SNR margin bitmap (0x01~0x0f,bit0--down current,bit1-down worst, bit2--up current,bit3--up worst)
Range: 0x01-0x0F. l
bit0=1: makes the settings of current downstream target SNR margin take effect.
l
bit1=1: makes the settings of worst downstream target SNR margin take effect.
l
bit2=1: makes the settings of current upstream target SNR margin take effect.
l
bit3=1: makes the settings of worst upstream target SNR margin take effect.
By default, the value is 0x01. That is, by default, the settings of current downstream target SNR margin take effect.
22.6 Adding an SHDSL Alarm Profile This operation enables you to add an SHDSL alarm profile. The SHDSL alarm profile is used to set a group of alarm thresholds for measuring and monitoring the performances of an active SHDSL line. When a statistic reaches the threshold, the MA5600 informs the device of the event, and sends alarms to the NMS.
22-24
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Context There are two default alarm profiles, profile 1 and profile 100. The default alarm profile cannot be deleted.
Configuration Flowchart Figure 22-8 shows the flowchart for adding an SHDSL alarm profile. Figure 22-8 Flowchart for adding an SHDSL alarm profile Configure SHDSL alarm profile Set alarm profile index
Use default parameter to create alarm profile?
Yes
No Set loop attenuation threshold
Set SNR margin threshold
Set errored second threshold
Set SES threshold
Set CRC abnormality threshold
Set LOSW threshold
Set UAS threshold
End
Procedure Run the shdsl alarm-profile add command to add an SHDSL alarm profile. ----End
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-25
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Example To add an SHDSL alarm profile with the index of 3, do as follows: huawei(config)#shdsl alarm-profile add 3 During inputting,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time will be ignored Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:y Please input profile name:profile-3 > Do you use the default data to create an alarm profile?(y/n)[y]:n > Loop attenuation threshold (0~127 db)[0]: > SNR margin threshold (0~10 db)[0]: > ES threshold (0~900 s)[0]: > SES threshold (0~900 s)[0]: > CRC anomaly threshold (0~58981500)[0]: > LOSWS threshold (0~900 s)[0]: > UAS threshold (0~900 s)[0]: Add profile 3 successfully
Parameter Description Table 22-6 lists the parameters of an SHDSL alarm profile. Table 22-6 Parameters of an SHDSL alarm profile
22-26
Parameter
Description
Profile index
You can enter a profile number or press Enter to enable the system to designate a number for it. The profile index is unique, and is in the range of 2 to 99.
Loop attenuation threshold
The system collects performance data generated within any 15minute period. If the loop attenuation exceeds the threshold, the system will report an alarm.
SNR margin threshold
The system collects SNR related performance data generated within any 15-minute period. If the SNR margin exceeds the threshold, the system will report an alarm.
ES threshold
The system collects ES related performance data generated within any 15-minute period. If the accumulated ES exceeds the threshold, the system will report an alarm.
SES threshold
The system collects SES related performance data generated within any 15-minute period. If the accumulative SES exceeds the threshold, the system will report an alarm.
CRC anomalies number threshold
The system collects CRC related performance data generated within any 15-minute period. If the accumulative CRC exceeds the threshold, the system will report an alarm.
LOSWS threshold
The system collects LOSW related performance data generated within any 15-minute period. If the LOSW exceeds the threshold, the system will report an alarm.
UAS threshold
The system collects UAS related performance data generated within any 15-minute period. If the UAS exceeds the threshold, the system will report an alarm.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Related Operation Table 22-7 lists the related operations for adding an SHDSL alarm profile. Table 22-7 Related operations for adding an SHDSL alarm profile To...
Run the Command ...
Remarks
Delete an SHDSL alarm profile
shdsl alarm-profile delete
You cannot delete the default alarm profiles or a referenced alarm profile.
Query an SHDSL alarm profile
display shdsl alarmprofile
Run the command in privilege mode or SHDSL config mode.
Quickly add an SHDSL alarm profile
shdsl alarm-profile quickadd
The system adopts non-interactive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the shdsl alarm-profile quickaddcommand.
Modify an SHDSL line profile
shdsl line-profile modify
The line profile is valid after being modified.
Quickly modify an SHDSL line profile
shdsl line-profile quickmodify
The command serves as a complement to the shdsl lineprofile quickmodify command.
22.7 Binding an SHDSL Alarm Profile This operation enables you to bind an SHDSL alarm profile to SHDSL ports to validate the alarm profile after the SHDSL ports are activated.
Context Pay attention to the following points: l
An SHDSL alarm profile can take effect only when it is bound to a port and the port is activated.
l
You can bind an SHDSL alarm profile to the deactivated port only.
l
By default, the system uses the alarm profile bound with the port last time, or alarm profile 1 if the port is to be bound for the first time.
Procedure Step 1 Run the alarm-config command to bind an SHDSL alarm profile with a port. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query whether the ports has been bound with the alarm profile. ----End Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-27
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Example To bind alarm profile 3 to port 1 of the SHDSL board in slot 0/5, do as follows: huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#alarm-config 1 3
Run the display port state command and you can find the ports has been bound with the alarm profile. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#display port state 1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Running Control Line Alarm Running Config Bind ID Status Status Profile Profile Operation Operation Status --------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Deactivated Deactive 1 3 Normal None Normal ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
22.8 Configuring the SHDSL Multi-Pair Binding This operation enables you to configure the single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) multi-pair binding. The purpose of configuring the SHDSL multi-pair binding is to improve the line rate.
Prerequisite The port for configuring the SHDSL multi-pair binding must be deactivated and cannot be configured with any service port.
Context Each SHDSL line of the MA5600 is associated with a specific channel mode, and is bound with a line profile. A configuration table of SHDSL line profiles contains up to 103 line profiles. Profile 1 is for activating the two-wire SHDSL port. Profile 100 is for activating the four-wire SHDSL port. Profile 101 is for activating the six-wire SHDSL port. Profile 102 is for activating the eight-wire SHDSL port. In ATM port encapsulation mode, the system supports the binding of two-pair, three-pair, and four-pair. The rates are respectively twice, three times and four times of the single-pair rate. l
The SHEB board divides the 32 ports into eight groups in turn. Each group contains four ports. The ports for the multi-pair binding must belong to the same group.
l
When configuring the SHDSL multi-pair binding, set the binding type as M-Pair. The bound ports must be activated by a same profile simultaneously. Only the main port can be configured. The configuration here refers to the operation of activating and deactivating a port, configuring power backoff, and performing a loopback and canceling a loopback on a port.
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface shl command to enter the SHDSL mode. Step 2 Run the port bind command to configure the SHDSL multi-pair binding. Step 3 Run the service-port command to configure a service port. ----End 22-28
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Example To configure ports 0, 1 and 2 of the SHDSL board in slot 0/5 as three-pair, and to add the main port to a service port, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#port bind m-pair 0-2 The M-Pair binding of port 0-2 is successful huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 shdsl mode atm 0/5/0 vpi 0 vci 35 multi-serv ice user-encap pppoe rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
Related Operation Table 22-8 lists the related operation for configuring the SHDSL multi-pair binding. Table 22-8 Related operation for configuring the SHDSL multi-pair binding To...
Run the Command...
Add an SHDSL line profile
shdsl line-profile add
Activate an SHDSL port
activate
Deactivate an SHDSL port
deactivate
22.9 Configuring the SHDSL EFM Multi-port Binding This operation enables you to configure the SHDSL multi-port binding. The purpose of configuring the SHDSL EFM multiple-port binding is to improve the line rate.
Prerequisite The port for configuring the SHDSL EFM multi-port binding must be deactivated and cannot be configured with any service port.
Context Each SHDSL line of the MA5600 is associated with a specific channel mode, and is bound with a line profile. A configuration table of SHDSL line profiles contains up to 103 line profiles. Profile 103 is used to activate the port that is for EFM multi-port binding. In the PTM port encapsulation mode, the system supports the binding of up to four ports. The rate is the summation of the ports. l
The SHEB board divides the 32 ports into eight groups in turn. Each group contains four ports. The ports for the EFM multi-port binding must belong to the same group.
l
When you configure the SHDSL EFM multi-port binding, set the binding type as EFM. The bound ports are independent from each other. You need to configure the parameters of each port respectively. The configuration here refers to the operation of activating and deactivating a port, configuring power backoff, and performing a loopback and canceling a loopback on a port.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-29
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface shl command to enter the SHDSL mode. Step 2 Run the port bind command to configure the SHDSL EFM multi-port binding. Step 3 Run the service-port command to configure a service port. ----End
Example To configure ports 0, 1 and 2 of the SHDSL board in slot 0/5 as EFM multi-port binding, and to add service ports to each port respectively, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface shl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#port bind efm 0-2 The EFM bonding of port 0-2 is successful huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 shdsl mode ptm 0/5/0 multi-serv ice user-encap pppoe rx-cttr 1 tx-cttr 1 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 shdsl mode ptm 0/5/1 multi-serv ice user-encap pppoe rx-cttr 1 tx-cttr 1 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 shdsl mode ptm 0/5/2 multi-serv ice user-encap pppoe rx-cttr 1 tx-cttr 1
Related Operation Table 22-9 lists the related operation for configuring the SHDSL EFM multi-port binding. Table 22-9 Related operation for configuring the SHDSL EFM multi-port binding To...
Run the Command...
Add an SHDSL line profile
shdsl line-profile add
Activate an SHDSL port
activate
Deactivate an SHDSL port
deactivate
22.10 Activating an SHDSL Port This operation enables you to activate an SHDSL port for service transmission.
Prerequisite There is a suitable SHDSL line profile.
Context l
22-30
Activating (or activation) refers to the training between the STU-C and the STU-R. During the training process, the system will check the line distance and line state based on settings included in the line profile, such as upstream/downstream line rate and SNR margin. The STU-C negotiates with the STU-R to check whether the devices can work well under the existing conditions. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
l
If the training succeeds, the STU-C can communicate with the STU-R. At the moment, the port works in activated state, and is ready for service delivery.
l
When the STU-R is online, the activation process ends after the completion of the training. When the STU-R gets offline, the communication is terminated, and the ATU-C is in the listening state. Once the STU-R gets online, the training process begins automatically. When the training succeeds, the port is activated.
l
Before transmitting service traffic, an SHDSL port must be activated.
l
If no profile index is entered during the activation operation, the system uses the profile bound with the port last time to activate the port. If a port is to be activated for the first time, the system uses the default line profile, namely profile 1.
l
If you intend to use new parameters for an activated port, you must deactivate the port first, and then activate it using the profile with the desired parameters.
Procedure Step 1 Run the activate command to activate an SHDSL port. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the information of the SHDSL port. ----End
Example To activate the SHDSL port 0 in slot 0/5 using line profile 1, do as follows: huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#activate 0 1
Run the display port state command to query the SHDSL port information. huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#display port state 0 --------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Running Control Line Alarm Running Config Bind ID Status Status Profile Profile Operation Operation Status --------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Activated Active 1 1 Normal None Normal ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 22-10 lists the related operations for activating an SHDSL port. Table 22-10 Related operations for activating an SHDSL port To...
Run the Command...
Deactivate an SHDSL port
deactivate
Loopback an SHDSL port
loopback
22.11 Querying an SHDSL Port This operation enables you to query the SHDSL port status to check the port conditions. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-31
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Context l
An SHDSL port may be in activating, activated, deactivated or loopback state.
l
Figure 22-9 shows the inter-conversion between the states.
Figure 22-9 Inter-conversion between the SHDSL port states undo loopback
Modem training succeeds
activate
loopback
activating
Local loopback
deactivated deactivate loopback
Modem link failure or power-off deactivate
Remote loopback
activated undo loopback
Procedure Run the display port state command to query the SHDSL port state. ----End
Example To query the configuration and running status of the port 0/5/0, do as follows: huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#display port state 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Running Control Line Alarm Running Config Bind ID Status Status Profile Profile Operation Operation Status -------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Activating Active 1 1 Normal None Normal --------------------------------------------------------------------------
22.12 Configuring the Clock Mode This operation enables you to configure the clock mode.
Context The SHDSL port clock modes include: l
System clock synchronization
l
Local clock synchronization
The network synchronization reference (NSR) clock mode takes effect only when the port is reactivated. l
Activate it directly if the port is in deactivated state.
l
Deactivate it and then reactivate it if the port is in activated state.
The SHEA board supports the configuration of the board level clock mode, but does not support that of the port level clock mode. The SHEB boars supports the configuration of the port level clock mode, but does not support that of the board level clock mode. 22-32
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
22 Configuring the SHDSL Service
Procedure Step 1 For the SHEA board, configure the board level clock mode as follows: 1.
Run the set clockmode command to configure the clock mode.
2.
Run the display clockmode command to display the configured clock mode.
Step 2 For the SHEB board, configure the port level clock mode as follows: 1.
Run the shdsl line-profile quickadd command to configure the clock mode when adding a profile.
2.
Run the deactivate command to deactivate the port whose clock mode needs to be configured.
3.
Run the activate command to activate the port whose clock mode needs to be configured.
----End
Example To configure the clock mode of the SHEA board in slot 0/5 as system clock synchronization mode, do as follows: huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#set clockmode system The new clockmode will not take effect until the port is activated again. Are you sure to set clockmode? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-shl-0/5)#display clockmode Clock mode: System
To configure the clock mode of port of the SHEB board as system clock synchronization mode, do as follows: huawei(config-if-shl-)#shdsl line-profile quickadd { profile-index|line|ptm }:3 { line|ptm }:line { two-wire|four-wire|six-wire|eight-wire }:two-wire { |rate|psd|transmission|remote|probe|clockmode|snr-margin |name }:clockmode { clockmode }:system { |snr-margin|name }: Command: shdsl line-profile quickadd 3 line two-wire clockmode system Add profile 3 successfully huawei(config-if-shl-)#deactivate 0 Deactivate port 0 successfully huawei(config-if-shl-)#activate 0 3 Send the command to activate port 0 successfully
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
22-33
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Configuring the VDSL2 Service
About This Chapter This chapter describes the VDSL2 technology and how to configure the VDSL2 service on the MA5600. 23.1 Overview The section describes the service description and service specifications of VDSL2 service. 23.2 Configuration Example of the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE Service This example shows how to configure the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service so that the user can access the Internet through the VDSL2 lines in the PPPoE/IPoE mode. 23.3 Configuration Example of the VDSL2 IPoA Service This example shows how to configure the VDSL2 IPoA service so that the user can access the Internet through the VDSL2 lines in the IPoA mode. 23.4 Configuration Example of the VDSL2 PPPoA Service This example shows how to configure the VDSL2 PPPoA service so that the user can access the Internet through the VDSL2 lines in the PPPoA mode. 23.5 Adding a VDSL2 Line Profile This operation enables you to add a VDSL2 line profile so as to include the majority of parameters of all the VDSL2 ports in a line profile. 23.6 Adding a VDSL2 Channel Profile This operation enables you to add a VDSL2 channel profile. 23.7 Adding a VDSL2 Line Template This operation enables you to add a VDSL2 line template. The line profile binds the specified line profile and channel profile. Use the line profile to activate ports. 23.8 Adding a VDSL2 Line Alarm Profile This operation enables you to configure a VDSL2 line alarm profile so as to include the majority of parameters of all the VDSL2 ports in a line alarm profile. After the alarm profile is configured successfully, it can be directly used to activate the ports. 23.9 Adding a VDSL2 Channel Alarm Profile This operation enables you to add a channel alarm profile containing alarm thresholds for channel parameters. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-1
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23.10 Adding a VDSL2 Alarm Template This operation enables you to add a VDSL2 alarm template. 23.11 Binding an VDSL2 Alarm Template This operation enables you to bind a VDSL2 alarm template with a port. After the port is activated, monitor the line according to the alarm thresholds set in the ADSL2+ alarm template. 23.12 Activating a VDSL2 Port This operation enables you to activate a VDSL2 port. 23.13 Querying a VDSL2 port This operation enables you to query a VDSL2 port.
23-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
23.1 Overview The section describes the service description and service specifications of VDSL2 service.
Service Description Very High Speed DSL2 (VDSL2) adopts symmetric or asymmetric transmission mode, with the reach distance of up to 3.5 km. For details on VDSL2, refer to the chapter "VDSL2 Access" in the Feature Description.
Service Specifications l
The MA5600 provides the VDSL2 service through the VDEA board or the VDBD board.
l
An MA5600 shelf can house up to 14 VDSL2 boards. With each VDSL2 board providing 32 VDSL2 ports, a shelf supports up to 448 VDSL2 subscribers.
23.2 Configuration Example of the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE Service This example shows how to configure the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service so that the user can access the Internet through the VDSL2 lines in the PPPoE/IPoE mode.
Prerequisite l
The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l
The VDEA board works in the normal state.
l
The upper layer router of the MA5600 has assigned the corresponding VLAN to the VDSL2 subscriber.
Context The MA5600 can restrict the user bandwidth through the configured traffic profile or the configured VDSL2 line profile. If the two profiles work together, the user bandwidth is the minimum value defined in the two profiles.
Networking Figure 23-1 shows a sample network for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Figure 23-1 Sample network for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service Internet
10.1.1.1/24
V
Router
CON ETH MON
D E A
GE 0/7/0
SCU
PPPoE/IPoE access
MA5600
Modem
PC
Data Plan Table 23-1 lists the data plan for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service. Table 23-1 Data plan for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service Item
Data
Remarks
Traffic profile
Index: 7
Configure the access rate, priority, and priority policy in the traffic profile. When you add a service port, you can specify the traffic profile to restrict the access rate, priority, and priority policy.
Access rate: 3072 kbit/s Priority: 6 Priority policy: Pvc-Setting
23-4
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Item
Data
Remarks
Line profile
Index: 3
When the VDSL port is activated, the VDSL port uses the line and channel parameters configured in the line profile to negotiate with the CPE. When the two parties negotiate successfully, the VDSL2 port is activated and the lines connecting to the port can bear services.
Line profile: l
Index: 3
l
Target downstream/upstream SNR margin: 12 dB
l
Minimum downstream/ upstream SNR margin: 0.5 dB
l
Other parameters: default setting
Channel profile:
Alarm profile
l
Index: 3
l
Path mode: PTM
l
Other parameters: default setting
Alarm profile index: 1 (the default Configure the alarm threshold of profile) the line parameter in the alarm profile. By binding the threshold to a port, you can monitor the conditions of the lines connecting to the port. In the default alarm profile, all the alarm thresholds are set as 0, which indicates that line monitoring is disabled.
VDEA board
SCU board
VDSL2 port: 0/2/0
-
VLAN ID: 10
Keep it consistent with the upper layer device.
Upstream port: 0/7/0
-
Configuration Flowchart Figure 23-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Figure 23-2 Flowchart for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoE/IPoE service Start
No
Is there an appropriate traffic profile? Yes
Add a traffic profile
Create a VLAN and add a port to it
No
Is the port activated? Yes
Deactivate the VDSL2 port
Yes Is there an appropriate line profile?
No
Yes
Add a line profile
Is there an appropriate alarm profile?
No
Add an alarm profile Bind the line profile
Bind the alarm profile
Activate the VDSL2 port
Save the data
End
Procedure Step 1 Check whether there is an appropriate traffic profile. If there is no appropriate traffic profile, add one. huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0 { |to-index }: Command: display traffic table from-index 0 Traffic parameters for IP service: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------TID CAR(kbps) Priority Pri-Policy -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
23-6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
0 1024 6 tag-pri 1 2496 6 tag-pri 2 512 0 tag-pri 3 576 2 tag-pri 4 64 4 tag-pri 5 2048 0 tag-pri 6 -0 tag-pri ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Traffic parameters for ATM service: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------TID Service Traf CLP01PCR CLP0PCR CLP01SCR CLP0SCR MBS CDVT PPD/EPD/SHAPE Type Type kbps kbps kbps kbps cells 1/10us ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 cbr 2 1024 -----off/off/-1 cbr 2 2500 -----off/off/-2 ubr 2 512 -----on /on /-3 nrt-vbr 5 1200 -600 -250 -on /on /-4 rt-vbr 15 128 --64 300 10000000 on /on /off 5 ubr 2 2048 -----on /on /-6 ubr 1 ------off/off/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Num : 7 Traffic type definition: 1:NoTrafficDescriptor 2:NoClpNoScr 3:ClpNoTaggingNoScr 4:ClpTaggingNoScr 5:NoClpScr 6:ClpNoTaggingScr 7:ClpTaggingScr 8:ClpNoTaggingMcr 9:ClpTransparentNoScr 10:ClpTransparentScr 11:NoClpTaggingNoScr 12:NoClpNoScrCdvt 13:NoClpScrCdvt 14:ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt 15:ClpTaggingScrCdvt ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car 3072 priority 6 priority-policy pvcSetting
Step 2 Create a VLAN and add ports to the VLAN. 1.
Create a VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 smart
2.
Add upstream port 0/7/0 to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
3.
Add a service port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 vdsl mode ptm 0/2/0 multi-service userencap pppoe rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 NOTE
If you need to enable services in bathes in actual configuration, refer to "9.12 Adding Service Ports in Batches" to add service ports in batches.
Step 3 Configure the VDSL2 line profile. You can add line profiles as required. Suppose that the profile you added is profile 3. huawei(config)#vdsl line-profile add 3 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Transmission mode: > 0: Custom > 1: All (G992.1~5,T1.413,G993.2) > 2: Full rate(G992.1/3/5,T1.413,G993.2) > 3: G.DMT (G992.1/3/5,G993.2) > 4: G.HS (G992.1~5,G993.2) > 5: ADSL (G.992.1~5,T1.413) > 6: VDSL (G993.2) > Please select (0~6) [1]:0 > Current configured modes:
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-7
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
23-8
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L/M) 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J/M) 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) Please select 1-Modify 2-Delete 3-Save and quit [3]:1 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L/M) 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J/M) 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) Please select (1,2-3) [1]:2-6 G.992.1: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexC (1,2-3) [1]: G.992.2: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexC (1,2-3) [1]: G.992.3: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexI 5-AnnexJ 6-AnnexL 7-AnnexM (1,2-3) [1]:2-6 G.992.4: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexI (1,2-3) [1]: G.992.5: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexI 5-AnnexJ 6-AnnexM (1,2-3) [1]:2-5 Current configured modes: 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L) 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J) 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) Please select 1-Modify 2-Delete 3-Save and quit [3]:3 Please select the form of transmit rate adaptation downstream: 1-fixed 2-adaptAtStartup (1~2) [2]: Please select the form of transmit rate adaptation upstream: 1-fixed 2-adaptAtStartup (1~2) [2]: Will you set SNR margin parameters? (y/n) [n]:y Target SNR margin downstream (0~310 0.1dB) [60]: Minimum SNR margin downstream (0~60 0.1dB) [0]: Maximum SNR margin downstream (60~310 0.1dB) [300]: Target SNR margin upstream (0~310 0.1dB) [60]: Minimum SNR margin upstream (0~60 0.1dB) [0]: Maximum SNR margin upstream (60~310 0.1dB) [300]: Will you set DPBO parameters? (y/n)[n]:y DPBO E-side electrical length (0~511 0.5dB) [0]: Will you set UPBO parameters? (y/n)[n]:y UPBO reference PSD per band, each band consists of two parameters[a, b]. Parameter a value from 40 dBm/Hz (coded as 0) to 80.95 dBm/Hz (coded as 4095) in steps of 0.01 dBm/Hz; and b value from 0 (coded as 0) to 40.95 dBm/Hz (coded as 4095) in steps of 0.01 dBm/Hz UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [1650]: UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [1020]: UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [1650]: UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [615]: UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [0]: UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [0]: Will you force the CPE to use the electrical length to compute the UPBO: 1-forced, 2-auto(1~2) [2]: Will you set RFI notch configuration parameter? (y/n) [n]:y Please set the RFI notch band range, the format : tone index(0~4095) or begin tone index-end tone index. Begin tone index must not be more than end tone index, for example:20,25-30. You cannot set more than 16 ranges:1-20,50-100,400-700,1000-2000 Will you set VDSL tone blackout configuration parameter? (y/n) [n]:y Please set the VDSL tone blackout range, the format : tone index(0~4095) or begin tone index-end tone index. Begin tone index must not be more than end tone index, for example:20,25-30. You cannot set more than 8 ranges: Will you set mode-specific parameters? (y/n) [n]:y Current configured modes: 1-defmode Please select 1-Add 2-Modify 3-Save and quit [3]:1 2-adsl 3-adsl2Pots 4-adsl2Isdn 5-adsl2PlusPots 6-adsl2PlusIsdn 7-adsl2ReachExtended 8-vdsl2Pots 9-vdsl2Isdn Please select [2]:7 Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power downstream (0~205 0.1dBm) [145]:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide > > > > > > >
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power upstream (0~205 0.1dBm) [145]: Will you set PSD mask value downstream parameter? (y/n) [n]: Will you set PSD mask value upstream parameter? (y/n) [n]: Current configured modes: 1-defmode 7-adsl2ReachExtended Please select 1-Add 2-Modify 3-Delete 4-Save and quit [4]: Add profile 3 successfully
Step 4 Configure the VDSL2 channel profile. Suppose that VDSL2 channel profile 3 is added. huawei(config)#vdsl channel-profile add 3 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Data path mode 1-ATM, 2-PTM, 3-Both (1~3) [3]:2 > Will you set the minimum impulse noise protection? (y/n) [n]:y > Minimum impulse noise protection downstream: > 1-noProtection 2-halfSymbol 3-singleSymbol 4-twoSymbols > 5-threeSymbols 6-fourSymbols 7-fiveSymbols 8-sixSymbols > 9-sevenSymbols 10-eightSymbols 11-nineSymbols 12-tenSymbols > 13-elevenSymbols 14-twelveSymbols 15-thirteenSymbols 16-fourteenSymbols > 17-fifteenSymbols 18-sixteenSymbols > Please select (1~18) [1]: > Minimum impulse noise protection upstream: > 1-noProtection 2-halfSymbol 3-singleSymbol 4-twoSymbols > 5-threeSymbols 6-fourSymbols 7-fiveSymbols 8-sixSymbols > 9-sevenSymbols 10-eightSymbols 11-nineSymbols 12-tenSymbols > 13-elevenSymbols 14-twelveSymbols 15-thirteenSymbols 16-fourteenSymbols > 17-fifteenSymbols 18-sixteenSymbols > Please select (1~18) [1]: > Will you set interleaving delay parameters? (y/n) [n]:y > Maximum interleaving delay downstream (0~200 ms) [20]: > Maximum interleaving delay upstream (0~200 ms) [20]: > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n) [n]:y > Minimum transmit rate downstream (128~100000 Kbps) [128]: > Maximum transmit rate downstream (128~100000 Kbps) [100000]: > Minimum transmit rate upstream (128~100000 Kbps) [128]: > Maximum transmit rate upstream (128~100000 Kbps) [100000]: Add profile 3 successfully
Step 5 Configure the VDSL2 line profile. Bind the configured line profile with the channel profile. Suppose that the index of the line profile is 3. huawei(config)#vdsl line-template add 3 Start adding template Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the template (y/n) [n]: > Please set the line-profile index (1~128) [1]:3 > Will you set channel configuration parameters? (y/n) [n]:y > Please set the channel number (1~2) [1]: > Channel1 configuration parameters: > Please set the channel-profile index (1~128) [1]:3 Add template 3 successfully
Step 6 Activate VDSL2 port 0/2/0. Use line profile 3 to activate port 0. huawei(config)#interface vdsl 0/2 huawei(config-if-vdsl-0/2)#activate 0 template-index 3
Step 7 Bind an alarm profile with the VDSL2 port. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-9
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
NOTE
l
In this example, the default alarm profile is adopted.
l
If the default alarm profile is not adopted and you need to adopt alarm profile 2, run the vdsl alarmtemplate add 2 command to add alarm profile 2, and then run the alarm-config 0 2 command to bind the profile with the VDSL2 port.
l
A VDSL2 alarm profile takes effect only when it is bound with a port. By default, each port is bound with alarm profile 1.
Step 8 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration, the user can access the Internet in the PPPoE/IPoE mode.
23.3 Configuration Example of the VDSL2 IPoA Service This example shows how to configure the VDSL2 IPoA service so that the user can access the Internet through the VDSL2 lines in the IPoA mode.
Prerequisite l
The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l
The VDEA board works in the normal state.
l
The upper layer router of the MA5600 has assigned the corresponding VLAN to the VDSL2 subscriber.
l
With the development of the IP network, IP access becomes the mainstream access mode in DSLAMs. To be compatible with the user side modems that adopt the ATM as the access mode, the MA5600 supports the conversion between the IPoA protocol and the PPPoA protocol and that between the IPoE and the PPPoE protocol, and enables IPoA/PPPoA users to transparently access the upper layer IP network.
l
Currently, the application service of IPoA/PPPoA users is the common Internet service.
l
The MA5600 can restrict the user bandwidth through the configured traffic profile or the configured VDSL2 line profile. If the two profiles work together, the user bandwidth is the minimum value defined in the two profiles.
l
In the case of IPoA access, select the dynamic IP address (without specifying the source IP address) or the static IP address (specifying the source IP address) for the packets. To switch from a dynamic address to a static address in the IPoA mode, you must adopt LLCBridge encapsulation first, and then adopt the IPoA static address encapsulation.
Context
Networking Figure 23-3 shows a sample network for configuring the VDSL2 IPoA service. 23-10
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Figure 23-3 Sample network for configuring the VDSL2 IPoA service Internet
10.1.1.1/24
V
Router
CON ETH MON
D E A
GE 0/7/0
SCU
IPoA access
MA5600
Modem
PC
Data Plan Table 23-2 lists the data plan for configuring the VDSL2 IPoA service. Table 23-2 Data plan for configuring the VDSL2 IPoA service Item
Data
Remarks
Traffic profile
Index: 7
Configure the access rate, priority, and priority policy in the traffic profile. When you add a service port, you can specify the traffic profile to restrict the access rate, priority, and priority policy.
Access rate: 3072 kbit/s Priority: 6 Priority policy: Pvc-Setting
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-11
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Item
Data
Remarks
Line profile
Index: 3
When the VDSL port is activated, the VDSL port uses the line and channel parameters configured in the line profile to negotiate with the CPE. When the two parties negotiate successfully, the VDSL2 port is activated and the lines connecting to the port can bear services.
Line profile: l
Index: 3
l
Target downstream/upstream SNR margin: 12 dB
l
Minimum downstream/ upstream SNR margin: 0.5 dB
l
Other parameters: default setting
Channel profile:
Alarm profile
l
Index: 3
l
Path mode: PTM
l
Other parameters: default setting
Alarm profile index: 1 (the default Configure the alarm threshold of profile) the line parameter in the alarm profile. By binding the threshold to a port, you can monitor the conditions of the lines connecting to the port. In the default alarm profile, all the alarm thresholds are set as 0, which indicates that line monitoring is disabled. VDSL2 port: 0/2/0
-
VLAN ID: 10
Keep it consistent with the upper layer device.
SCU board
Upstream port: 0/7/0
-
Default IPoA gateway
IP address: 10.1.1.1/24
It is the IP address of the upper layer router.
VDEA board
Configuration Flowchart Figure 23-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the VDSL2 IPoA service.
23-12
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Figure 23-4 Flowchart for configuring the VDSL2 IPoA service Start
No
Is there an appropriate traffic profile? Yes
Add a traffic profile
Create a VLAN and add a port to it
No Is the port activated? Yes Deactivate the VDSL2 port
Is there an appropriate line Yes profile?
No
Is there an appropriate alarm Yes profile?
No
Add a line profile
Add an alarm profile Bind the line profile
Bind the alarm profile
Activate the VDSL2 port
Configure the MAC address pool
Enable the IPoA protocol conversion
Configure the IPoA default gateway
Set the encapsulation mode
Save the data
End
NOTE
When adding a service port, you can select the ATM or PTM as the data path mode. The PTM data path mode does not support the PPPoA and IPoA modes.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-13
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 Check whether there is an appropriate traffic profile. If there is no appropriate traffic profile, add one. huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0 { |to-index }: Command: display traffic table from-index 0 Traffic parameters for IP service: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------TID CAR(kbps) Priority Pri-Policy ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 1024 6 tag-pri 1 2496 6 tag-pri 2 512 0 tag-pri 3 576 2 tag-pri 4 64 4 tag-pri 5 2048 0 tag-pri 6 -0 tag-pri ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Traffic parameters for ATM service: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------TID Service Traf CLP01PCR CLP0PCR CLP01SCR CLP0SCR MBS CDVT PPD/EPD/SHAPE Type Type kbps kbps kbps kbps cells 1/10us ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 cbr 2 1024 -----off/off/-1 cbr 2 2500 -----off/off/-2 ubr 2 512 -----on /on /-3 nrt-vbr 5 1200 -600 -250 -on /on /-4 rt-vbr 15 128 --64 300 10000000 on /on /off 5 ubr 2 2048 -----on /on /-6 ubr 1 ------off/off/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Num : 7 Traffic type definition: 1:NoTrafficDescriptor 2:NoClpNoScr 3:ClpNoTaggingNoScr 4:ClpTaggingNoScr 5:NoClpScr 6:ClpNoTaggingScr 7:ClpTaggingScr 8:ClpNoTaggingMcr 9:ClpTransparentNoScr 10:ClpTransparentScr 11:NoClpTaggingNoScr 12:NoClpNoScrCdvt 13:NoClpScrCdvt 14:ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt 15:ClpTaggingScrCdvt ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car 3072 priority 6 priority-policy pvcSetting
Step 2 Create VLAN 10, and add upstream port 0/7/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 10 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
Step 3 Add a service port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 vdsl mode atm 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 txcttr 7 NOTE
If you need to enable services in bathes in actual configuration, refer to "9.12 Adding Service Ports in Batches" to add service ports in batches.
Step 4 Configure the VDSL2 line profile. You can add line profiles as required. Suppose that the profile you added is profile 3. huawei(config)#vdsl line-profile add 3 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected
23-14
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: Transmission mode: 0: Custom 1: All (G992.1~5,T1.413,G993.2) 2: Full rate(G992.1/3/5,T1.413,G993.2) 3: G.DMT (G992.1/3/5,G993.2) 4: G.HS (G992.1~5,G993.2) 5: ADSL (G.992.1~5,T1.413) 6: VDSL (G993.2) Please select (0~6) [1]:0 Current configured modes: 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L/M) 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J/M) 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) Please select 1-Modify 2-Delete 3-Save and quit [3]:1 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L/M) 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J/M) 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) Please select (1,2-3) [1]:2-6 G.992.1: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexC (1,2-3) [1]: G.992.2: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexC (1,2-3) [1]: G.992.3: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexI 5-AnnexJ 6-AnnexL 7-AnnexM (1,2-3) [1]:2-6 G.992.4: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexI (1,2-3) [1]: G.992.5: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexI 5-AnnexJ 6-AnnexM (1,2-3) [1]:2-5 Current configured modes: 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L) 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J) 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) Please select 1-Modify 2-Delete 3-Save and quit [3]:3 Please select the form of transmit rate adaptation downstream: 1-fixed 2-adaptAtStartup (1~2) [2]: Please select the form of transmit rate adaptation upstream: 1-fixed 2-adaptAtStartup (1~2) [2]: Will you set SNR margin parameters? (y/n) [n]:y Target SNR margin downstream (0~310 0.1dB) [60]: Minimum SNR margin downstream (0~60 0.1dB) [0]: Maximum SNR margin downstream (60~310 0.1dB) [300]: Target SNR margin upstream (0~310 0.1dB) [60]: Minimum SNR margin upstream (0~60 0.1dB) [0]: Maximum SNR margin upstream (60~310 0.1dB) [300]: Will you set DPBO parameters? (y/n)[n]:y DPBO E-side electrical length (0~511 0.5dB) [0]: Will you set UPBO parameters? (y/n)[n]:y UPBO reference PSD per band, each band consists of two parameters[a, b]. Parameter a value from 40 dBm/Hz (coded as 0) to 80.95 dBm/Hz (coded as 4095) in steps of 0.01 dBm/Hz; and b value from 0 (coded as 0) to 40.95 dBm/Hz (coded as 4095) in steps of 0.01 dBm/Hz UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [1650]: UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [1020]: UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [1650]: UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [615]: UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [0]: UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [0]: Will you force the CPE to use the electrical length to compute the UPBO: 1-forced, 2-auto(1~2) [2]: Will you set RFI notch configuration parameter? (y/n) [n]:y Please set the RFI notch band range, the format : tone index(0~4095) or begin tone index-end tone index. Begin tone index must not be more than end tone index, for example:20,25-30. You cannot set more than 16 ranges:1-20,50-100,400-700,1000-2000 Will you set VDSL tone blackout configuration parameter? (y/n) [n]:y Please set the VDSL tone blackout range, the format : tone index(0~4095) or begin tone index-end tone index. Begin tone index must not be more than end tone index, for example:20,25-30. You cannot set more than
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-15
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
8 ranges: Will you set mode-specific parameters? (y/n) [n]:y Current configured modes: 1-defmode Please select 1-Add 2-Modify 3-Save and quit [3]:1 2-adsl 3-adsl2Pots 4-adsl2Isdn 5-adsl2PlusPots 6-adsl2PlusIsdn 7-adsl2ReachExtended 8-vdsl2Pots 9-vdsl2Isdn Please select [2]:7 Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power downstream (0~205 0.1dBm) [145]: Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power upstream (0~205 0.1dBm) [145]: Will you set PSD mask value downstream parameter? (y/n) [n]: Will you set PSD mask value upstream parameter? (y/n) [n]: Current configured modes: 1-defmode 7-adsl2ReachExtended Please select 1-Add 2-Modify 3-Delete 4-Save and quit [4]: Add profile 3 successfully
Step 5 Configure the VDSL2 channel profile. Suppose that VDSL2 channel profile 3 is added. huawei(config)#vdsl channel-profile add 3 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Data path mode 1-ATM, 2-PTM, 3-Both (1~3) [3]:1 > Will you set the minimum impulse noise protection? (y/n) [n]:y > Minimum impulse noise protection downstream: > 1-noProtection 2-halfSymbol 3-singleSymbol 4-twoSymbols > 5-threeSymbols 6-fourSymbols 7-fiveSymbols 8-sixSymbols > 9-sevenSymbols 10-eightSymbols 11-nineSymbols 12-tenSymbols > 13-elevenSymbols 14-twelveSymbols 15-thirteenSymbols 16-fourteenSymbols > 17-fifteenSymbols 18-sixteenSymbols > Please select (1~18) [1]: > Minimum impulse noise protection upstream: > 1-noProtection 2-halfSymbol 3-singleSymbol 4-twoSymbols > 5-threeSymbols 6-fourSymbols 7-fiveSymbols 8-sixSymbols > 9-sevenSymbols 10-eightSymbols 11-nineSymbols 12-tenSymbols > 13-elevenSymbols 14-twelveSymbols 15-thirteenSymbols 16-fourteenSymbols > 17-fifteenSymbols 18-sixteenSymbols > Please select (1~18) [1]: > Will you set interleaving delay parameters? (y/n) [n]:y > Maximum interleaving delay downstream (0~200 ms) [20]: > Maximum interleaving delay upstream (0~200 ms) [20]: > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n) [n]:y > Minimum transmit rate downstream (128~100000 Kbps) [128]: > Maximum transmit rate downstream (128~100000 Kbps) [100000]: > Minimum transmit rate upstream (128~100000 Kbps) [128]: > Maximum transmit rate upstream (128~100000 Kbps) [100000]: Add profile 3 successfully
Step 6 Configure the VDSL2 line profile. Bind the configured line profile with the channel profile. Suppose that the index of the line profile is 3. huawei(config)#vdsl line-template add 3 Start adding template Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the template (y/n) [n]: > Please set the line-profile index (1~128) [1]:3 > Will you set channel configuration parameters? (y/n) [n]:y > Please set the channel number (1~2) [1]: > Channel1 configuration parameters:
23-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide >
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Please set the channel-profile index (1~128) [1]:3 Add template 3 successfully
Step 7 Activate VDSL2 port 0/2/0. Use line profile 3 to activate port 0. huawei(config)#interface vdsl 0/2 huawei(config-if-vdsl-0/2)#activate 0 template-index 3
Step 8 Bind an alarm profile with the VDSL2 port. NOTE
l
In this example, the default alarm profile is adopted.
l
If the default alarm profile is not adopted and you need to adopt alarm profile 2, run the vdsl alarmtemplate add 2 command to add alarm profile 2, and then run the alarm-config 0 2 command to bind the profile with the VDSL2 port.
l
A VDSL2 alarm profile takes effect only when it is bound with a port. By default, each port is bound with alarm profile 1.
Step 9 Configure the MAC address pool. Configure MAC address pool 0, which begins with 0000-0000-0001. huawei(config)#mac-pool 0 0000-0000-0001
Step 10 Enable the IPoA protocol conversion. huawei(config)#ipoa enable
Step 11 Configure the default IPoA gateway. huawei(config)#ipoa default gateway 10.1.1.1
Step 12 Set the encapsulation mode of VDSL2 port 0/2/0 as IPoA-LLC. huawei(config)#encapsulation 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 35 type ipoa llc srcIP 10.1.1.20
Step 13 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration, the user can access the Internet in the IPoA mode.
23.4 Configuration Example of the VDSL2 PPPoA Service This example shows how to configure the VDSL2 PPPoA service so that the user can access the Internet through the VDSL2 lines in the PPPoA mode.
Prerequisite l
The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l
The VDEA board works in the normal state.
l
The upper layer router of the MA5600 has assigned the corresponding VLAN to the VDSL2 subscriber.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-17
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Context l
With the development of the IP network, IP access becomes the mainstream access mode in DSLAMs. To be compatible with the user side modems that adopt the ATM as the access mode, the MA5600 supports the conversion between the IPoA protocol and the PPPoA protocol and that between the IPoE and the PPPoE protocol, and enables IPoA/PPPoA users to transparently access the upper layer IP network.
l
Currently, the application service of IPoA/PPPoA users is the common Internet service.
l
The MA5600 can restrict the user bandwidth through the configured traffic profile or the configured VDSL2 line profile. If the two profiles work together, the user bandwidth is the minimum value defined in the two profiles.
Networking Figure 23-5 shows a sample network for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoA service. Figure 23-5 Sample network for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoA service Internet
10.1.1.1/24
V
Router
CON ETH MON
D E A
PPPoA access
GE 0/7/0
SCU
MA5600
Modem
PC
Data Plan Table 23-3 lists the data plan for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoA service.
23-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Table 23-3 Data plan for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoA service Item
Data
Remarks
Traffic profile
Index: 7
Configure the access rate, priority, and priority policy in the traffic profile. When you add a service port, you can specify the traffic profile to restrict the access rate, priority, and priority policy.
Access rate: 3072 kbit/s Priority: 6 Priority policy: Pvc-Setting Line profile
Index: 3 Line profile: l
Index: 3
l
Target downstream/upstream SNR margin: 12 dB
l
Minimum downstream/ upstream SNR margin: 0.5 dB
l
Other parameters: default setting
When the VDSL port is activated, the VDSL port uses the line and channel parameters configured in the line profile to negotiate with the CPE. When the two parties negotiate successfully, the VDSL2 port is activated and the lines connecting to the port can bear services.
Channel profile:
Alarm profile
l
Index: 3
l
Path mode: ATM
l
Other parameters: default setting
Alarm profile index: 1 (the default Configure the alarm threshold of profile) the line parameter in the alarm profile. By binding the threshold to a port, you can monitor the conditions of the lines connecting to the port. In the default alarm profile, all the alarm thresholds are set as 0, which indicates that line monitoring is disabled. VDSL2 port: 0/2/0
-
VLAN ID: 10
Keep it consistent with the upper layer device.
SCU board
Upstream port: 0/7/0
-
Default PPPoA gateway
IP address: 10.1.1.1/24
It is the IP address of the upper layer router.
VDEA board
Configuration Flowchart Figure 23-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoA service. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-19
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Figure 23-6 Flowchart for configuring the VDSL2 PPPoA service Start
No
Is there an appropriate traffic profile? Yes
Add a traffic profile
Create a VLAN and add a port to it
No Is the port activated? Yes
Deactivate the VDSL2 port
Yes Is there an appropriate line profile?
No
Yes
Add a line profile
Is there an appropriate alarm profile?
No
Add an alarm profile Bind the line profile
Bind the alarm profile
Activate the VDSL2 port
Configure the MAC address pool
Enable the IPoA protocol conversion
Configure the IPoA default gateway
Set the encapsulation mode
Save the data
End
NOTE
When adding a service port, you can select the ATM or PTM as the data path mode. The PTM data path mode does not support the PPPoA and IPoA modes.
Procedure Step 1 Check whether there is an appropriate traffic profile. If there is no appropriate traffic profile, add one. huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0 { |to-index }:
23-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Command: display traffic table from-index 0 Traffic parameters for IP service: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------TID CAR(kbps) Priority Pri-Policy ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 1024 6 tag-pri 1 2496 6 tag-pri 2 512 0 tag-pri 3 576 2 tag-pri 4 64 4 tag-pri 5 2048 0 tag-pri 6 -0 tag-pri ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Traffic parameters for ATM service: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------TID Service Traf CLP01PCR CLP0PCR CLP01SCR CLP0SCR MBS CDVT PPD/EPD/SHAPE Type Type kbps kbps kbps kbps cells 1/10us ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 cbr 2 1024 -----off/off/-1 cbr 2 2500 -----off/off/-2 ubr 2 512 -----on /on /-3 nrt-vbr 5 1200 -600 -250 -on /on /-4 rt-vbr 15 128 --64 300 10000000 on /on /off 5 ubr 2 2048 -----on /on /-6 ubr 1 ------off/off/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Num : 7 Traffic type definition: 1:NoTrafficDescriptor 2:NoClpNoScr 3:ClpNoTaggingNoScr 4:ClpTaggingNoScr 5:NoClpScr 6:ClpNoTaggingScr 7:ClpTaggingScr 8:ClpNoTaggingMcr 9:ClpTransparentNoScr 10:ClpTransparentScr 11:NoClpTaggingNoScr 12:NoClpNoScrCdvt 13:NoClpScrCdvt 14:ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt 15:ClpTaggingScrCdvt ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car 3072 priority 6 priority-policy pvcSetting
Step 2 Create VLAN 10, and add upstream port 0/7/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 10 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
Step 3 Add a service port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 vdsl mode atm 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 txcttr 7 NOTE
If you need to enable services in bathes in actual configuration, refer to "9.12 Adding Service Ports in Batches" to add service ports in batches.
Step 4 Configure the VDSL2 line profile. You can add line profiles as required. Suppose that the profile you added is profile 3. huawei(config)#vdsl line-profile add 3 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Transmission mode: > 0: Custom > 1: All (G992.1~5,T1.413,G993.2) > 2: Full rate(G992.1/3/5,T1.413,G993.2) > 3: G.DMT (G992.1/3/5,G993.2) > 4: G.HS (G992.1~5,G993.2) > 5: ADSL (G.992.1~5,T1.413)
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-21
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
23-22
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
6: VDSL (G993.2) Please select (0~6) [1]:0 Current configured modes: 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L/M) 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J/M) 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) Please select 1-Modify 2-Delete 3-Save and quit [3]:1 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L/M) 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J/M) 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) Please select (1,2-3) [1]:2-6 G.992.1: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexC (1,2-3) [1]: G.992.2: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexC (1,2-3) [1]: G.992.3: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexI 5-AnnexJ 6-AnnexL 7-AnnexM (1,2-3) [1]:2-6 G.992.4: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexI (1,2-3) [1]: G.992.5: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexI 5-AnnexJ 6-AnnexM (1,2-3) [1]:2-5 Current configured modes: 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L) 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J) 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) Please select 1-Modify 2-Delete 3-Save and quit [3]:3 Please select the form of transmit rate adaptation downstream: 1-fixed 2-adaptAtStartup (1~2) [2]: Please select the form of transmit rate adaptation upstream: 1-fixed 2-adaptAtStartup (1~2) [2]: Will you set SNR margin parameters? (y/n) [n]:y Target SNR margin downstream (0~310 0.1dB) [60]: Minimum SNR margin downstream (0~60 0.1dB) [0]: Maximum SNR margin downstream (60~310 0.1dB) [300]: Target SNR margin upstream (0~310 0.1dB) [60]: Minimum SNR margin upstream (0~60 0.1dB) [0]: Maximum SNR margin upstream (60~310 0.1dB) [300]: Will you set DPBO parameters? (y/n)[n]:y DPBO E-side electrical length (0~511 0.5dB) [0]: Will you set UPBO parameters? (y/n)[n]:y UPBO reference PSD per band, each band consists of two parameters[a, b]. Parameter a value from 40 dBm/Hz (coded as 0) to 80.95 dBm/Hz (coded as 4095) in steps of 0.01 dBm/Hz; and b value from 0 (coded as 0) to 40.95 dBm/Hz (coded as 4095) in steps of 0.01 dBm/Hz UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [1650]: UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [1020]: UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [1650]: UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [615]: UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [0]: UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [0]: Will you force the CPE to use the electrical length to compute the UPBO: 1-forced, 2-auto(1~2) [2]: Will you set RFI notch configuration parameter? (y/n) [n]:y Please set the RFI notch band range, the format : tone index(0~4095) or begin tone index-end tone index. Begin tone index must not be more than end tone index, for example:20,25-30. You cannot set more than 16 ranges:1-20,50-100,400-700,1000-2000 Will you set VDSL tone blackout configuration parameter? (y/n) [n]:y Please set the VDSL tone blackout range, the format : tone index(0~4095) or begin tone index-end tone index. Begin tone index must not be more than end tone index, for example:20,25-30. You cannot set more than 8 ranges: Will you set mode-specific parameters? (y/n) [n]:y Current configured modes: 1-defmode Please select 1-Add 2-Modify 3-Save and quit [3]:1 2-adsl 3-adsl2Pots 4-adsl2Isdn 5-adsl2PlusPots 6-adsl2PlusIsdn 7-adsl2ReachExtended 8-vdsl2Pots 9-vdsl2Isdn
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide > > > > > > > > > >
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Please select [2]:7 Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power downstream (0~205 0.1dBm) [145]: Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power upstream (0~205 0.1dBm) [145]: Will you set PSD mask value downstream parameter? (y/n) [n]: Will you set PSD mask value upstream parameter? (y/n) [n]: Current configured modes: 1-defmode 7-adsl2ReachExtended Please select 1-Add 2-Modify 3-Delete 4-Save and quit [4]: Add profile 3 successfully
Step 5 Configure the VDSL2 channel profile. Suppose that VDSL2 channel profile 3 is added. huawei(config)#vdsl channel-profile add 3 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Data path mode 1-ATM, 2-PTM, 3-Both (1~3) [3]:1 > Will you set the minimum impulse noise protection? (y/n) [n]:y > Minimum impulse noise protection downstream: > 1-noProtection 2-halfSymbol 3-singleSymbol 4-twoSymbols > 5-threeSymbols 6-fourSymbols 7-fiveSymbols 8-sixSymbols > 9-sevenSymbols 10-eightSymbols 11-nineSymbols 12-tenSymbols > 13-elevenSymbols 14-twelveSymbols 15-thirteenSymbols 16-fourteenSymbols > 17-fifteenSymbols 18-sixteenSymbols > Please select (1~18) [1]: > Minimum impulse noise protection upstream: > 1-noProtection 2-halfSymbol 3-singleSymbol 4-twoSymbols > 5-threeSymbols 6-fourSymbols 7-fiveSymbols 8-sixSymbols > 9-sevenSymbols 10-eightSymbols 11-nineSymbols 12-tenSymbols > 13-elevenSymbols 14-twelveSymbols 15-thirteenSymbols 16-fourteenSymbols > 17-fifteenSymbols 18-sixteenSymbols > Please select (1~18) [1]: > Will you set interleaving delay parameters? (y/n) [n]:y > Maximum interleaving delay downstream (0~200 ms) [20]: > Maximum interleaving delay upstream (0~200 ms) [20]: > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n) [n]:y > Minimum transmit rate downstream (128~100000 Kbps) [128]: > Maximum transmit rate downstream (128~100000 Kbps) [100000]: > Minimum transmit rate upstream (128~100000 Kbps) [128]: > Maximum transmit rate upstream (128~100000 Kbps) [100000]: Add profile 3 successfully
Step 6 Configure the VDSL2 line profile. Bind the configured line profile with the channel profile. Suppose that the index of the line profile is 3. huawei(config)#vdsl line-template add 3 Start adding template Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the template (y/n) [n]: > Please set the line-profile index (1~128) [1]:3 > Will you set channel configuration parameters? (y/n) [n]:y > Please set the channel number (1~2) [1]: > Channel1 configuration parameters: > Please set the channel-profile index (1~128) [1]:3 Add template 3 successfully
Step 7 Activate VDSL2 port 0/2/0. Use line profile 3 to activate port 0. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-23
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#interface vdsl 0/2 huawei(config-if-vdsl-0/2)#activate 0 template-index 3
Step 8 Bind an alarm profile with the VDSL2 port. NOTE
l
In this example, the default alarm profile is adopted.
l
If the default alarm profile is not adopted and you need to adopt alarm profile 2, run the vdsl alarmtemplate add 2 command to add alarm profile 2, and then run the alarm-config 0 2 command to bind the profile with the VDSL2 port.
l
A VDSL2 alarm profile takes effect only when it is bound with a port. By default, each port is bound with alarm profile 1.
Step 9 Configure the MAC address pool. Configure MAC address pool 0, which begins with 0000-0000-0001. huawei(config)#mac-pool 0 0000-0000-0001
Step 10 Enable the PPPoA protocol conversion. huawei(config)#pppoa enable
Step 11 Set the encapsulation mode of VDSL2 port 0/2/0 as PPPoA-LLC. huawei(config)#encapsulation 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 35 type pppoa llc
Step 12 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration, the user can access the Internet in the PPPoA mode.
23.5 Adding a VDSL2 Line Profile This operation enables you to add a VDSL2 line profile so as to include the majority of parameters of all the VDSL2 ports in a line profile.
Context l
Up to 128 line profiles can be added for the MA5600. Line profile 1 is the default, which can be modified but cannot be deleted.
l
When the downstream channel mode is fixed, the downstream maximum rate must be equal to the minimum rate.
l
When setting the upstream/downstream SNR margin, make sure that the settings comply with mini. SNR margin ≤ target SNR margin ≤ max. SNR margin.
Configuration Flowchart Figure 23-7 shows the flowchart for adding a VDSL2 line profile.
23-24
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Figure 23-7 Flowchart for adding a VDSL2 line profile Start
No
Name the profile?
Set VDSL tone blackout configuration parameter?
No
Yes
Yes
Set VDSL tone blackout configuration parameter
Set the line profile
Set transmission mode Set mode-specific parameters for modem?
No
Select the form of transmit rate adaptation downstream Yes Select the form of transmit rate adaptation upstream
Select the mode to be configured
Select the form of transmit rate adaptation upstream
Set maximum nominal aggregate transmit power downstream
Set SNR margin for modem?
No
Yes Set target SNR margin downstream
Set maximum nominal aggregate transmit power upstream
Set PSD mask value downstream parameter?
Set minimum SNR margin downstream
No
Yes Set PSD mask value downstream parameter
Set maximum SNR margin downstream Set target SNR margin upstream
Set PSD mask value upstream parameter?
Set minimum SNR margin upstream Set maximum SNR margin upstream
Set RFI notch configuration parameter?
No
Yes Set PSD mask value upstream parameter No Set PBO control upstream
Yes Set RFI notch configuration parameter
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
End
23-25
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 Run the vdsl line-profile add command to add a VDSL2 line profile. Step 2 Run the display vdsl line-profile command to query the added VDSL2 line profile. ----End To add VDSL2 line profile 3, do as follows: huawei(config)#vdsl line-profile add 3 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Transmission mode: > 0: Custom > 1: All (G992.1~5,T1.413,G993.2) > 2: Full rate(G992.1/3/5,T1.413,G993.2) > 3: G.DMT (G992.1/3/5,G993.2) > 4: G.HS (G992.1~5,G993.2) > 5: ADSL (G.992.1~5,T1.413) > 6: VDSL (G993.2) > Please select (0~6) [1]:0 > Current configured modes: > 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) > 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L/M) > 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J/M) > 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) > Please select 1-Modify 2-Delete 3-Save and quit [3]:1 > 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) > 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L/M) > 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J/M) > 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) > Please select (1,2-3) [1]:2-6 > G.992.1: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexC (1,2-3) [1]: > G.992.2: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexC (1,2-3) [1]: > G.992.3: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexI 5-AnnexJ 6-AnnexL > 7-AnnexM (1,2-3) [1]:2-6 > G.992.4: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexI (1,2-3) [1]: > G.992.5: 1-All Annex 2-AnnexA 3-AnnexB 4-AnnexI 5-AnnexJ 6-AnnexM > (1,2-3) [1]:2-5 > Current configured modes: > 1-T1.413 2-G.992.1 (Annex A/B/C) > 3-G.992.2 (Annex A/C) 4-G.992.3 (Annex A/B/I/J/L) > 5-G.992.4 (Annex A/I) 6-G.992.5 (Annex A/B/I/J) > 7-G.993.2 (Annex A/B/C) > Please select 1-Modify 2-Delete 3-Save and quit [3]:3 > Please select the form of transmit rate adaptation downstream: > 1-fixed 2-adaptAtStartup (1~2) [2]: > Please select the form of transmit rate adaptation upstream: > 1-fixed 2-adaptAtStartup (1~2) [2]: > Will you set SNR margin parameters? (y/n) [n]:y > Target SNR margin downstream (0~310 0.1dB) [60]: > Minimum SNR margin downstream (0~60 0.1dB) [0]: > Maximum SNR margin downstream (60~310 0.1dB) [300]: > Target SNR margin upstream (0~310 0.1dB) [60]: > Minimum SNR margin upstream (0~60 0.1dB) [0]: > Maximum SNR margin upstream (60~310 0.1dB) [300]: > Will you set DPBO parameters? (y/n)[n]:y > DPBO E-side electrical length (0~511 0.5dB) [0]: > Will you set UPBO parameters? (y/n)[n]:y > UPBO reference PSD per band, each band consists of two parameters[a, b]. Parameter a value from 40 dBm/Hz (coded as 0) to 80.95 dBm/Hz (coded as 4095) in steps of 0.01 dBm/Hz; and b value from 0 (coded as 0) to 40.95 dBm/Hz (coded as 4095) in steps of 0.01 dBm/Hz > UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [1650]:
23-26
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [1020]: UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [1650]: UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [615]: UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter a(0~4095) [0]: UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter b(0~4095) [0]: Will you force the CPE to use the electrical length to compute the UPBO: 1-forced, 2-auto(1~2) [2]: Will you set RFI notch configuration parameter? (y/n) [n]:y Please set the RFI notch band range, the format : tone index(0~4095) or begin tone index-end tone index. Begin tone index must not be more than end tone index, for example:20,25-30. You cannot set more than 16 ranges:1-20,50-100,400-700,1000-2000 Will you set VDSL tone blackout configuration parameter? (y/n) [n]:y Please set the VDSL tone blackout range, the format : tone index(0~4095) or begin tone index-end tone index. Begin tone index must not be more than end tone index, for example:20,25-30. You cannot set more than 8 ranges: Will you set mode-specific parameters? (y/n) [n]:y Current configured modes: 1-defmode Please select 1-Add 2-Modify 3-Save and quit [3]:1 2-adsl 3-adsl2Pots 4-adsl2Isdn 5-adsl2PlusPots 6-adsl2PlusIsdn 7-adsl2ReachExtended 8-vdsl2Pots 9-vdsl2Isdn Please select [2]:7 Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power downstream (0~205 0.1dBm) [145]: Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power upstream (0~205 0.1dBm) [145]: Will you set PSD mask value downstream parameter? (y/n) [n]: Will you set PSD mask value upstream parameter? (y/n) [n]: Current configured modes: 1-defmode 7-adsl2ReachExtended Please select 1-Add 2-Modify 3-Delete 4-Save and quit [4]: Add profile 3 successfully huawei(config)#display vdsl line-profile { |profile-index }:3 Command: display vdsl line-profile 3 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Profile index: 3 Name: VDSL LINE PROFILE 3 Transmission mode: T1.413 G.992.1(Annex A/B/C) G.992.2(Annex A/C) G.992.3(Annex A/B/I/J/L) G.992.4(Annex A/I) G.992.5(Annex A/B/I/J) G.993.2(Annex A/B/C) Form of transmit rate adaptation downstream : AdaptAtStartup Form of transmit rate adaptation upstream : AdaptAtStartup Target SNR margin downstream(0.1dB) : 60 Minimum downstream SNR margin(0.1dB) : 0 Maximum downstream SNR margin(0.1dB) : 300 Target SNR margin upstream(0.1dB) : 60 Minimum SNR margin upstream(0.1dB) : 0 Maximum SNR margin upstream(0.1dB) : 300 UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameters[a, b] : 1650,1020 UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameters[a, b] : 1650,615 UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameters[a, b] : 0,0 UPBO use of electrical length to compute UPBO : Auto RFI notch configuration： Number Start Tone Stop Tone Start Frequency End Frequency (KHz) (KHz) 1 1 20 4.3 90.5 2 50 100 215.6 435.5 3 400 700 1725.0 3023.0 4 1000 2000 4312.5 8629.3 G.993.2 profile : Profile12a VDSL2 PSD class mask : AnnexB998-M1x-A(B8-1)
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-27
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
VDSL2 link use of U0 : Unused Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power downstream(0.1dBm) : 145 Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power upstream(0.1dBm) : 145 Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power downstream(0.1dBm) : 145 Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power upstream(0.1dBm) : 145 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parameter Description Table 23-4 lists the parameters of a VDSL2 line profile. Table 23-4 Parameters of a VDSL2 line profile Parameter
Description
Default
profile-index
You can enter a profile index, or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile index. The profile index is unique.
-
profile-name
You can enter a profile index, or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile name.
-
VDSL2 transmission mode
Currently, there are six VDSL2 working modes:
All
The form of transmit rate adaptation upstream/ downstream
Minimum SNR margin in downstream/upstream
23-28
l
0: Custom
l
1: All (G992.1~5,T1.413, G993.2)
l
2: Full rate(G992.1/3/5, T1.413, G993.2)
l
3: g.dmt (G992.1/3/5, G993.2)
l
4: g.hs (G992.1~5, G993.2)
l
5: ADSL (G.992.1~5, T1.413)
l
6: VDSL (G993.2)
Options include 1-fixed and 2-adaptAtStartup. l
In fixed mode, the line must be activated with the specified downstream activation rate.
l
In adaptAtStartup mode, after the line training, the downstream activation rate is between the minimum activation rate and the maximum activation rate, but cannot change during the showtime. Otherwise, the line must be trained again.
In the process of VDSL2 connection setup, if the calculated SNR margin is lower than the preset one, the port cannot be activated.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
AdaptAtS tartup mode
0 dB
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Parameter
Description
Default
Maximal SNR margin in downstream/upstream
In the process of VDSL2 connection setup, if the calculated target SNR margin of a VDSL2 line is higher than the preset maximum SNR margin, the system will limit the downstream maximum SNR margin to the preset maximum value.
300 dB
Target SNR margin in downstream/upstream
The target SNR margin is the preserved SNR margin to ensure normal communication in the case of line SNR deterioration. If the target SNR margin is large enough, the chance of the occurrence of the line error is reduced. Even if the system is the safer, the rate of data transmission is low. Therefore, the target SNR margin must be adjusted based on the actual line conditions.
60 dB
DPBO parameters
l
DPBO E-side electrical length. It ranges from 0 to 511 and the actual range is 0 dB-255.5 dB. If it is configured as 0, then DPBO function is disabled and you can not configure the other parameters.
l
DPBO assumed exchange PSD mask.
l
Scalar A (Local cable feature parameter scalar A).
l
Scalar B (Local cable feature parameter scalar B).
l
Scalar C (Local cable feature parameter scalar C).
l
DPBO minimum usable signal.
l
DPBO span minimum frequency. It ranges from 0 to 2048 with the unit of 4.3125 KHz. So the actual range is 0 KHz-8832 KHz.
l
DPBO span maximum frequency. It ranges from 32 to 6956 with the unit of 4.3125 KHz. So the actual range is 138 KHz -29997.75 KHz.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
-
23-29
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Parameter
Description
UPBO parameters
l
UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter a (upstream band 1 reference Power Spectral Density parameter a). It ranges from 4000 to 8096 with the unit of 0.01, so the actual value range is from 40.00 to 80.96.
l
UPBO US1 band reference PSD parameter b (upstream band 1 reference Power Spectral Density parameter b). Its value range is ditto.
l
UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter a (upstream band 2 reference Power Spectral Density parameter a). Its value range is ditto.
l
UPBO US2 band reference PSD parameter b (upstream band 2 reference Power Spectral Density parameter b). Its value range is ditto.
l
UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter a (upstream band 3 reference Power Spectral Density parameter a). Its value range is ditto.
l
UPBO US3 band reference PSD parameter b (upstream band 3 reference Power Spectral Density parameter b). Its value range is ditto.
l
Sets whether VTU-R adjusts the UPBO using the electric distance configured by VTU-O.
mode-specific parameters for modem
Default
Power frequency spectrum setting. Each line can be configured with multiple transmission modes. Each transmission mode has its corresponding frequency parameters.
-
-
There must be a group of default power frequency spectrum parameters in a line. Mapping it to the profile, it is defmode. Not all transmission modes shall be configured with corresponding power frequency spectrum profile parameters. As defined in the standard, for a transmission mode, find the corresponding power frequency spectrum setting with priority. If you do not find it, use the default power frequency spectrum parameter, that is, the parameter of the defmode to activate the line. RFI notch configuration for modem
23-30
RFI notch is used to avoid amateur radio interference. To avoid radio interference, set several frequency ranges. Each range consists of the start tone and the end tone. Notch the corresponding frequency ranges, that is, do not use these frequency ranges. Up to 16 frequency ranges can be set.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Up to 16 frequency ranges can be set.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Parameter
Description
Default
PSD mask value upstream/downstream
The PSD mask defines the PSD of a series of breakpoints of transmit frequency bands. Determine the PSD of each sub-carrier by interpolation between two breakpoints. There are up to 16 upstream breakpoints and there are up to 32 downstream breakpoints.
Null for both upstream and downstrea m PSD.
PBO control upstream
This function guarantees that the SNR margin at the upstream channel receiver meets the upstream PSD mask requirements but reduces the transmit power.
Auto
Power cutback downstream
This function checks whether to enable the downstream power cutback function.
Disabled
Related Operation Table 23-5 lists the related operations for adding a VDSL2 line profile. Table 23-5 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 line profile To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete a VDSL2 line profile
vdsl line-profile delete
You cannot delete the default line profiles or a referenced line profile.
Modify a VDSL2 line profile
vdsl line-profile modify
After modification, the system prompts that the modified profile takes effect immediately.
Quickly add a VDSL2 line profile
vdsl line-profile quickadd
The system adopts noninteractive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl lineprofile quickadd command.
Quickly modify a VDSL2 line profile
vdsl line-profile quickmodify
The system adopts noninteractive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl lineprofile quickmodifycommand.
23.6 Adding a VDSL2 Channel Profile This operation enables you to add a VDSL2 channel profile.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-31
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Context l
The system has a default channel profile. The parameters in the default profile are the data for reference. You can create channel profiles according to the line conditions.
l
The created channel profiles are numbered from 2 to 128. You can specify the index or press Enter to enable the system to allocate an index.
l
You can type in parameters in interactive mode.
Configuration Flowchart Figure 23-8 shows the flowchart for adding a VDSL2 channel profile. Figure 23-8 Flowchart for adding a VDSL2 channel profile
Start Set interleaved delay for modem?
Name the profile?
No
No
Yes Set maximum interleaved delay downstream
Yes
Set maximum interleaved delay upstream
Set the channel profile
Select data path mode Set parameters for rate? Set the minimum impulse noise protection?
No
Yes
No
Yes Set minimum transmit rate downstream
Set minimum impulse noise protection downstream
Set maximum transmit rate downstream
Set minimum impulse noise protection upstream
Set minimum transmit rate upstream Set maximum transmit rate upstream
Start
23-32
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Procedure Step 1 Run the vdsl channel-profile add command to add a VDSL2 channel profile. Step 2 Run the display vdsl channel-profile command to query the added channel profile. ----End
Example To add VDSL2 channel profile 2, do as follows: Add VDSL2 channel profile 2. huawei(config)#vdsl channel-profile add 2 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Data path mode 1-ATM, 2-PTM, 3-Both (1~3) [3]: > Will you set the minimum impulse noise protection? (y/n) [n]:y > Minimum impulse noise protection downstream: > 1-noProtection 2-halfSymbol 3-singleSymbol 4-twoSymbols > 5-threeSymbols 6-fourSymbols 7-fiveSymbols 8-sixSymbols > 9-sevenSymbols 10-eightSymbols 11-nineSymbols 12-tenSymbols > 13-elevenSymbols 14-twelveSymbols 15-thirteenSymbols 16-fourteenSymbols > 17-fifteenSymbols 18-sixteenSymbols > Please select (1~18) [1]: > Minimum impulse noise protection upstream: > 1-noProtection 2-halfSymbol 3-singleSymbol 4-twoSymbols > 5-threeSymbols 6-fourSymbols 7-fiveSymbols 8-sixSymbols > 9-sevenSymbols 10-eightSymbols 11-nineSymbols 12-tenSymbols > 13-elevenSymbols 14-twelveSymbols 15-thirteenSymbols 16-fourteenSymbols > 17-fifteenSymbols 18-sixteenSymbols > Please select (1~18) [1]: > Will you set interleaving delay parameters? (y/n) [n]:y > Maximum interleaving delay downstream (0~200 ms) [20]: > Maximum interleaving delay upstream (0~200 ms) [20]: > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n) [n]:y > Minimum transmit rate downstream (128~100000 Kbps) [128]: > Maximum transmit rate downstream (128~100000 Kbps) [100000]: > Minimum transmit rate upstream (128~100000 Kbps) [128]: > Maximum transmit rate upstream (128~100000 Kbps) [100000]: Add profile 2 successfully
Query the added VDSL2 channel profile. huawei(config)#display vdsl channel-profile { |profile-index }:2 Command: display vdsl channel-profile 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Profile index: 2 Name: VDSL CHANNEL PROFILE 2 Data path mode : Both Minimum impulse noise protection downstream : NoProtection Minimum impulse noise protection upstream : NoProtection Maximum interleaving delay downstream(ms) : 20 Maximum interleaving delay upstream(ms) : 20 Minimum transmit rate downstream(Kbps) : 128 Maximum transmit rate downstream(Kbps) : 100000 Minimum transmit rate upstream(Kbps) : 128 Maximum transmit rate upstream(Kbps) : 100000 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 23-6 lists the parameters of a VDSL2 channel profile. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-33
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Table 23-6 Parameters of a VDSL2 channel profile Parameter
Description
Default
profile-index
You can enter a profile index, or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile index. The profile index is unique.
-
profile-name
You can enter a name or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile name.
-
Data path mode
If the set mode is different from the mode supported by the physical line, guarantee that the line activation with priority, and set adapting the board to the mode supported.
-
Maximum interleaved delay downstream/ upstream
Interleaved delay in downstream or upstream. It ranges from 0 ms to 200 ms.
20 ms
Minimum impulse noise protection downstream/ upstream
There are 18 options for downstream/upstream.
The first.
Minimum transmit rate downstream/ upstream
Ranges from 128 kbit/s to 100000 kbit/s.
128 kbit/s
Maximum transmit rate downstream/ upstream
Ranges from 128 kbit/s to 100000 kbit/s.
100000 kbit/s
Related Operation Table 23-7 lists the related operations for adding a VDSL2 channel profile. Table 23-7 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 channel profile
23-34
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete a VDSL2 channel profile
vdsl channel-profile delete
You cannot delete the default channel profiles or a referenced channel profile.
Modify a VDSL2 channel profile
vdsl channel-profile modify
After modification, the system prompts that the modified profile takes effect immediately.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Quickly add a VDSL2 channel profile
vdsl channel-profile quickadd
The system adopts noninteractive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl channel-profile add command.
Quickly modify a VDSL2 channel profile
vdsl channel-profile quickmodify
The system adopts noninteractive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl channel-profile modify command.
23.7 Adding a VDSL2 Line Template This operation enables you to add a VDSL2 line template. The line profile binds the specified line profile and channel profile. Use the line profile to activate ports.
Prerequisite The line profile and the channel profile have been configured.
Context l
The system has a default line template. The parameters in the default profile are the data for reference. You can create line profile according to the line conditions.
l
The created channel profiles are numbered from 2 to 128. When creating a profile, you can specify the index or press Enter to enable the system to allocate an idle index.
l
You can type in parameters in interactive mode.
Procedure Step 1 Run the vdsl line-template add command to add a VDSL2 line template. Step 2 Run the display vdsl line-template command to query the added line template. ----End To add a VDSL2 line template, do as follows: huawei(config)#vdsl line-template add 2 Start adding template Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the template (y/n) [n]: > Please set the line-profile index (1~128) [1]:3 > Will you set channel configuration parameters? (y/n) [n]:y
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-35
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service > > >
Please set the channel number (1~2) [1]: Channel1 configuration parameters: Please set the channel-profile index (1~128) [1]:2 Add template 2 successfully
Query the added VDSL2 line template. huawei(config)#display vdsl line-template { |template-index }:2 Command: display vdsl line-template 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Template index: 2 Name: VDSL LINE TEMPLATE 2 Line profile index : 3 Channel1 profile index : 2 Channel1 rate adaptation ratio downstream : Channel1 rate adaptation ratio upstream : ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parameter Description Table 23-8 lists the parameters of a VDSL2 line template. Table 23-8 Parameters of a VDSL2 line template Parameter
Description
Profile index
You can enter a line template index, or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile index. The profile index is unique.
Profile name
You can enter a name or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile name.
Line profile index
The index of the configured line profile.
Channel number
This enables you to set the number of channels the line supports. You can configure the second channel only after you have configured the first channel. When modifying the line template, if you input a channel number that is different from the last channel number, the system considers that you will reconfigure the following channel number, and then the configured parameters will be cleared.
Channel profile index
The index of the configured channel profile.
Related Operation Table 23-9 shows the related operations for configuring a VDSL2 line template.
23-36
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Table 23-9 Related operations for configuring a VDSL2 line template To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete a VDSL2 line template
vdsl line-template delete
You cannot delete a referenced extended line profile.
Modify a VDSL2 line template
vdsl line-template modify
After modification, the system prompts that the modified profile takes effect immediately.
Quickly add a VDSL2 line template
vdsl line-template quickadd
The system adopts non-interactive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl line-template add command.
Quickly modify a VDSL2 line template
vdsl line-template quickmodify
The system adopts non-interactive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl line-template modify command.
23.8 Adding a VDSL2 Line Alarm Profile This operation enables you to configure a VDSL2 line alarm profile so as to include the majority of parameters of all the VDSL2 ports in a line alarm profile. After the alarm profile is configured successfully, it can be directly used to activate the ports.
Context l
The VDSL2 line alarm profile contains a series of alarm thresholds to measure and monitor the performance of an activated VDSL2 line. When a statistic reaches the threshold, the MA5600 sends the alarm to the log host and the NMS.
l
When configuring a VDSL2 line alarm profile, you cannot delete profile 1, but you can modify it. The created line alarm profiles are numbered 2–50.
Configuration Flowchart Figure 23-9 shows the flowchart for adding a VDSL2 line alarm profile.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-37
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Figure 23-9 Flowchart for adding a VDSL2 line alarm profile Start
Name the profile?
No No
Set the line thresholds for CPE? Yes Yes Set the number of forward error correction seconds
Name the profile
set the line thresholds for CO? Yes Set the number of forward error correction seconds
Set the number of errored seconds
No Set the number of errored seconds
Set the number of severely errored seconds Set the number of loss of signal seconds
Set the number of severely errored seconds Set the number of loss of signal seconds
Set the number of unavailable seconds Set the number of failed full initialization
Set the number of unavailable seconds
End
Procedure Step 1 Run the vdsl alarm-profile add command to add a VDSL2 line alarm profile. Step 2 Run the display vdsl alarm-profile command to query the added VDSL2 line alarm profile. ----End
Example To add a VDSL2 line alarm profile, do as follows: Add VDSL2 line alarm profile 2. huawei(config)#vdsl alarm-profile add 2 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Will you set the line thresholds for CO? (y/n) [n]:y
23-38
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide > > > > > > > > > > > >
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
The number of forward error correction seconds (0~900) [0]:10 The number of errored seconds (0~900) [0]: The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: The number of loss of signal seconds (0~900) [0]: The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: Will you set the line thresholds for CPE? (y/n) [n]:y The number of forward error correction seconds (0~900) [0]:10 The number of errored seconds (0~900) [0]:10 The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: The number of loss of signal seconds (0~900) [0]: The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: The number of failed full initialization (0~900) [0]:5 Add profile 2 successfully
Query the added VDSL2 line alarm profile. huawei(config)#display vdsl alarm-profile { |profile-index }:2 Command: display vdsl alarm-profile 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Profile index: 2 Name: VDSL ALARM PROFILE 2 The number of forward error correction seconds : 10 The number of errored seconds : 0 The number of severely errored seconds : 0 The number of loss of signal seconds : 0 The number of unavailable seconds : 0 The number of forward error correction seconds : 10 The number of errored seconds : 0 The number of severely errored seconds : 0 The number of loss of signal seconds : 0 The number of unavailable seconds : 0 The number of failed full initialization : 5 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 23-10 lists parameters of a VDSL2 line alarm profile. Table 23-10 Parameters of a VDSL2 line alarm profile
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Parameter
Description
Profile index
You can enter a profile index or press Enter to enable the system to designate an index for it. The profile index is unique.
Profile name
The name of the configured line alarm profile.
Forward error correction seconds
Within the 15-minute performance data collection period, if the forward error correction seconds exceed the threshold, an alarm is reported. Otherwise, no alarm is reported.
Errored seconds
Within the 15-minute performance data collection period, if the errored seconds exceed the threshold, an alarm is reported. Otherwise, no alarm is reported.
Severely errored seconds
Within the 15-minute performance data collection period, if the severely errored seconds exceed the threshold, an alarm is reported. Otherwise, no alarm is reported.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-39
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Parameter
Description
Loss of signal seconds
Within the 15-minute performance data collection period, if the loss of signal seconds exceeds the threshold, an alarm is reported. Otherwise, no alarm is reported.
The number of unavailable seconds
Within the 15-minute performance data collection period, if the number of unavailable seconds exceeds the threshold, an alarm is reported. Otherwise, no alarm is reported.
Failed full initialization
Within the 15-minute performance data collection period, if the failed full initialization times exceed the threshold, an alarm is reported. Otherwise, no alarm is reported.
Related Operation Table 23-11 shows the related operations for adding a VDSL2 line alarm profile. Table 23-11 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 line alarm profile To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete a VDSL2 line alarm profile
vdsl alarm-profile delete
You cannot delete the default line alarm profiles or a referenced alarm profile.
Modify a VDSL2 line alarm profile
vdsl alarm-profile modify
After modification, the system prompts that the modified profile takes effect immediately.
Quickly add a VDSL2 line alarm profile
vdsl alarm-profile quickadd
The system adopts non-interactive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl alarm-profile add command.
Quickly modify a VDSL2 line alarm profile
vdsl alarm-profile quickmodify
The system adopts non-interactive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl alarm-profile modify command.
23.9 Adding a VDSL2 Channel Alarm Profile This operation enables you to add a channel alarm profile containing alarm thresholds for channel parameters.
Context You cannot delete channel alarm profile 1, but you can modify it. The created alarm profiles are numbered 2 to 50. 23-40
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
Configuration Flowchart Figure 23-10 shows the flowchart for adding a VDSL2 channel alarm profile. Figure 23-10 Flowchart for adding a VDSL2 channel alarm profile Start set the channel thresholds for the CPE? No Name the profile? Yes Set the alarm profile
No
Yes Set the number of coding violations counts Set the number of corrected blocks counts
No
set the channel thresholds for the CO? Yes Set the number of coding violations counts
Set the threshold of channel monitoring rate downstream Set the threshold of channel monitoring rate upstream
End Set the number of corrected blocks counts
Procedure Step 1 Run the vdsl channel-alarm-profile add command to add a VDSL2 channel alarm profile. Step 2 Run the display vdsl channel-alarm-profile command to query the added VDSL2 channel alarm profile. ----End
Example To add channel alarm profile 2, do as follows: Add channel alarm profile 2. huawei(config)#vdsl channel-alarm-profile add 2 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Will you set the channel thresholds for CO? (y/n) [n]:y > The number of coding violations counts (0~60000) [0]:10 > The number of corrected blocks counts (0~60000) [0]: > Will you set the channel thresholds for CPE? (y/n) [n]:y > The number of coding violations counts (0~60000) [0]:10 > The number of corrected blocks counts (0~60000) [0]:10 > The threshold of channel monitoring rate downstream
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-41
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service > > >
(0~100000Kbps) [0]:2048 The threshold of channel monitoring rate upstream (0~100000Kbps) [0]:4096 Add profile 2 successfully
Query the added VDSL2 channel alarm profile. huawei(config)#display vdsl channel-alarm-profile 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Profile index: 2 Name: VDSL CHANNEL ALARM PROFILE 2 The number of coding violations counts : 10 The number of corrected blocks counts : 0 The number of coding violations counts : 10 The number of corrected blocks counts : 10 The threshold of channel monitoring rate downstream(Kbps) : 2048 The threshold of channel monitoring rate upstream(Kbps) : 4096 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 23-12 lists the parameters of VDSL2 channel alarm profile. Table 23-12 Parameters of VDSL2 channel alarm profile Parameter
Description
Profile index
You can enter a profile index or press Enter to enable the system to allocate an index for it. The profile index is unique.
The number of coding violations counts
Within the 15-minute performance data collection period, if the number exceeds the set threshold, an alarm is reported. 0 indicates no alarm is needed.
The number of corrected blocks counts
Within the 15-minute performance data collection period, if the number exceeds the set threshold, an alarm is reported. 0 indicates no alarm is needed.
The threshold of channel monitoring rate upstream/downstream
If the activation rate of the current channel does not reach the set threshold, an alarm is reported. 0 indicates no alarm is needed.
Related Operation Table 23-13 lists the related operations for adding a VDSL2 alarm profile. Table 23-13 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 channel alarm profile
23-42
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete a VDSL2 channel alarm profile
vdsl channel-alarmprofile delete
You cannot delete the default channel alarm profiles and a reference channel alarm profile.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Modify a VDSL2 channel alarm profile
vdsl channel-alarmprofile modify
After modification, the system prompts the modified profile takes effect immediately.
Quickly add a VDSL2 channel alarm profile
vdsl channel-alarmprofile quickadd
The system adopts non-interactive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl channelalarm-profile add command.
Quickly modify a VDSL2 channel alarm profile
vdsl channel-alarmprofile quickmodify
The system adopts non-interactive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl channelalarm-profile modify command.
23.10 Adding a VDSL2 Alarm Template This operation enables you to add a VDSL2 alarm template.
Prerequisite The required line alarm profile and channel alarm profile has been configured.
Context l
The new alarm template binds the specified line alarm profile and channel alarm profile.
l
If you do not specify the line alarm profile and alarm profile, the alarm template binds the default line alarm profile and the channel alarm profile.
Procedure Step 1 Run the vdsl alarm-template add command to add a VDSL2 alarm template. Step 2 Run the display vdsl alarm-template command to query the VDSL2 alarm template. ----End To add an alarm template with index of 2, do as follows: huawei(config)#vdsl alarm-template add 2 Start adding template Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the template (y/n) [n]: > Please set the alarm-profile index (1~50) [1]:2 > Will you set channel configuration parameters? (y/n) [n]:y > Please set the channel number (1~2) [1]: > Please set the channel1 alarm-profile index (1~50) [1]:2 Add template 2 successfully
Query the alarm template 2. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-43
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
huawei(config)#display vdsl alarm-template 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Template index: 2 Name: VDSL ALARM TEMPLATE 2 Line alarm profile index : 2 Channel1 alarm profile index : 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parameter Description Table 23-14 lists all parameters of a VDSL2 alarm template. Table 23-14 Parameters for configuring a VDSL2 alarm template Parameter
Description
Profile index
You can enter an alarm template index, or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile index. The profile index is unique.
Profile name
You can enter a name or press Enter to enable the system to allocate a profile name.
Line alarm profile index
The index of the configured line alarm profile.
Channel number
l
This enables you to set the number of channels the line supports.
l
You can configure the second channel only after you have configured the first one.
l
When modifying the alarm template, if you input a channel number that is different from the last, the system considers that you will reconfigure the following channel number, and then the configured parameters will be cleared.
Channel alarm profile index
The index of the configured channel alarm profile.
Related Operation Table 23-15 lists the related operations for adding a VDSL2 alarm template. Table 23-15 Related operations for adding a VDSL2 alarm template
23-44
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete a VDSL2 alarm template
vdsl alarm-template delete
You cannot delete the default alarm profile and the referenced alarm profile .
Modify a VDSL2 alarm template
vdsl alarm-template modify
After modification, the system prompts that the modified template takes effect immediately.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Quickly add a VDSL2 alarm template
vdsl alarm-template quickadd
The system adopts non-interactive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl alarm-template add command.
Quickly modify a VDSL2 alarm template
vdsl alarm-template quickmodify
The system adopts non-interactive mode for the input of the parameter of the command. The command serves as a complement to the vdsl alarm-template modify command.
Bind a VDSL2 alarm template
alarm-config
A configured alarm profile can take effect only after it is bound with a VDSL2 port.
23.11 Binding an VDSL2 Alarm Template This operation enables you to bind a VDSL2 alarm template with a port. After the port is activated, monitor the line according to the alarm thresholds set in the ADSL2+ alarm template.
Context l
The thresholds in the VDSL2 alarm template take effect only after the template is bound with a port and the port is activated.
l
By default, a port is bound with alarm template 1 and all the alarm thresholds in the template are 0.
Procedure Step 1 Run the alarm-config command to bind an alarm template with a port. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the binding between the alarm template and the port. ----End
Example To bind alarm template 2 with port 1 of the VDSL2 board in 0/5, do as follows: huawei(config-if-vdsl-0/5)#alarm-config 1 2 huawei(config-if-vdsl-0/5)#display port state 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------Port Status Loopback Line Template Alarm Template ----------------------------------------------------------------1 Activating Disable 1 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-45
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23.12 Activating a VDSL2 Port This operation enables you to activate a VDSL2 port.
Prerequisite The VDSL2 line template has been configured.
Context Activation refers to the training between the VTU-C and VTU-R. During the training process, the system checks the line distance and line status based on settings included in the line profile, such as upstream/downstream line rate and SNR margin. The VTU-C negotiates with VTU-R to check whether the system can work in the normal state under the existing conditions. l
To activate a VDSL2 port, you need bind it with a VDSL2 line template. If the template is not specified, the system uses the profile bound wit the port last time to activate a VDSL2 port.
l
If the training succeeds, the VTU-C can communicate with VTU-R. At the moment, the port works in activated state, and is ready for service data communication.
l
When the VTU-R is online, the activation process ends after the completion of the training. When the VTU-R gets offline, the communication is terminated, and the VTU-C is in listening state. Once the VTU-T gets online, the training process begins automatically. When the training succeeds, the port is activated.
Procedure Step 1 Run the active command to activate all port on the service board. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the port status and the line profile bound to it. ----End
Example To activate all port on the VDSL2 board in slot using line profile 1, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface vdsl huawei(config-if-vdsl-0/2)#activate all template-index 1
To query the port status and the line profile bound with it, do as follows: huawei(config-if-vdsl-)#display port state all ----------------------------------------------------------------Port Status Loopback Line Template Alarm Template ----------------------------------------------------------------0 Activated Disable 1 1 1 Activated Disable 1 1 2 Activated Disable 1 1 3 Activated Disable 1 1 4 Activated Disable 1 1 5 Activated Disable 1 1 6 Activated Disable 1 1 7 Activated Disable 1 1 8 Activated Disable 1 1 9 Activated Disable 1 1
23-46
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
10 Activated Disable 1 1 11 Activated Disable 1 1 12 Activated Disable 1 1 13 Activated Disable 1 1 14 Activated Disable 1 1 15 Activated Disable 1 1 16 Activated Disable 1 1 17 Activated Disable 1 1 18 Activated Disable 1 1 19 Activated Disable 1 1 20 Activated Disable 1 1 21 Activated Disable 1 1 22 Activated Disable 1 1 23 Activated Disable 1 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------Total number of activated port : 24 Total number of unactivated port: 0
Related Operation Table 23-16 lists the related operations for activating a VDSL2 port. Table 23-16 Related operations for activating a VDSL2 port To...
Run the Command...
Activate a VDSL2 port
deactivate
Loopback a VDSL2 port
loopback
23.13 Querying a VDSL2 port This operation enables you to query a VDSL2 port.
Prerequisite The VDSL2 line template has been configured.
Context A VDSL2 port may be in activating, activated, deactivated or loopback state.
Inter-conversion between these states Figure 23-11 shows the inter-conversion between these states. Figure 23-11 Inter-conversion between these states undo loopback Loopback
activating deactivated deactivate
loopback
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Modem training succeeds
activate
Modem is off or powered off
activated
deactivate
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
23-47
23 Configuring the VDSL2 Service
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Procedure Run the display port state command to query comprehensive information of a VDSL2 port. ----End
Example Example: To query a VDSL2 port0/2/0, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface vdsl huawei(config-if-vdsl-)#display port state 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------Port Status Loopback Line_template Alm_template ------------------------------------------------------------------0 Deactivated Local 1 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 23-17 lists the related operations for querying a VDSL2 port. Table 23-17 Related operations for querying a VDSL2 port
23-48
To...
Run the Command...
Query the settings of a VDSL2 port
display parameter
Query the version of the VTU-C or VTU
display inventory
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
24
24 Configuring Protection for Upstream Link
Configuring Protection for Upstream Link
About This Chapter This chapter describes how to configure the protection for the upstream link on the MA5600. 24.1 Overview This chapter describes the service protection mechanism of the upstream port on the MA5600. 24.2 Configuration Example of the Upstream Link Protection This operation enables you to back up upstream links. 24.3 Configuring a Protection Group This operation enables you to configure a protection group. When the MA5600 is disconnected from the upper layer device physically due to some unknown causes, the MA5600 uses the standby line to transmit the subscriber services. 24.4 Configuring the Protection Group Weight This operation enables you to configure the protection group weight. When there are multiple protection groups on a control board, the system judges whether to implement active-standby switchover according to the protection group weight.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
24-1
24 Configuring Protection for Upstream Link
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
24.1 Overview This chapter describes the service protection mechanism of the upstream port on the MA5600.
Service Description l
The broadband access service of Internet becomes more and more popular, and users demand for both high performance and stable network access. As a result, carriers prefer the broadband access equipment that runs stably and has better automatic protection and self-healing capability.
l
The MA5600 adopts the active/standby mechanism to ensure the normal operation of the service. In addition, it is designed with the service protection mechanism of the upstream port. When the MA5600 is disconnected with the upper layer device physically due to some unknown causes, the MA5600 uses the standby line to transmit the user services.
Service Specifications The MA5600 provides three detection modes of the active/standby switchover to achieve the service protection of the upstream port.
24-2
l
Port status detection mode: It means that the two ports of a protection group, or the ports of the two boards are enabled. The port status determines whether to implement switchover.
l
Delay detection mode: It means that only one port in a protection group is enabled, and the other one is disabled. If the status of the port of the active control board is DOWN, disable the port. Then, enable the port of the standby control board. If the status of the port of the standby control board is UP, the switchover is performed. Otherwise, detection proceeds.
l
Delay enhanced detection mode: It means that one port in a protection group is enabled and the other one is disabled. If the status of the port of the active control board is DOWN, do not disable the port. Enable the port of the standby control board directly. If the status of the port of the standby control board is UP, the switchover is performed. Otherwise, detection proceeds.
l
Protection groups in the delay detection mode and the delay enhanced detection mode support optical ports, and the configuration of the duration for a enabled port in standby control board detection.
l
The delay detection mode and delay enhanced detection mode support the configuration of detection delay and detection frequency of a protection group.
l
The delay detection mode and delay enhanced detection mode support the configuration of the weight of protection groups. When there are multiple protection groups, the active/ standby switchover is performed only when the requirement is met, namely, the sum of the weights of protection groups in the condition that the port of the active control board is faulty and the port of the standby control board is normal is larger than that of protection groups in the condition that the port of the active control board is normal and the port of the standby control board is faulty.
l
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) detection mode: In this mode, the link aggregation protocol control is performed, the port fault is detected, and protection switchover function is triggered.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
24 Configuring Protection for Upstream Link
24.2 Configuration Example of the Upstream Link Protection This operation enables you to back up upstream links.
Context l
The MA5600 supports three detection modes for link protection: port status detection, delay detection mode, and delay enhanced detection mode.
l
The two ports of a link protection cannot be on a same upstream board, but the port numbers and port type of the two ports must be the same.
Networking Figure 24-1 shows a sample network for configuring the upstream link protection. Figure 24-1 Sample network for configuring the upstream link protection
Internet
Router
A
CON ETH MON
D G E GE 0/7/1
SCU
GE 0/8/1
SCU
MA5600
Mode m
PC
Configuration Flowchart Figure 24-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the upstream link protection.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
24-3
24 Configuring Protection for Upstream Link
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Figure 24-2 Flowchart for configuring the upstream link protection Start
Configure the protection group
Create a VLAN
Add the upstrem port to the VLAN
Add a service port to the VLAN
Save the data
End
Data Plan Table 24-1 shows the data plan for configuring the upstream link protection. Table 24-1 Data plan for configuring the upstream link protection Item
Data
VLAN ID
10
Upstream port
The 0/7/1 and 0/8/1
Protection group mode
Status detection mode
Gateway IP address
10.1.1.1/24
Service port
0/2/0
Procedure Step 1 Run the protect-group command to configure the protection group. huawei(config)#protect huawei(config-protect)#protect-group first 0/7/1 second 0/8/1 eth workmode portstate
Step 2 Run the vlan to create a VLAN. 24-4
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
24 Configuring Protection for Upstream Link
huawei(config-protect)#quit huawei(config)#vlan 10 smart
Step 3 Run the port vlan command to add the upstream port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 1 huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/8 1
Step 4 Run the service-port command add to a service port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 adsl 0/2/0 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 5 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Verification After the configuration, users can access the Internet. When the uplink of upstream port 0/7/1 fails, the system automatically transfers the services to the uplink of upstream port 0/8/1. In this way, users can still access the Internet.
24.3 Configuring a Protection Group This operation enables you to configure a protection group. When the MA5600 is disconnected from the upper layer device physically due to some unknown causes, the MA5600 uses the standby line to transmit the subscriber services.
Context The two ports in a protection group must be on different upstream ports of the upstream board and of the same type. The two ports in the protection group must be in the same aggregation group, and the aggregation group must contains only the only two ports.
Procedure Step 1 Run the protect-group command to configure a protection group. Step 2 Run the display protect-group command to query the protection group. ----End
Example To configure a protection group that consists of ports 0/7/1 and 0/8/1, do as follows: huawei(config-protect)#protect-group first 0/7/1 second 0/8/1 eth workmode portstate huawei(config-protect)#display protect-group --------------------------------------------------------------------------FirstIntf SecondIntf Enable ActiveFlag ProtectType WorkMode --------------------------------------------------------------------------0/7/1 0/8/1 Enable First MainBoard-PORT PortState ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
24-5
24 Configuring Protection for Upstream Link
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Related Operation Table 24-2 lists the related operation for configuring a protection group. Table 24-2 Related operation for configuring a protection group To...
Run the Command...
Delete a protection group
undo protect-group
24.4 Configuring the Protection Group Weight This operation enables you to configure the protection group weight. When there are multiple protection groups on a control board, the system judges whether to implement active-standby switchover according to the protection group weight.
Context Only the delay detection mode and the delay enhanced detection mode support the configuration of the protection group weight.
Procedure Step 1 Run the protect-group command to configure the protection group on a port and configure the protection group weight. Step 2 Run the display protect-group command to query the protection group weight. ----End
Example To configure the protection group on ports 0/7/1 and 0/8/1 in delay enhanced detection mode and configure the protection group weight as 60, do as follows: huawei(config-protect)#protect-group first 0/7/1 second 0/8/1 eth workmode timebis weight 60 huawei(config-protect)#display protect-group { frame/slot||frame/slot/port }:0/7/1 Command: display protect-group 0/7/1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------FirstIntf ：0/7/1 SecondIntf ：0/8/1 CurrentIntf ：First Enable ：Enable ProtectType ：ETH WorkMode ：Timebis Standby-On-Time（10ms）：40 Weight ：60 HoldTime（10ms） ：0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24-6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Configuring Device Subtending
About This Chapter This chapter describes the Ethernet technology and how to configure the device subtending on the MA5600. 25.1 Overview The MA5600 supports multiple types of Ethernet ports and other DSLAM devices can be subtended to these Ethernet ports. This section describes the service description and service specifications of the subtending device. 25.2 Configuration Example of the Ethernet Access Service The MA5600 provides the basic PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) dialup service for the users accessing through the ETH board that works in the normal state. 25.3 Configuration Example of the Subtended Network Through the SCU Board The example shows how to subtend two MA5600 devices. 25.4 Configuration Example of Subtending Device Through the ETHA Board This operation enables you to subtend two MA5600 devices. 25.5 Configuring the Working Mode of the ETH Board This operation enables you to configure the working mode of the ETH board. In the private line access, enterprise users directly access the device through the ETH board. In this case, you need to run the related command to configure the working mode of the ETH board as QinQ. 25.6 Configuring the Physical Attributes of an Ethernet Port 25.7 Enabling the Flow Control on an Ethernet Port This operation enables the flow control on an Ethernet port. 25.8 Enabling the Traffic Suppression This operation enables the traffic suppression on a port to guarantee the stable network services. 25.9 Enabling the Ethernet Port Aggregation This operation enables Ethernet port aggregation. 25.10 Mirroring an Ethernet Port This operation enables the mirroring function of an Ethernet port. This helps analyze the cause of a faulty port. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-1
25 Configuring Device Subtending
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25.11 Adding an Ethernet Port to a VLAN This operation enables you to add Ethernet ports to a VLAN. 25.12 Configuring the Outer QinQ VLAN of the Ethernet Port This operation enables you to configure the outer QinQ VLAN of the Ethernet port. When the ETH board works in QinQ mode, you need to configure the QinQ VLAN of the port. 25.13 Setting the Native VLAN for an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the native VLAN for an Ethernet port.
25-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
25.1 Overview The MA5600 supports multiple types of Ethernet ports and other DSLAM devices can be subtended to these Ethernet ports. This section describes the service description and service specifications of the subtending device.
Service Description The MA5600 supports subtended through the Ethernet port. Multiple DSLAMs at different tiers can be subtended through the GE/FE port to extend the network coverage and satisfy the requirements for a large capacity. For details on the subtended network, refer to the chapter "Subtended Network Configuration" in the Feature Description.
Service Specifications The MA5600 provides Ethernet ports through the SCU board and ETH board. The Ethernet ports provided by the SCU board are used for upstream service transmission and subtended network configuration. The ETH board also provides the basic PPPoE dialup access service. Table 25-1 lists the Ethernet ports of the MA5600 Table 25-1 Ethernet ports of the MA5600 Port Type
Port
Working Mode
Rate
100 Base-FX
100M single-mode/ multiple-mode optical port
Full duplex
100 Mbit/s
1000 Base-TX
1000M electrical port
l
Full duplex
l
10 Mbit/s
l
Half duplex
l
100 Mbit/s
l
Auto negotiation
l
1000 Mbit/s
1000M multiple-mode optical port
l
Full duplex
1000 Mbit/s
l
Auto negotiation
1000M single-mode optical port
l
Full duplex
l
Auto negotiation
1000 Base-SX
1000 Base-LX
1000 Mbit/s
25.2 Configuration Example of the Ethernet Access Service The MA5600 provides the basic PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) dialup service for the users accessing through the ETH board that works in the normal state. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Context The PPPoE protocol packets of the users accessing through the ETH board are transparently transmitted through the MA5600 to the upper layer device for authentication. Figure 25-1 Sample network for configuring the Ethernet access service Router Internet
CON ETH MON
E T H A SCU
MA5600
LSW
PC
Data Plan Table 25-2 lists the data plan for the Ethernet access service. Table 25-2 Data plan for the Ethernet access service Item
Data
MA5600
Uplink port: 0/7/0 ETH access port: 0/6/0 VLAN ID: 10
Prerequisite
25-4
l
The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l
All boards of the MA5600 are normal.
l
The working mode of the ETH board is normal.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Configuration Flowchart Figure 25-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the Ethernet access service. Figure 25-2 Flowchart for configuring the Ethernet access service Start
Create a standard VLAN
Add sn uplink port
Add an access port
Save the data
End
Procedure Step 1 Create a standard VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
Step 2 Add an uplink port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
Step 3 Add an access port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/6 0
Step 4 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration, the PCs of the access users can access the network through PPPoE dialup.
25.3 Configuration Example of the Subtended Network Through the SCU Board The example shows how to subtend two MA5600 devices. l
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
All the network devices and lines are normal. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending l
All the boards in the MA5600 are in the normal state.
l
The Ethernet port 0/7/1 of MA5600_A and the Ethernet port 0/7/0 of MA5600_B are of the same port type.
l
The Ethernet port 0/7/1 of MA5600_A and the Ethernet port 0/7/0 of MA5600_B are of the same auto-negotiation for their rates and duplex modes.
l
Perform the following tasks on MA5600_A. The MA5600_B need not be configured with a subtended port. The other configurations of MA5600_B are the same as those of MA5600_A.
Networking Figure 25-3 show a sample network for configuring the subtended network. Figure 25-3 Sample network for configuring the subtended network IP
CON ETH MON GE 0/7/0 GE 0/7/1
MA5600_A SCU A D G G
CON ETH MON GE 0/7/0 GE 0/7/1
SCU
CPE
MA5600_B
PC
Configuration Flowchart Figure 25-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the subtended network.
25-6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Figure 25-4 Flowchart for configuring the subtended network Start
Create a standard VLAN
Add an upstream port to the VLAN
Add a subtending port to the VLAN
End
Procedure Step 1 Create a standard VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 9 standard
Step 2 Add an upstream port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 9 0/7 0
Step 3 Add a subtending port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 9 0/7 1
Step 4 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration, you can configure various services through both the MA5600_A and MA5600_B. Users of MA5600_B can access the Internet.
25.4 Configuration Example of Subtending Device Through the ETHA Board This operation enables you to subtend two MA5600 devices.
Prerequisite l
The network device and the line are in the normal state.
l
All boards of the MA5600 are in the normal state.
l
Ethernet port 0/6/0 on MA5600_A and Ethernet port 0/7/0 on MA5600_B are of the same type, and the port rate and duplex mode is auto negotiation.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-7
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending l
Configuration on MA5600_B is finished and it is not repeated here.
Networking Figure 25-5 shows a sample network for subtending devices Figure 25-5 Sample network for subtending devices Internet
E
CON ETH
T H A GE 0/6/0
GE 0/7/0
SCU A
MA5600_A
CON ETH
D G G
GE 0/7/1 SCU
MA5600_B
Configuration Flowchart Figure 25-6 shows the flowchart for configuring subtending devices
25-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Figure 25-6 Flowchart for configuring subtending devices Start
Create a standard VLAN
Add an upstream port to the VLAN
Add a subtending port to the VLAN
End
NOTE
The mentioned configuration is performed on MA5600_A. No subtending port is needed to be configured on MA5600_B. For other configurations, they are the same on MA5600_A and MA5600_B.
Procedure Step 1 Create a standard VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
Step 2 Add an upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
Step 3 Add a subtending port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/6 0
Step 4 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration, the subtended devices can be configured with services and users connected to MA5600_B can access the Internet.
25.5 Configuring the Working Mode of the ETH Board This operation enables you to configure the working mode of the ETH board. In the private line access, enterprise users directly access the device through the ETH board. In this case, you need to run the related command to configure the working mode of the ETH board as QinQ.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-9
25 Configuring Device Subtending
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Context l
The ETH board can work in normal mode or QinQ mode. The switchover of the working mode of the ETH board will cause the resetting of the ETH board.
l
If you need to switch the working mode of the ETH board from the normal mode to the QinQ mode, check whether the ETH board is configured with the ETH OAM and the multicast subtending port services. If the two services are configured, the switchover of the working mode is rejected.
l
If the working mode of the ETH board is switched from the normal mode to the QinQ mode, and the native VLAN of the subtending port is not all "1"s, the switchover of the working mode is rejected.
l
If the working mode of the ETH board is switched from the QinQ mode to the normal mode, and the QinQ VLAN of the subtending port is not all "1"s, the switchover of the working mode is rejected.
l
If the specified port is not in the specified VLAN, the switchover of the working mode is rejected.
Procedure Step 1 Run the eth mode command to configure the working mode of the ETH board. Step 2 Run the display eth mode command to query the working mode of the ETH board. ----End
Example To configure the working mode of the ETH board residing in slot 0/6 as the QinQ mode, do as follows: huawei(config)#eth mode qinq 0/6 This operation will reset the ETH board, are you sure to continue? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config)#display eth mode 0/6 Current eth mode is qinq
25.6 Configuring the Physical Attributes of an Ethernet Port 25.6.1 Setting the Auto-negotiation Mode of an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the auto-negotiation mode of an Ethernet port. 25.6.2 Setting the Duplex Mode of an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the duplex mode of an Ethernet port. 25.6.3 Setting the Rate of an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the rate of an Ethernet port. 25.6.4 Setting the Network Cable Type of an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the network cable type of an Ethernet port.
25.6.1 Setting the Auto-negotiation Mode of an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the auto-negotiation mode of an Ethernet port. 25-10
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Context l
By default, the auto-neg switch of the Ethernet electric port is enabled.
l
By default, the auto-neg switch of the Ethernet optical port is disabled.
Procedure Step 1 Run the auto-neg command to set the auto-negotiation mode of an Ethernet port. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the configuration of the Ethernet port. ----End
Example To disable the auto-negotiation mode of Ethernet port 0/7/1 on the SCU board, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#auto-neg 1 disable huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#display port state 1 Optics module status is absence The port is active Native VLAN ID is 1 Ethernet port is offline Ethernet port is full duplex Ethernet port rate is 1000M Ethernet port does not support flow control Ethernet port does not support line-selfadaptive
25.6.2 Setting the Duplex Mode of an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the duplex mode of an Ethernet port.
Context l
The duplex of an Ethernet port can be full duplex, half duplex, or auto-negotiation. When setting the duplex mode of an Ethernet port, make sure that the duplex of the Ethernet port must be the same as that of the interconnected port on the peer device. This prevents communication failure.
l
When a port is in auto-negotiation mode, to change its duplex mode to full duplex, disable the auto-negotiation mode of the port first.
l
This operation takes effect on the electrical port only.
l
By default: –
The FE electrical port is in auto-negotiation mode.
–
The FE optical port is in full duplex mode.
Procedure Step 1 Run the auto-neg command to disable the auto negotiation mode of an Ethernet port. Step 2 Run the duplex command to set the duplex mode of the Ethernet port. Step 3 Run the display port state command to query the duplex mode of the port. ----End Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-11
25 Configuring Device Subtending
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Example To change the auto-negotiation mode of Ethernet port 0/7/1 to full duplex, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#auto-neg 1 disable huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#duplex 1 full huaweii(config-if-scu-0/7)#display port state 1 Optics module status is normal The port is active Native VLAN ID is 1 Ethernet port is offline Ethernet port is full duplex Ethernet port rate is 1000M Ethernet port does not support flow control Ethernet port does not support line-selfadaptive
25.6.3 Setting the Rate of an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the rate of an Ethernet port.
Context When setting the rate of an Ethernet port, make sure that the rate of the Ethernet port must be the same as that of the interconnected port on the peer device. This prevents communication failure. By default: l
The rate of the FE/GE electrical port is auto-negotiation.
l
The rate of the GE optical port is 1000 Mbit/s.
l
The rate of the FE optical port is 100 Mbit/s.
l
When a port is in auto-negotiation mode, to change its rate to a specific value, disable the auto-negotiation mode first.
l
The rate of the 1000 Mbit/s electrical port is not compulsorily 1000 Mbit/s but can be autonegotiated to 1000 Mbit/s.
Procedure Step 1 Run the auto-neg command to set the rate of an Ethernet port. Step 2 Run the speed command to query the configured rate of the Ethernet port. ----End
Example To set the rate of a GE optical port to 1000 Mbit/s, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#auto-neg 1 disable huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#speed 1 1000 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#display port state 1 Optics module status is normal The port is active Native VLAN ID is 1 Ethernet port is offline Ethernet port is full duplex Ethernet port rate is 1000M Ethernet port does not support flow control Ethernet port does not support line-selfadaptive
25-12
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
25.6.4 Setting the Network Cable Type of an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the network cable type of an Ethernet port.
Context l
The Ethernet electrical port uses a straight-through cable or a crossover cable. To set the type of the network cable of the Ethernet port, run the mdi command.
l
The default network cable type is auto (auto-adaptive).
l
Such setting only applies to the Ethernet electrical port.
l
When the Ethernet electrical port is not in auto-negotiation mode, the network cable type cannot be configured as auto.
Procedure Step 1 Run the mdi command to set the network cable type of an Ethernet port. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the configured network cable type. ----End
Example To set the network cable type of Ethernet electrical port 0/7/0 as straight-through cable, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#mdi 1 normal huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#display port state 1 The port is active Native VLAN ID is 1 Ethernet port is online Ethernet port is full duplex Ethernet port rate is 100M Ethernet port does not support flow control Line-adaptive function of the ethernet port is normal
25.7 Enabling the Flow Control on an Ethernet Port This operation enables the flow control on an Ethernet port.
Context When the traffic exceeds a certain level (> 1 Gbit/s for the GE port or > 100 Mbit/s for the FE port), the MA5600 sends PAUSE frames to inform the remote PC to reduce the traffic so as to reduce the packet loss rate, and response to the PAUSE frames sent from remote PC. The process involved is called flow control. l
The control function requires the supports from both the MA5600 and the peer device. If the peer device supports flow control, enable the flow control of the MA5600 If the peer device does not support the flow control, disable the flow control of the MA5600.
l
By default, the flow control on the Ethernet port is disabled.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-13
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Procedure Step 1 Run the flow-control command to enable the flow control on an Ethernet port. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the set flow control. ----End
Example To enable the flow control on all ports, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#flow-control all huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#display port state all ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Port Optic Native MDI Speed Duplex Flow- Active Link Type Status VLAN (Mbps) Ctrl State ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 GE absence 1 1000 full on active offline 1 GE absence 1 1000 full on active offline -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 25-3 lists the related operation for enabling the flow control of an Ethernet port. Table 25-3 Related operation for enabling the flow control of an Ethernet port To...
Run the command...
Disable the flow control on the Ethernet port
undo flow-control
25.8 Enabling the Traffic Suppression This operation enables the traffic suppression on a port to guarantee the stable network services.
Context There are three traffic suppression modes available: l
Broadcast storm suppression Broadcast storm suppression refers to discarding broadcast traffic when it exceeds a preset threshold to guarantee stable network services.
25-14
l
Unknown unicast suppression
l
Unknown multicast storm suppression
l
By default, the level of broadcast storm suppression and unknown unicast suppression is 7.
l
It is suggested to enable broadcast storm suppression according to network conditions.
l
When IGMP Proxy or IGMP Snooping is enabled, unknown multicast packets are not suppressed. When IGMP proxy and IGMP snooping are disabled, unknown multicast packets are suppressed. By default, the level of unknown multicast suppression is 7. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Procedure Step 1 Run the traffic-suppress command to enable the traffic suppression on a port. Step 2 Run the display traffic-suppress command to query the configuration of the traffic suppression. ----End To set broadcast storm suppression for all ports to level 1, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#traffic-suppress all broadcast value 1 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#display traffic-suppress 0 Traffic suppression ID definition: --------------------------------------------------------------------NO. Min bandwidth(kbps) Max bandwidth(kbps) Package number(pps) --------------------------------------------------------------------1 6 145 12 2 12 291 24 3 24 582 48 4 48 1153 95 5 97 2319 191 6 195 4639 382 7 390 9265 763 8 781 18531 1526 9 1562 37063 3052 10 3125 74126 6104 11 6249 148241 12207 12 12499 296483 24414 --------------------------------------------------------------------Current traffic suppression ID of broadcast : 1 Current traffic suppression ID of multicast : 7 Current traffic suppression ID of unicast : 7
To set unknown unicast suppression for port 0/7/0 to level 7, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#traffic-suppress 0 unicast value 1 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#display traffic-suppress 0 Traffic suppression ID definition: --------------------------------------------------------------------NO. Min bandwidth(kbps) Max bandwidth(kbps) Package number(pps) --------------------------------------------------------------------1 6 145 12 2 12 291 24 3 24 582 48 4 48 1153 95 5 97 2319 191 6 195 4639 382 7 390 9265 763 8 781 18531 1526 9 1562 37063 3052 10 3125 74126 6104 11 6249 148241 12207 12 12499 296483 24414 --------------------------------------------------------------------Current traffic suppression ID of broadcast : 1 Current traffic suppression ID of multicast : 7 Current traffic suppression ID of unicast : 1
To set multicast packet suppression for port 0/7/0 to level 7, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#traffic-suppress 0 multicast value 1 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#display traffic-suppress 0 Traffic suppression ID definition: --------------------------------------------------------------------NO. Min bandwidth(kbps) Max bandwidth(kbps) Package number(pps) --------------------------------------------------------------------1 6 145 12
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-15
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
2 12 291 24 3 24 582 48 4 48 1153 95 5 97 2319 191 6 195 4639 382 7 390 9265 763 8 781 18531 1526 9 1562 37063 3052 10 3125 74126 6104 11 6249 148241 12207 12 12499 296483 24414 --------------------------------------------------------------------Current traffic suppression ID of broadcast : 1 Current traffic suppression ID of multicast : 1 Current traffic suppression ID of unicast : 1
Related Operation Table 25-4 lists the related operations for enabling traffic suppression. Table 25-4 Related operations for enabling traffic suppression To...
Run the Command...
Disable unknown unicast packet suppression
undo traffic-suppress unicast
Disable unknown multicast packet suppression
undo traffic-suppress multicast
Disable broadcast storm suppression
undo traffic-suppress broadcast
25.9 Enabling the Ethernet Port Aggregation This operation enables Ethernet port aggregation.
Context Port aggregation means aggregation of multiple ports together to expand the bandwidth. The input and output load can be distributed among the member ports. l
The SCU board supports up to 3 port aggregation groups.
l
One aggregation group supports up to 6 Ethernet ports.
l
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is run in the static port aggregation but not in the manual port aggregation.
When configuring the port aggregation, pay attention to the following points:
25-16
l
All the ports must work in full duplex mode.
l
The rates of all the ports must be the same, and cannot be configured as auto-negotiation.
l
The default VLAN (PVID) and VLAN attributes of all the ports must be the same.
l
One port belongs to only one aggregation group.
l
No mirror destination port is included.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Procedure Step 1 Run the duplex command to set the duplex mode of the Ethernet port. Step 2 Run the speed command to set the port rate. Step 3 Run the link-aggregation command to set the port aggregation. Step 4 Run the display link-aggregation command to query the related information about the aggregated ports. ----End
Example To set the Ethernet port aggregation, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#duplex 0 full huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#duplex 1 full huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#speed 0 1000 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#speed 1 1000 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#quit huawei(config)#link-aggregation 0/7 0-1 ingress huawei(config)#display link-aggregation all -----------------------------------------------------Master port link-aggregation mode Port NUM -----------------------------------------------------0/7/1 egress-ingress 2 -----------------------------------------------------Total: 1 link-aggregation(s)
Related Operation Table 25-5 lists the related operation for enabling the Ethernet port aggregation. Table 25-5 Related operation for enabling the Ethernet port aggregation To...
Run the command...
Delete the Ethernet port aggregation
undo link-aggregation
25.10 Mirroring an Ethernet Port This operation enables the mirroring function of an Ethernet port. This helps analyze the cause of a faulty port.
Context l
You can configure only one mirroring destination port on the SCU board or ETH board.
l
You can mirror multiple ports to one destination port.
l
The mirroring destination port cannot be the aggregated port.
Procedure Step 1 Run the mirror port command to enable the mirroring function of an Ethernet port. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-17
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Step 2 Run the display mirror command to query the configuration of the Ethernet port. ----End
Example To mirror the transmit and receive packets of port 0 to port 1, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-)#mirror port 0 1 all
Run the display mirror command and you can find that the port mirroring function is enabled. huawei(config-if-scu-)#display mirror -----------------------------------------------Source port Direction Destination port -----------------------------------------------0 all 1 ------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 25-6 lists the related operation for enabling the mirroring function of an Ethernet port. Table 25-6 Related operation for enabling the mirroring function of an Ethernet port To...
Run the command...
Display the mirroring of an Ethernet port
display mirror
25.11 Adding an Ethernet Port to a VLAN This operation enables you to add Ethernet ports to a VLAN.
Procedure Step 1 Run the port vlan command to add an Ethernet Port to a VLAN. Step 2 Run the display vlan command to query the upstream port of a VLAN. ----End
Example To add Ethernet port 0/7/0 to VLAN 2, do as follows: huawei(config)#port vlan 2
0
Run the display vlan command to query the upstream port of the VLAN. huawei(config)#display vlan 2 { |to }: Command: display vlan 2 VLAN ID: 2 VLAN type: MUX VLAN attribute: common ------------------------------
25-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
F/S /P Native VLAN State -----------------------------/0 1 up -----------------------------Standard port number: 1 Service virtual port number: 0
Related Operation Table 25-7 lists the related operation for adding an Ethernet Port to a VLAN. Table 25-7 Related operation for adding an Ethernet Port to a VLAN To...
Run the command...
Delete a port from a VLAN
undo port vlan
25.12 Configuring the Outer QinQ VLAN of the Ethernet Port This operation enables you to configure the outer QinQ VLAN of the Ethernet port. When the ETH board works in QinQ mode, you need to configure the QinQ VLAN of the port.
Context When the ETH board adopts the private line access, the ETH board works in QinQ mode. In this case, you need to configure the QinQ VLAN of the port. For how to configure the working mode of the ETH board, refer to "25.5 Configuring the Working Mode of the ETH Board." l
If the ETH board works in normal mode, the QinQ VLAN of the port cannot be configured and queried.
l
If the ETH board works in QinQ mode, the QinQ VLAN of the port cannot be configured and queried.
l
If the specified port is not in the specified VLAN, the QinQ VLAN cannot be configured.
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface eth command to enter the ETH mode. Step 2 Run the qinq-vlan command to configure the QinQ VLAN of the ETH port. ----End
Example To configure the QinQ VLAN of port 0 in slot 0/6 as 100, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface eth 0/6/0 huawei(config-if-eth-0/6)#qinq-vlan 0 vlan 100
Related Operation Table 25-8 lists the related operation for configuring the outer QinQ VLAN of the Ethernet port. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-19
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
Table 25-8 Related operation for configuring the outer QinQ VLAN of the Ethernet port To...
Run the Command...
Configure the working mode of the ETH board
eth mode
25.13 Setting the Native VLAN for an Ethernet Port This operation enables you to set the native VLAN for an Ethernet port.
Context l
The default Native VLAN of the Ethernet ports is VLAN 1.
l
When the Ethernet port is used as the upstream port: –
If the native VLAN of the Ethernet port is the same as the VLAN to which this Ethernet port belongs, the Ethernet port will remove the VLAN Tag of the upstream packets.
–
If the native VLAN of the Ethernet port is different from the VLAN to which this Ethernet port belongs, the Ethernet port will keep the VLAN Tag of the upstream packets.
l
Before specifying the native VLAN of an Ethernet port, the VLAN must be included in the port.
l
Whether the native VLAN must be set for the upstream port depends on the upper-layer equipment connected to the port. –
If the upper-layer equipment supports the packets containing the VLAN tag, the native VLAN of the upstream port of the MA5600 must be different from the VLAN to which the upstream port belongs.
–
If the upper-layer equipment does not support the packets containing the VLAN tag, the native VLAN of the upstream port of the MA5600 must be the same as the VLAN to which the upstream port belongs.
l
If the working mode of the ETH board is normal mode, the QinQ VLAN value of the port cannot be configured or queried.
l
If the working mode of the ETH board is QinQ mode, the Native VLAN value of the port cannot be configured or queried.
Procedure Step 1 Run the native-vlan command to set the native VLAN of an Ethernet port. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the configuration of the Native VLAN. ----End
Example To set the native VLAN of Ethernet port0/7/0 as VLAN 10, do as follows: huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 10 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#display port state 0 Optics module status is normal
25-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
25 Configuring Device Subtending
The port is active Native VLAN ID is 10 Ethernet port is online Ethernet port is full duplex Ethernet port rate is 1000M Ethernet port does not support flow control Ethernet port does not support line-selfadaptive
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
25-21
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
About This Chapter This chapter describes how to configure the ATM-DSLAM service supported by the MA5600. 26.1 Overview This section describes ATM-DSLAM access service and specification on the MA5600. 26.2 Configuration Example of the ATM-DSLAM Access This example shows how to configure the ATM-DSLAM so that the user can access the Internet in OPTIC, IMA and E3 modes. 26.3 Setting the OPTIC Port Mode This operation enables you to set the OPTIC port mode. 26.4 Setting the OPTIC Port Type This operation enables you to set the optical port type. 26.5 Adding an IMA Group This operation enables you to add an IMA group. 26.6 Setting the IMA Group Mode This operation enables you to set the clock mode, CRC4 multiframe and scramble of the IMA group. 26.7 Adding an IMA Link This operation enables you to add an IMA link. 26.8 Setting the Line Type for an E3 Port This operation enables you to set the line type for an E3 port. 26.9 Setting the E3 Port Type This operation enables you to set the E3 port type. 26.10 Setting the Tx Clock of an E3 Port This operation enables you to set the Tx clock of an E3 port. 26.11 Clearing the Statistics of an E3 Port This operation enables you to clear the statistics of an E3 port.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
26-1
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
26.1 Overview This section describes ATM-DSLAM access service and specification on the MA5600.
Service Description In the evolution from ATM networks to IP networks, carriers will replace their ATM-DSLAM network devices in the access layer with IP network devices. In this evolution, a large number of ATM network devices still exist in the network for a long time. The MA5600 provides ATM ports for lower level ATM network devices to access the network. For details on the ATM subtending, refer to the chapter "ATM Subtending" in the Feature Description.
Service Specifications The MA5600 supports ATM access through the subboards on the AIUG board. The subboards provide 155M ATM ports, IMA E1 port or IMA E3 port to connect to the ATM-DSLAM devices in the downstream direction. Figure 26-1 shows a sample network of ATM-DSLAM access. Figure 26-1 Sample network of the ATM-DSLAM access
FE/GE
MA5600 MPLS
Ethernet switching
GE bus ATM access
Service traffic A
ATM-DSLAM
Service traffic B
The MA5600 provides two upstream modes: through FE/GE ports on the SCU board or through the MPLS module. l
Through the FE/GE ports on the SCU In the upstream direction, service traffic A from the ATM-DSLAM is directly sent to the upper layer device through the Ethernet switching module on the SCU.
l
26-2
Through the MPLS module Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
In ATM over Ethernet mode, MPLS upstream supports mapping between PVC and Pseudo Wire (PW); while in Ethernet mode, MPLS supports mapping between VLAN and PW. This chapter describes the configuration through the GE ports on the SCU board. For the configuration through the MPLS, refer to the chapter "27 Configuring MPLS Access."
26.2 Configuration Example of the ATM-DSLAM Access This example shows how to configure the ATM-DSLAM so that the user can access the Internet in OPTIC, IMA and E3 modes.
Networking Figure 26-2 shows a sample network for configuring the ATM-DSLAM access. Figure 26-2 Sample network for configuring the ATM-DSLAM access Router Internet
A I
CON ETH MON
U G SCU
MA5600
ATM-DSLAM Modem
PC
Data Plan Table 26-1 shows the data plan for configuring the ATM-DSLAM access. Table 26-1 Data plan for configuring the ATM-DSLAM access Item
Data
AIUG
Service port: 0/5/0 OPTIC port type: UNI
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
26-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
Item
Data
SCU
Upstream port: 0/7/0
NOTE
l
In this example, only the configuration at the MA5600 side is introduced.
l
Different subboards are needed for configuring ATM DSLAM access in different modes.
Configuration Flowchart Figure 26-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the ATM-DSLAM access. Figure 26-3 Flowchart for configuring the ATM-DSLAM access Start
Set working mode of port
Configure port type
Create VLAN
Add upstream port
Add service port
End
Procedure Step 1 Configure the OPTIC port. 1.
Select the command mode. huawei(config)#interface aiu 0/5 huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#sub-interface optic huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.optic)#
2.
Set the port working mode. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.optic)#port mode 0 stm-1
3.
Set the interface type. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.optic)#uni-nni-set 0 uni huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.optic)#quit huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#quit
4.
Create a VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 mux
26-4
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
5.
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
Add the upstream port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
6.
Add the service virtual port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 atm 0/5/0 vpi 1 vci 40 rx-cttr 2 upc off tx-cttr 2 upc off
Step 2 Configure the IMA access. 1.
Select the command mode. huawei(config)#interface aiu 0/5 huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#sub-interface ima huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#
2.
Add an IMA group. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima group add 0 version1.0 1 1 ctc 0 128 2 2 1
3.
Add an IMA link. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima IMA link add successfully huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima IMA link add successfully huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima IMA link add successfully huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima IMA link add successfully
4.
link add 0 0 link add 0 1 link add 0 2 link add 0 3
Set the clock mode. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima group mode clockmode 0 system Set IMA group transmit clock successfully
5.
Create a VLAN. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#quit huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#vlan 10 mux
6.
Add the upstream port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
7.
Add the service virtual port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 atm 0/5/0 vpi 1 vci 40 rx-cttr 2 upc off tx-cttr 2 upc off
Step 3 Configure the E3 port. 1.
Select the command mode. huawei(config)#interface aiu 0/5 huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#sub-interface e3 huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#
2.
Set the line type for the port. Run the linetype command to set the line type for the port. The line types include e3other, e3Framed, and e3Plcp. By default, the line type is e3Framed. For example, to set the line type to e3plcp, do as follows: huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#linetype { portId }:0 { linetype }:e3plcp
In this example, the default line type is used, so you do not need to set the line type. 3.
Set the clock mode. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#tx clock 0 line
4.
Set the interface type. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#uni-nni-set 0 uni
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
26-5
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
5.
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Create a VLAN. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#quit huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#vlan 10 mux
6.
Add the upstream port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
7.
Add the service virtual port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 10 e30/5/0 vpi 1 vci 40 rx-cttr 2 upc off txcttr 2 upc off
----End
Result After the configuration, the users of the ATM-DSLAM can access the Internet in OPTIC , IMA or E3 mode.
26.3 Setting the OPTIC Port Mode This operation enables you to set the OPTIC port mode.
Context 155M ATM port supports C-3c/STS-3c mode and STM-1 mode. l
OC-3c is a signal rate level at the optical port of the Synchronous Optical Network (SONET), the rate is 155 Mbit/s. STS-3c is the signal rate at the electrical port that corresponds to OC-3c level.
l
STM-1 is a signal rate level of the STM (Synchronous Transport Module) defined in SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy). The rate is 155 Mbit/s.
Procedure Step 1 Run the port mode command to configure the OPTIC port mode. Step 2 Run the display board command to query the configured OPTIC port mode. ----End
Example To set port AIUG 0/5/0 mode as STM-1, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface aiu 0/5 huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#sub-interface optic huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.optic)#port mode 1 stm-1
Run the display board command and you can find the OPTIC port mode is set successfully. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.optic)#quit huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#display board 0/5 --------------------------------------Board Name : H561AIUG Board Status : Normal --------------------------------------Subboard[0]: H511O1CTG
26-6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Status: Failed
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
-------------------------------------------------------------------Port Port Port Line Port Loop Optical Phy Line Rate IF Type Status Signal Clock Type Type Type Type (Mbps) Type -------------------------------------------------------------------0 ATM Fail No System No Single Optical STM-1 155 UNI --------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 26-2 lists the related operation for setting the OPTIC port mode. Table 26-2 Related operation for setting the OPTIC port mode To...
Run the Command...
Set the OPTIC port type
uni-nni-set
26.4 Setting the OPTIC Port Type This operation enables you to set the optical port type.
Prerequisite The port type shall be the same as that of the peer.
Context The MA5600 supports User Network Interface (UNI) and Network Node Interface (NNI). l
When you set the port type as UNI, the VPI value of the port shall be from 0 to 255, the VCI value of the port shall be from 32 to 1023.
l
When you set the port type as NNI, the VPI value of the port shall be from 0 to 4095, the VCI value of the port shall be from 32 to 1023.
Procedure Step 1 Run the uni-nni-set command to set the OPTIC port type. Step 2 Run the display board command to query the configured OPTIC port type. ----End
Example To set the type of port AIUG 0/5/0 as UNI, do as follows: huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.optic)#uni-nni-set 0 uni
Run the display board command and you can find the OPTIC port type is set successfully. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.optic)#quit huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#quit huawei(config)#display board 0/5 --------------------------------------Board Name : H561AIUG Board Status : Normal
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
26-7
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
--------------------------------------Subboard[0]: H511O1CTG Status: Failed -------------------------------------------------------------------Port Port Port Line Port Loop Optical Phy Line Rate IF Type Status Signal Clock Type Type Type Type (Mbps) Type -------------------------------------------------------------------0 ATM Fail No System No Single Optical STM-1 155 UNI --------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 26-3 lists the related operation for setting the OPTIC port type. Table 26-3 Related operation for setting the OPTIC port type To...
Run the Command...
Set the OPTIC port mode
port mode
26.5 Adding an IMA Group This operation enables you to add an IMA group.
Context The AIUG provides IMA ports through the subboards on the AIUG board. l
The AIUG board supports up to four IMA groups through the E8IT subboard.
l
Each IMA group can be configured with one to eight E1 links.
l
Each E1 link belongs to one IMA group only.
Procedure Step 1 Run the ima group add command to add an IMA group. Step 2 Run the display ima group parameter command to query the IMA group configuration. ----End
Example To add IMA group 0, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface aiu 0/5 huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5)#sub-interface ima huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima group add { groupIndex }:0 { version }:version1.0 { minTxLinks }:2 { minRxLinks }:2 { clock }:itc { imaId }:0 { framelength }:256 { |alpha_value }: Command: ima group add 0 version1.0 2 2 itc 0 256
26-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
IMA group add successfully
Run the display ima group command to query the configuration of the IMA group. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#display ima group parameter 0 Command: display ima group parameter 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------NE symmetry : both config and operation symmetry FE symmetry : NULL Min Tx link : 2 Min Rx link : 2 NE clock : ITC FE clock : NULL Tx reference link : NULL Rx reference link : NULL Tx IMA ID : 0 Rx IMA ID : NULL Tx frame length : 256 Rx frame length : NULL Maximum differential delay(ms): 40 Alpha : 2 Beta : 2 Gamma : 1 Tx protocol version : 1.0 Rx protocol version : NULL --------------------------------------------------------------------
Parameter Description Table 26-4 lists parameters of an IMA group. Table 26-4 Parameters of an IMA group Parameter
Description
Version
Version 1.0 and version 1.1 are two IMA protocol versions defined by ATM Forum. IMA groups supporting different versions cannot interoperate with each other.
Link number
MinTxLinks and minRxLinks represent the minimum number of links for sending and receiving signals in the IMA group. When the number of activated links reaches the minimum link number you set for an IMA group, the IMA group is activated. The value of minTxLinks and minRxLinks must be the same.
Clock mode
CTC and ITC are two clock modes. In common transmit clock (CTC) mode, all the links in an IMA group have the same clock source. In independent transmit clock (ITC) mode, clock sources for different links in an IMA group are different. ITC is recommended if you set an IMA group to link clock mode.
Frame length
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Framelength is the size of an IMA frame. It represents the number of cells carried in an IMA frame. The value can be 32, 64, 128, or 256. You are recommended to set it to 128.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
26-9
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
Parameter
Description
Invalid ICP cells
Alpha_value indicates the number of invalid ICP cells, and the recommended setting is 2. Beta_value indicates the number of errored ICP cells, and the recommended setting is 2. Gamma_value indicates the number of valid ICP cells, and the default setting is 1.
Related Operation Table 26-5 lists the related operations for add an IMA group. Table 26-5 Related operations for adding an IMA group To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete an IMA group
ima group delete
-
Block an IMA group
ima group block
Make sure that an IMA group contains links before blocking it.
Add an IMA link
ima link add
-
Delete an IMA link
ima link delete
If a link is the last one in an IMA group, the ima link delete command cannot delete the link. Run the ima group delete command to delete the IMA group and the link.
26.6 Setting the IMA Group Mode This operation enables you to set the clock mode, CRC4 multiframe and scramble of the IMA group.
Prerequisite The IMA subboard clock comes from the line recovery clock.
Context The clock mode of the IMA subboard includes are system and line. l
System –
l
26-10
This is the default clock mode for an IMA subboard. If there is a clock subboard, the clock subboard provides clock signals for the IMA subboard. If there is no clock subboard, an IMA subboard itself provides clock signals.
Line Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
l
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
–
By default, CRC4 multiframe is disabled (the CRC4 switch is off).
–
When the MA5600 interoperates with the devices of other vendors, make sure the E1 settings are the same at both sides. If the other side enables CRC4 multiframe, you need to enable it on the MA5600.
–
The setting of scramble must be the same for the two sides. That is, the scramble switch must be on or off at the same time for both sides. By default, the scramble switch is off.
Make sure the clock mode for an IMA group is system at one end of the link, and line at the other end.
Procedure Step 1 Run theima group mode command to set the IMA group mode. Step 2 Run the display ima config command to query the configuration of the IMA group mode. ----End
To set the clock mode of an IMA group, do as follows: huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima group mode clockmode 0 line Set IMA group transmit clock successfully
To enable CRC4 multiframe for an IMA group, do as follows: huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima group mode crc4-multiframe 0 on Set CRC4 switch successfully
To enable scramble on an IMA Group, do as follows: huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima group mode scramble 0 on Set scramble switch successfully
Run the display ima config command and you can find the IMA group mode is set successfully. huawei(config-if-aiuu-0/5.ima)#display ima config ------------------------------------------------------------------GroupIndex State Loopback CRC4 Scramble TxClock Links ------------------------------------------------------------------0 Config On On Line 1 2 3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Link ID Tx state Rx state -----------------------------0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ------------------------------
Related Operation Table 26-6 lists the related operations for setting the IMA group mode. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
26-11
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Table 26-6 Related operations for setting the IMA group mode To...
Run the Command...
Add an IMA group
uni-nni-set
Delete an IMA group
ima group delete
26.7 Adding an IMA Link This operation enables you to add an IMA link.
Context l
On the E1 cables of the MA5600 you can see signs of T0, R0, T1, R1, and so on. Tx and Rx belong to the same E1 link. When you configure IMA links, make sure that Tx at the local end connects with Ry at the remote end, while Rx at the local end connects with Ty at the remote end (x and y indicate link numbers).
l
Add an IMA group before adding IMA links.
l
If an IMA group has no links, you cannot add PVC to the group, loopback or block the group.
Procedure Step 1 Run the ima link add command to add an IMA link. Step 2 Run the display ima config command to query the configuration of the IMA link. ----End
Example To add a link 0 to IMA group 0, do as follows: huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#ima link add 0 0 IMA link add successfully
Run the display ima config command and you can find that the system prompts the IMA link is added successfully. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.ima)#display ima config ------------------------------------------------------------------GroupIndex State Loopback CRC4 Scramble TxClock Links ------------------------------------------------------------------0 Config On On Line 0 1 2 3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Link ID Tx state Rx state -----------------------------0 Config Config 1 2 3 4 -
26-12
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
5 6 7 ------------------------------
Related Operation Table 26-7 lists the related operations for adding an IMA link. Table 26-7 Related operations for adding an IMA link To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Add an IMA group
ima group add
-
Delete an IMA link
ima link delete
l
To delete a link from one group and add the link to another group, first delete the link from both the local and remote ends, and then add the link again.
l
If a link is the last one in an IMA group, the ima link delete command cannot delete the link. Run the ima group delete command to delete the IMA group and the link.
Block an IMA link
ima link block
-
26.8 Setting the Line Type for an E3 Port This operation enables you to set the line type for an E3 port.
Context The E3 port supports three line types: e3other, e3Framed and e3Plcp. l
e3other complies with G.832.
l
e3Framed complies with G.751 and does not adopt PLCP encapsulation.
l
e3Plcp complies with G.751 and adopts PLCP encapsulation.
l
By default, the line type of the E3 port is e3Framed.
Procedure Step 1 Run the linetype command to set the line type for an E3 port. Step 2 Run the display board command to query the configured line type of the E3 port. ----End Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
26-13
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Example To set the line type of the E3 port as e3plcp, do as follows: huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#linetype 0 e3plcp
Run the display board command and you can find the line type of the E3 port is configured successfully. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#display board 0/5 --------------------------------------Board Name : H561AIUG Board Status : Failed --------------------------------------Subboard[0]: H511E13T Status: Failed -------------------------------------------------------------------Port Port Port Line Port Loop Line Line Rate IF Type Status Signal Clock Type Type Code (Kbps) Type -------------------------------------------------------------------0 E3 Fail No System No e3Plcp(G.751) HDB3 30528 UNI --------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 26-8 lists the related operations for setting the line type of the E3 port. Table 26-8 Related operations for setting the line type of an E3 port To...
Run the Command...
Set the E3 port type
uni-nni-set
Set the Tx clock of an E3 port
tx clock
26.9 Setting the E3 Port Type This operation enables you to set the E3 port type.
Context The MA5600 supports User Network Interface (UNI) and Network Node Interface (NNI). l
When you set the port type as UNI, the VPI value of the port shall be from 0 to 255.
l
When you set the port type as NNI, the VPI value of the port shall be from 0 to 4095.
l
When you set the port type as UNI or NNI, the VCI value of the port shall be from 32 to 1023.
l
The E3 port type shall be the same as that of the peer end.
The default port type is UNI.
Procedure Step 1 Run the uni-nni-set command to set the E3 port type. 26-14
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
Step 2 Run the display board command to query the configuration the E3 port. ----End
Example To set the E3 port type as UNI, do as follows: huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#uni-nni-set 0 uni
Run the display board command and you can find the E3 port type is set successfully. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#display board 0/5 --------------------------------------Board Name : H561AIUG Board Status : Failed --------------------------------------Subboard[0]: H511E13T Status: Failed -------------------------------------------------------------------Port Port Port Line Port Loop Line Line Rate IF Type Status Signal Clock Type Type Code (Kbps) Type -------------------------------------------------------------------0 E3 Fail No System No e3Plcp(G.751) HDB3 30528 UNI --------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 26-9 lists the related operation for setting the E3 port type. Table 26-9 Related operation for setting the E3 port type To...
Run the Command...
Set the type of an E3 port
uni-nni-set
26.10 Setting the Tx Clock of an E3 Port This operation enables you to set the Tx clock of an E3 port.
Context l
The Tx clock includes two types: system and line.
l
By default, the Tx clock is system.
Procedure Step 1 Run the tx clock command to set the Tx clock of an E3 port. Step 2 Run the display board 0/5 command to query the configured Tx clock of the port. ----End
Example To set the Tx clock for port 0 as line, do as follows: Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
26-15
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#tx clock 0 line
Run the display board command and you can find that the Tx clock of the E3 port is set successfully. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#display board 0/5 --------------------------------------Board Name : H561AIUG Board Status : Failed --------------------------------------Subboard[0]: H511E13T Status: Failed -------------------------------------------------------------------Port Port Port Line Port Loop Line Line Rate IF Type Status Signal Clock Type Type Code (Kbps) Type -------------------------------------------------------------------0 E3 Fail No Line No e3Plcp(G.751) HDB3 30528 UNI --------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 26-10 lists the related operations for setting the Tx clock of an E3 port. Table 26-10 Related operations for setting the Tx clock of an E3 port To...
Run the Command...
Setting the line type of an E3 port
linetype
Setting the E3 port type
uni-nni-set
26.11 Clearing the Statistics of an E3 Port This operation enables you to clear the statistics of an E3 port.
Procedure Step 1 Run the clear statistic command to clear the statistics of an E3 port. Step 2 Run the display statistic command to query the port statistics. ----End
Example To clear the statistics of port 0, do as follows: huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#clear statistics 0
Run the display statistics command and you can find that the E3 port performance statistics is cleared successfully. huawei(config-if-aiu-0/5.e3)#display statistics 0 -------------------------------------------Line coding violation events :0 Frame head bit errored events :0 Excessive zero of frame events :0 Parity check errored events :0
26-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
26 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Access
Far end block errored events :0 BIP errored of PLCP layer events :0 PLCP layer errored events :0 FEBE of PLCP layer events :0 Sent cells :0 Received cells :0 HEC bit errored corrected events :0 HEC bit errored uncorrected events :0 Receiving idle cells :0 -------------------------------------------
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
26-17
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Configuring MPLS Access
About This Chapter This chapter describes the MPLS technology and how to configure the MPLS service on the MA5600. 27.1 Overview This section describes MPLS access service and its specifications on the MA5600. 27.2 Configuration Example of MPLS - Based on Binding the PVC with the PW Profile The example shows how to set up the label distribution protocol (LDP) remote session, label switching paths (LSP) and PW between the MA5600 and the router. 27.3 Configuration Example of MPLS- Based on Binding the VLAN with the PW Profile The example shows how to set up the LDP remote session, LSP and PW between the MA5600 and the router. 27.4 Basic Configuration of MPLS This section describes basic configuration of MPLS. 27.5 Static LSP Configuration This section describes how to configure a static LSP. 27.6 MPLS LDP Configuration This section describes how to configure MPLS LDP. 27.7 PW Configuration This section describes how to configure a PW template.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-1
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
27.1 Overview This section describes MPLS access service and its specifications on the MA5600.
Service Description Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) is derived from Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4). The core technology of MPLS involves multiple network protocols, including: l
Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)
l
Internet Packet Exchange (IPX)
l
Appletalk
l
DECnet
l
Connectionless Network Protocol (CLNP)
For details on the MPLS protocol, refer to the chapter "MPLS" in the Feature Description.
Service Specifications The MA5600 provides the MPLS function through the MPLS subboard attached to the SCU board. MPLS architecture consists of the following two planes: l
Control Plane: The Control Plane is connectionless. It distributes labels by using the current IP network.
l
Forwarding Plane (also known as Data Plane): The forwarding plane is connection-oriented. Through layer 2 network, such as ATM network, this plane forwards packets rapidly based on the label forwarding table.
For more details, refer to RFC3031 Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture. NOTE
l
To provide the MPLS function, the MA5600 can serve as only a provider edge (PE) device.
l
For the MA5600, to subtend slave shelves, l
Only the master shelf supports MPLS function.
l
The master shelf supports the ETH PWE3 and the ATM PWE3 services, and the slave shelf supports only the ETH PWE3 service. (To support the ATM PWE3 service, a slave shelf must be separately configured with the and the AIUG subboard, so as to serve as an independent PE to provide MPLS upstream function.)
27.2 Configuration Example of MPLS - Based on Binding the PVC with the PW Profile The example shows how to set up the label distribution protocol (LDP) remote session, label switching paths (LSP) and PW between the MA5600 and the router.
Networking Figure 27-1 shows a sample network for configuring the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) based on binding the PVC with the PW profile. 27-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Figure 27-1 Sample network for configuring the MPLS based on binding the PVC with the PW profile ISP BRAS Router (lsr-id 3.3.3.8/32) MPLS Network
5# 7#
A I U G
S C U
MA5600 (lsr-id 4.4.4.4/32)
Data Plan Table 27-1 lists the data plan for configuring the MPLS based on binding the PVC with the PW profile. Table 27-1 Data plan for configuring the MPLS based on binding the PVC with the PW profile Item
Data
MPLS
LSR ID: 4.4.4.4/32 VLAN type: Standard VLAN VLAN ID: 140 L3 interface IP address: 10.11.0.214/30 PW profile name: pwt Remote address: 3.3.3.8 Type: ATM SDU
SCU
Upstream port: 0/7/2 VLAN ID of the upstream port:: 140 Native VLAN ID of the upstream port: 140
AIUG
Port: 0/5/0 VPI/VCI: 1/40
Router name
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
LSR ID: 3.3.3.8/32
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Configuration Flowchart Figure 27-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the MPLS based on binding the PVC with the PW profile. Figure 27-2 Flowchart for configuring the MPLS based binding the PVC with the PW profile Start
Configure OSPF
Configure the loopback interface
Configure LSR-ID of MPLS
Enable MPLS
Configure the VLAN interface
Enable the MPLS LDP
Enable the remote peer Configure the MPLS LDP triggering mechanism
Enable the MPLS L2VPN
Create a VLAN
Create a PW template Bind the VLAN with the PW template End
Procedure Step 1 Configure the open shortest path first (OSPF). huawei(config)#ospf
27-4
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
huawei(config-ospf-1)#area 0 huawei(config-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0)#network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0)#network 10.11.0.0 0.0.255.255 huawei(config-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0)#quit huawei(config-ospf-1)#quit
Step 2 Configure the loopback interface. huawei(config)#interface loopback 1 huawei(config-if-loopback1)#ip address 4.4.4.4 32 huawei(config-if-loopback1)#quit
Step 3 Configure the label switch router (LSR) ID for the MPLS. huawei(config)#mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
Step 4 Enable the MPLS. huawei(config)#mpls huawei(config-mpls)#quit huawei(config)#vlan 140 standard huawei(config)#mpls vlan 140 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 140 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#ip address 10.11.0.214 30 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#mpls huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#quit
Step 5 Configure a VLAN interface. huawei(config)#port vlan 140 0/7 0 huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 2 vlan 140 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#quit
Step 6 Enable the MPLS LDP. huawei(config)#mpls ldp huawei(config-mpls-ldp)#quit huawei(config)#interface vlanif 140 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#mpls ldp huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#quit
Step 7 Create a remote peer. huawei(config)#mpls ldp remote-peer router huawei(config-mpls-ldp-remote-router)#remote-ip 3.3.3.8 huawei(config-mpls-ldp-remote-router)#quit
Step 8 Configure the MPLS LDP triggering mechanism. huawei(config)#mpls huawei(config-mpls)#lsp-trigger host huawei(config-mpls)#label advertise non-null huawei(config-mpls)#quit
Step 9 Enable the MPLS L2VPN. huawei(config)#mpls l2vpn
Step 10 Configure a service port. huawei(config)#service-port vlan aoe atm 0/5/0 vpi 1 vci 40 rx-cttr 6 upc off txcttr 6 upc off
Step 11 Create a PW profile. huawei(config)#pw-template pwt huawei(config-pw-template-pwt)#peer-address 3.3.3.8 huawei(config-pw-template-pwt)#pw-type atm sdu huawei(config-pw-template-pwt)#quit
Step 12 Bind the PVC with the PW profile. huawei(config)#pw-ac-binding pvc 0/5/0 vpi 1 vci 40 pw 106 pw-template pwt
----End Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Result After the configuration, LDP remote session, LSP and PW can be set up between the MA5600 and the router. The PW is in the up state.
27.3 Configuration Example of MPLS- Based on Binding the VLAN with the PW Profile The example shows how to set up the LDP remote session, LSP and PW between the MA5600 and the router.
Networking Figure 27-3 shows a sample network of the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW template. Figure 27-3 Sample network of the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW template ISP BRAS Router (lsr-id 3.3.3.8/32) MPLS Network
A D G G
S C U
MA5600 (lsr-id 4.4.4.4/32)
Data Plan Table 27-2 shows the data plan for configuring the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW profile. Table 27-2 Data plan for configuring the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW profile
27-6
Item
Data
MPLS
Lsr id: 4.4.4.4/32
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Item
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Data VLAN type: standard VLAN VLAN ID: 140 IP address: 10.11.0.214/30 PW profile name: pwt Remote address: 3.3.3.8 Type: Ethernet Tagged
SCU
Upstream port: 0/7/2 VLAN ID of the upstream port: 140 Native VLAN ID of the upstream port: 140
ADSL
Port: 0/2/0 VPI/VCI: 1/100
Router Name
Lsr id: 3.3.3.8/32
Configuration Flowchart Figure 27-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW template.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-7
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Figure 27-4 Flowchart for configuring the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW profile Start
Configure OSPF
Configure loopback interface
Configure LSR-ID of MPLS
Enable MPLS
Configure VLAN interface
Enable MPLS LDP
Enable remote peer Configure MPLS LDP triggering mechanism
Enable MPLS L2VPN
Create VLAN
Create PW profile
Bind PVC with PW
End
Procedure Step 1 Configure OSPF. huawei(config)#ospf huawei(config-ospf-1)#area 0 huawei(config-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0)#network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0)#network 10.11.0.0 0.0.255.255 huawei(config-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0)#quit huawei(config-ospf-1)#quit
27-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Step 2 Configure the loopback interface. huawei(config)#interface loopback 1 huawei(config-if-loopback1)#ip address 4.4.4.4 32 huawei(config-if-loopback1)#quit
Step 3 Configure MPLS Lsr id. huawei(config)#mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4
Step 4 Enable MPLS. huawei(config)#mpls huawei(config-mpls)#quit huawei(config)#vlan 140 standard huawei(config)#mpls vlan 140 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 140 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#ip address 10.11.0.214 30 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#mpls huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#quit
Step 5 Configure the VLAN interface. huawei(config)#port vlan 140 0/7 0 huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 140 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#quit
Step 6 Enable the MPLS LDP. huawei(config)#mpls ldp huawei(config-mpls-ldp)#quit huawei(config)#interface vlanif 140 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#mpls ldp huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#quit
Step 7 Create the remote peer. huawei(config)#mpls ldp remote-peer Router huawei(config-mpls-ldp-remote-Router)#remote-ip 3.3.3.8 huawei(config-mpls-ldp-remote-Router)#quit
Step 8 Configure the MPLS LDP triggering mechanism. huawei(config-mpls)#lsp-trigger host
Step 9 Enable the MPLS L2VPN. huawei(config)#mpls l2vpn
Step 10 Add a service port. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 140 adsl 0/2/0 vpi 1 vci 100 rx-cttr 5 tx-cttr 5
Step 11 Create a PW template. huawei(config)#pw-template pweth huawei(config-pw-template-pweth)#peer-address 3.3.3.8 huawei(config-pw-template-pweth)#pw-type ethernet tagged huawei(config-pw-template-pweth)#quit
Step 12 Bind the VLAN with the PW template. huawei(config)#pw-ac-binding vlan 100 pw 107 pw-template pweth
----End
Result After the configuration, the MA5600 can set up the LDP remote session with the router. The LSP and PW can be created, and the PW is in up state. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-9
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
27.4 Basic Configuration of MPLS This section describes basic configuration of MPLS.
Context NOTE
Before you configure other MPLS features, you must perform basic MPLS configuration on all routers involved in MPLS forwarding in the MPLS domain.
27.4.1 Configuring the LSR ID This operation enables you to configure the label switching router (LSR) ID. 27.4.2 Enabling MPLS This operation enables the MPLS function.
27.4.1 Configuring the LSR ID This operation enables you to configure the label switching router (LSR) ID.
Context l
In general, the address of the loopback interface is used as the LSR ID.
l
An LSR has no default ID. Therefore, you must configure it manually.
l
After configuring the LSR ID, you must enable MPLS. Then you can configure the other MPLS features.
l
You must enable the global MPLS first, and then enable the interface MPLS.
l
The LSR ID is unique in the MPLS domain. By combining with the 2-byte label space serial number, it forms the LDP identifier, which is used to identify the label space used by the LSR, and to set up and maintain LDP session between LSRs.
Procedure Step 1 Run the mpls lsr-id command to configure the LSR ID. Step 2 Run the display current-configuration command and you can find the configuration of LSR ID is successful. ----End
Example To configure the LSR ID as 4.4.4.4, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4 huawei(config)#display current-configuration section mpls { || }: Command: display current-configuration section mpls [MA5600V300R003: 3002] # [mpls]
27-10
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4 # return
Related Operation Table 27-3 shows the related operations for configuring the LSR ID. Table 27-3 Related operations for configuring the LSR ID To...
Run the Command...
Enable/Disable MPLS
(undo)mpls
Enable/Disable the MPLS VLAN
(undo)mpls vlan
27.4.2 Enabling MPLS This operation enables the MPLS function.
Context l
You must enable the global MPLS first and then enable the interface MPLS.
l
You can only enable the MPLS of the standard VLAN.
l
In global config mode, run the mpls command to enable the MPLS globally.
l
In global config mode, run the mpls vlan command to enable the MPLS of the VALN.
Procedure
l
1.
Run the mpls command to enable the MPLS of the VLAN.
2.
Run the display mpls vlan command to query the MPLS state of the VLAN.
In VLAN interface mode, run the mpls command to enable the MPLS of an interface. 1.
Run the interface vlanif command to enter VLAN interface mode.
2.
Run the mpls command to enable the MPLS.
3.
Run the display mpls interface command to query the information about the interface whose MPLS function is enabled.
----End To enable the MPLS function globally, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls
To enable the MPLS function of VLAN 140, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls vlan 140 huawei(config)#display mpls vlan 140 Vlan 140 is enabled MPLS
To enter interface mode and enable the MPLS of a VLAN, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface vlanif 140
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-11
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#mpls huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#quit huawei(config)#display mpls interface vlanif 140 verbose No : 1 Interface : vlanif140 Status : Down TE Attribute : Disable LSPCount : 0 CR-LSPCount : 0 MPLS Config MTU : 1500 Interface MTU : 1500 MPLS Effective MTU : 1500 TE FRR : Disabled
Related Operation Table 27-4 shows the related operations for enabling MPLS. Table 27-4 Related operations for enabling MPLS To...
Run the Command...
Configure the LSR ID
mpls lsr-id
Disable MPLS
undo mpls
Disable the MPLS VLAN
undo mpls vlan
27.5 Static LSP Configuration This section describes how to configure a static LSP. 27.5.1 Overview This section describes LSP types and commands for configuring the static LSP. 27.5.2 Configuring the Ingress LSR of the Static LSP This operation enables you to configure the ingress LSR of the static LSP. 27.5.3 Configuring the Egress LSR of the Static LSP This operation enables you to configure the egress LSR of the static LSP. 27.5.4 Configuring the LSP CAR This operation enables you to configure the LSP Committed Access Rate (CAR).
27.5.1 Overview This section describes LSP types and commands for configuring the static LSP. There are two types of LSPs: static LSP and dynamic LSP. l
Static LSP is configured manually.
l
After you configure all LSRs along the static LSP, the LSP can work in the normal state.
l
Dynamic LSP is generated by the routing protocol dynamically.
Table 27-5 lists the related commands for configuring the static LSP. 27-12
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Table 27-5 Related commands for configuring the static LSP To...
Run the Command...
Configure the ingress LSR of the static LSP
static-lsp ingress
Configure the egress LSR of the static LSP
static-lsp egress
Configure/Remove LSP CAR
(undo) mpls car-lsp
Query the static LSP
display mpls static-lsp
27.5.2 Configuring the Ingress LSR of the Static LSP This operation enables you to configure the ingress LSR of the static LSP.
Context If you specify the next hop address when configuring the static LSP, then you must specify the next hop address when configuring the IP static route. Similarly, if you specify the egress when configuring the static LSP, then you must specify the egress when configuring the IP static route.
Procedure Step 1 Run the static-lsp ingress command to configure the ingress LSR of the static LSP. Step 2 Run the display mpls static-lsp command to query the configured ingress LSR of the static LSP. ----End
Example To configure ingress LSR of the static LSP, do as follows: huawei(config)#static-lsp ingress staticlsp1 destination 3.3.3.3 32 nexthop 10.11.11.213 out-label 8500 huawei(config)#display mpls static-lsp |string|verbose|include|exclude }: Command: display mpls static-lsp Name FEC I/O Label I/O If Stat staticlsp1 3.3.3.3/32 NULL/8500 -/Down
Related Operation Table 27-6 lists the related operations for configuring ingress LSR of the static LSP. Table 27-6 Related operations for configuring ingress LSR of the static LSP
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Configure the egress LSR of the static LSP
static-lsp egress
Enable/Disable LSP CAR
(undo)mpls car-lsp Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-13
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
27.5.3 Configuring the Egress LSR of the Static LSP This operation enables you to configure the egress LSR of the static LSP.
Procedure Step 1 Run the static-lsp egress command to configure the egress LSR of the static LSP. Step 2 Run the display mpls static-lsp command to query the configured egress LSR of the static LSP. ----End
Example To configure egress LSR of the static LSP, do as follows: huawei(config)#static-lsp egress staticslp3 incoming-interface vlanif 140 in-label 8400 huawei(config)#display mpls static-lsp { |string|verbose|include|exclude }: Command: display mpls static-lsp FEC I/O Label I/O If 3.3.3.3/32 NULL/8500 -/-/8400/NULL Vlanif140/-
Name staticlsp1 staticslp3
Stat Down Up
Related Operation Table 27-7 lists the related operations for configuring egress LSR of the static LSP. Table 27-7 Related operations for configuring egress LSR of the static LSP To...
Run the Command...
Configure egress LSR of the static LSP
static-lsp ingress
Enable/Disable the LSP CAR
(undo)mpls car-lsp
27.5.4 Configuring the LSP CAR This operation enables you to configure the LSP Committed Access Rate (CAR).
Procedure Step 1 Run the mpls car-lsp static command to configure the LSP CAR. Step 2 Run the display mpls car-lsp command and you can find the configuration of the LSP CAR is successful. ----End 27-14
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Example To configure the bandwidth of static LSP staticlsp1 as 1000×64 kbit/s, do as follows. And the system determines the burst value automatically based on the bandwidth. huawei(config)#mpls car-lsp static lspname staticlsp1 burst 0 bandwidth 1000 huawei(config)#display mpls car-lsp static lspname staticlsp1 Static Lsp CAR Table Total: 1 ---------------------------------------------------Lsp Name Burst(2KB) Bandwidth(64kbps) ---------------------------------------------------*staticlsp1 AUTO 1000 ---------------------------------------------------Note: A '*' before an LSP-CAR means the CAR is invalid.
Related Operation Table 27-8 lists the related operations for configuring the LSP CAR. Table 27-8 Related operations for configuring LSP CAR To...
Run the Command...
Configure the ingress of the static LSP
static-lsp ingress
Configure the egress of the static LSP
static-lsp egress
Query a static LSP
display mpls static-lsp
Disable parameters of the LSP CAR
undo mpls car-lsp
27.6 MPLS LDP Configuration This section describes how to configure MPLS LDP. 27.6.1 Overview This section describes the LDP protocol. 27.6.2 Enabling the MPLS LDP This operation enables the MPLS LDP. 27.6.3 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Basic Discovery This operation enables you to configure parameters of the LDP basic discovery. 27.6.4 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Extended Discovery This operation enables you to configure the parameters of the LDP extended discovery. 27.6.5 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Basic Session This operation enables you to configure parameters for the LDP basic session. 27.6.6 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Extended Session This operation enables you to configure parameters of the LDP extended session. 27.6.7 Configuring the LDP LSP Triggering Policy Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-15
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
This operation enables you to configure the LDP LSP triggering policy. 27.6.8 Configuring the LDP Label Retention Mode This operation enables you to configure the LDP label retention mode. 27.6.9 Configuring the LDP Loopback Detection This operation enables you to configure the LDP loopback detection. 27.6.10 Configuring the LDP MD5 Authentication This operation enables you to configure the LDP MD5 authentication. 27.6.11 Enable the LDP MTU Signaling Function This operation enables the LDP MTU signaling function.
27.6.1 Overview This section describes the LDP protocol. If the LDP is adopted as the label distribution protocol in an MPLS domain to set up LSP, LDP sessions should be established between LSRs along the LSP to perform information exchange such as label mapping and release. The LDP uses Hello hold timer to maintain the LDP adjacency and session hold timer to maintain the LDP session. In most applications, you can adopt the default value of the two timers. In some special cases, you can modify the parameter as required. Modifying the hold timer may cause the original session to be recreated. The LSP originally created on the basis of this session will be deleted and needs to be recreated.
27.6.2 Enabling the MPLS LDP This operation enables the MPLS LDP.
Context l
You must enable the MPLS first and then enable the MPLS LDP.
l
You can only enable the MPLS of the standard VLAN.
l
In the global config mode:
Procedure
l
1.
Run the mpls ldp command to enable the MPLS LDP globally.
2.
Run the display current-configuration command and you can query the global MPLS LDP is enabled successfully.
In VLAN interface mode: 1.
Run the mpls ldp command to enable the MPLS LDP of a VLAN interface.
2.
Run the display mpls interface command and you can query the MPLS LDP of the VLAN interface is enabled successfully.
----End To enable the MPLS LDP globally, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls ldp huawei(config)#display current-configuration section mpls [MA5600V300R003: 3002]
27-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
# [mpls] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4 mpls # [mpls-ldp] mpls ldp # return
To enable the MPLS LDP of VLAN interface 140, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface vlanif { }:140 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#mpls ldp huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#quit huawei(config)#display mpls interface vlanif 140 { |verbose }: Command: Interface Vlanif140
display mpls interface vlanif 140 Status TE Attr LSP Count Down Dis 0
CRLSP Count Effective MTU 0 1500
Related Operation Table 27-9 lists the related operations for enabling the MPLS LDP. Table 27-9 Related operations for enabling the MPLS LDP To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Query information of MPLS LDP
display mpls ldp
-
Query information of the peer session
display mpls ldp session
-
Disable the MPLS LDP
undo mpls ldp
Disabling LDP on the interface will interrupt all LDP sessions on the interface. All the LSPs based on these sessions will be deleted accordingly.
27.6.3 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Basic Discovery This operation enables you to configure parameters of the LDP basic discovery.
Context l
In the VLAN interface, the link Hello timer can be configured. In remote peer mode, the target Hello timer can be configured.
l
By default, the link Hello duration is 15s, and the target Hello duration is 45s.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-17
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access l
Generally, the default can meet the requirement. Modifying the Hello timer duration will result in recreating the original session, and all the LSPs based on the session will be deleted and needs to be recreated.
l
Run the mpls ldp transport-address command to configure the LDP transmission address. By default, the address is the local LSR ID.
l
Set the Hello timer duration.
Procedure
l
1.
Run the mpls ldp timer command to set the Hello timer duration.
2.
Run the display mpls ldp command to query the configuration of the Hello timer duration.
Configure the LDP transmission address. 1.
Run the mpls ldp transport-address command to configure the LDP transmission address.
2.
Run the display mpls ldp command to query the configuration of the LDP transmission address.
----End
To set the Hello timer duration, do as follows: huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#mpls ldp timer hello-hold 15 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#quit huawei(config)#display mpls ldp interface vlanif 140 { || }: Command: display mpls ldp interface vlanif 140 LDP Interface Information -------------------------------------------------------------------Interface Name : vlanif140 LDP ID : 4.4.4.4:0 Transport Address : 4.4.4.4 Entity Status : Inactive Interface MTU : 1500 Configured Hello Timer : 15 Sec Negotiated Hello Timer : 15 Sec Configured Keepalive Timer : 45 Sec Label Advertisement Mode : Downstream Unsolicited Hello Message Sent/Rcvd : 0/0 (Message Count) --------------------------------------------------------------------
To configure the LDP transmission address, do as follows: huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#mpls ldp transport-address vlanif 140 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#quit huawei(config)#display mpls ldp interface vlanif 140 { || }: Command: display mpls ldp interface vlanif 140 LDP Interface Information -------------------------------------------------------------------Interface Name : vlanif140 LDP ID : 4.4.4.4:0 Transport Address : 10.10.10.1 Entity Status : Inactive Interface MTU : 1500 Configured Hello Timer : 15 Sec Negotiated Hello Timer : 15 Sec Configured Keepalive Timer : 45 Sec Label Advertisement Mode : Downstream Unsolicited Hello Message Sent/Rcvd : 0/0 (Message Count) --------------------------------------------------------------------
27-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Related Operation Table 27-10 lists the related operations for configuring parameters of the LDP basic discovery. Table 27-10 Related operations for configuring parameters of LDP basic discovery To...
Run the Command...
Query information of the peer session
display mpls ldp session
Query an MPLS LSP
display mpls lsp
27.6.4 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Extended Discovery This operation enables you to configure the parameters of the LDP extended discovery.
Context Only one local session or one remote session can exist between two LSRs. The local session has a higher priority than the remote session. l
When a local adjacency already exists with the remote peer, the remote adjacency will not be created.
l
When a remote adjacency exists and a local adjacency is created for the remote peer, the remote peer will be deleted.
l
Set the Hello timer duration.
Procedure
l
1.
Run the mpls ldp remote-peer remotepeer command to enter MPLS LDP remote peer mode.
2.
Run the mpls ldp timer hello-hold command to set the Hello timer duration.
Configure the LDP transmission address. 1.
Run the interface vlanif command to enter VLAN interface mode.
2.
Run the mpls ldp transport-address command to configure the LDP transmission address.
----End
To set the Hello timer duration, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls ldp remote-peer remotepeer huawei(config-mpls-ldp-remote-remotepeer)#mpls ldp timer hello-hold 45
To configure the LDP transmission address, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface vlanif 20 huawei(config-if-vlanif20)#mpls ldp transport-address vlanif 140
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-19
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Verification After you specify the remote LSR ID as the remote-ip, the local LSR will send LDP Targeted Hello message to the remote-ip, thus discovering the LDP neighbor and establishing the remote session.
Related Operation Table 27-11 lists the related operations for configuring the parameters of the LDP extended discovery. Table 27-11 Related operations for configuring the parameters of the LDP extended discovery To...
Run the Command...
Query information of the peer session
display mpls ldp session
Query the MPLS LSP
display mpls lsp
Query the MPLS LDP
display mpls ldp
27.6.5 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Basic Session This operation enables you to configure parameters for the LDP basic session.
Context l
By default, the value of the timer keepalive-hold is 45s.
l
If there are more than one enabled LDP links between two LSRs, the keepalive-hold time of all links must be the same. Otherwise, the session may be unstable.
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface vlanif command to enter vlan interface mode. Step 2 Run the mpls ldp timer keepalive-hold command to configure the timer keepalive-hold duration. Step 3 Run the display mpls ldp command to query the configuration of the timer keepalive-hold duration. ----End
Example To set the Hello timer duration, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface vlanif 140 huawei(config-if-vlanif140)#mpls ldp timer keepalive-hold 45 huawei(config)#display mpls ldp interface vlanif 140 { || }: Command: display mpls ldp interface vlanif 140 LDP Interface Information
27-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
-------------------------------------------------------------------Interface Name : vlanif120 LDP ID : 4.4.4.4:0 Transport Address : 10.10.10.1 Entity Status : Inactive Interface MTU : 1500 Configured Hello Timer : 15 Sec Negotiated Hello Timer : 15 Sec Configured Keepalive Timer : 45 Sec Label Advertisement Mode : Downstream Unsolicited Hello Message Sent/Rcvd : 0/0 (Message Count) --------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 27-12 lists the related operations for configuring parameters of the LDP basic session. Table 27-12 Related operations for configuring parameters of the LDP basic session To...
Run the Command...
Query information of the peer session
display mpls ldp session
Query the MPLS LSP
display mpls lsp
27.6.6 Configuring Parameters of the LDP Extended Session This operation enables you to configure parameters of the LDP extended session.
Procedure Step 1 Run the mpls ldp remote-peer remotepeer command to enter MPLS LDP remote peer mode. Step 2 Run the mpls ldp timer keepalive-hold command to set the Hello timer duration. ----End
Example To set the Hello timer duration, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls ldp remote-peer remotepeer huawei(config-mpls-ldp-remote-remotepeer)#mpls ldp timer keepalive-hold 45
Related Operation Table 27-13 lists the related operations for configuring parameters of the LDP extended session. Table 27-13 Related operations for configuring parameters of the LDP extended session
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Query information of the peer session
display mpls ldp session
Query the MPLS LSP
display mpls lsp Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-21
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
To...
Run the Command...
Query the MPLS LDP
display mpls ldp
27.6.7 Configuring the LDP LSP Triggering Policy This operation enables you to configure the LDP LSP triggering policy.
Context l
The IGP route entry that is included in the host or IP address prefix list can trigger LDP to set up an LSP.
l
By default, no route entry can trigger LDP to set up an LSP.
l
The host or IP address prefix list is only effective on the static route and the IGP route.
Procedure Step 1 Run the mpls command to enter MPLS mode. Step 2 Run the lsp-trigger command to configure the LDP LSP triggering policy. Step 3 Run the display current-configuration command to query the configuration of the LDP LSP triggering policy. ----End
Example To configure the triggering policy based on the host, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls huawei(config-mpls)#lsp-trigger host huawei(config)#display current-configuration section mpls [MA5600V300R003: 3002] # [mpls] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4 mpls lsp-trigger host # [mpls-ldp] mpls ldp # [mpls-ldp-remote] mpls ldp remote-peer remotepeer # return
Related Operation Table 27-14 lists the related operations for configuring the LDP LSP triggering policy. 27-22
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Table 27-14 Related operations for configuring the LDP LSP triggering policy To...
Run the Command...
Query information of the peer session
display mpls ldp session
Query the MPLS LSP
display mpls lsp
Query the MPLS LDP
display mpls ldp
27.6.8 Configuring the LDP Label Retention Mode This operation enables you to configure the LDP label retention mode.
Context There are two label retention modes: l
liberal: For the label mapping received from the neighboring LSR, the LSR will retain it, no matter whether the neighboring LSR is at its next hop. Therefore, the LSR can accommodate itself to the route changes rapidly.
l
conservative: For the label mapping received from the neighboring LSR, the LSR will retain it only when the neighboring LSR is at its next hop. Therefore, the LSR can distribute and retain fewer labels.
Procedure Step 1 Run the mpls ldp command to enable the MPLS LDP globally. Step 2 Run the label-retention command to configure the LDP label retention mode. Step 3 Run the display mpls ldp command to query the configuration of the LDP label retention mode. ----End To set the LDP label retention mode as liberal, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls ldp huawei(config-mpls-ldp)#label-retention liberal huawei(config)#display mpls ldp { |||all|verbose|interface|peer|session|remote-peer| lsp }: Command: display mpls ldp LDP Global Information -------------------------------------------------------------------Protocol Version : V1 Neighbor Liveness : 600 Sec Graceful Restart : Off FT Reconnect Timer : 300 Sec MTU Signaling : On Recovery Timer : 300 Sec LDP Instance Information -------------------------------------------------------------------Instance ID : 0 VPN-Instance : Instance Status : Active LSR ID : 4.4.4.4 Hop Count Limit : 32 Path Vector Limit : 32 Loop Detection : Off DU Re-advertise Timer : 10 Sec DU Re-advertise Flag : On
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-23
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
DU Explicit Request : Off Request Retry Flag : On Label Distribution Mode : Independent Label Retention Mode : Liberal --------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 27-15 lists the related operations for configuring the LDP label retention mode. Table 27-15 Related operations for configuring the LDP label retention mode To...
Run the Command...
Query information of the peer session
display mpls ldp session
Query the MPLS LSP
display mpls lsp
27.6.9 Configuring the LDP Loopback Detection This operation enables you to configure the LDP loopback detection.
Prerequisite There are two types of the LDP loopback detection: maximum hops and path vectors. l
Maximum hops: If the specified value is exceeded, the system considers that the loopback occurs, and the LSP fails to set up. By default, the maximum hop is 32.
l
Path vectors: The maximum value of LSP shall be specified. By default, the maximum path vector is 32.
l
Before starting the loopback detection for the MPLS domain, it is required that all LSRs be configured with loopback detection function. However, in setting up an LDP session, the loopback detection configuration of both sides can be different.
l
By default, the loopback detection is disabled.
l
The loopback detection configuration is only effective on the established LSP.
l
The system considers that the loopback occurs in any of the following conditions, and the LSP fails to set up:
Context
–
The LSR record already exists in the path vector table.
–
The maximum value of the path hop is exceeded.
Procedure Step 1 Run the mpls ldp command to enable the MPLS LDP globally. Step 2 Run the loop-detect command to start the loopback detection. Step 3 Run the hops-count command to set the maximum hops for the loopback detection. Step 4 Run the path-vectors command to set the maximum value of path vectors. 27-24
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
27 Configuring MPLS Access
Step 5 Run the display mpls ldp command to query the configuration of the LDP loopback detection. ----End
Example To configure the LDP loopback detection with the maximum hop of 30 and the maximum path vector of 30, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls ldp huawei(config-mpls-ldp)#loop-detect huawei(config-mpls-ldp)#hops-count 30 huawei(config-mpls-ldp)#path-vectors 30 huawei(config)#display mpls ldp { |||all|verbose|interface|peer|session|remote-peer|lsp }: Command: display mpls ldp LDP Global Information -------------------------------------------------------------------Protocol Version : V1 Neighbor Liveness : 600 Sec Graceful Restart : Off FT Reconnect Timer : 300 Sec MTU Signaling : On Recovery Timer : 300 Sec LDP Instance Information -------------------------------------------------------------------Instance ID : 0 VPN-Instance : Instance Status : Active LSR ID : 4.4.4.4 Hop Count Limit : 30 Path Vector Limit : 30 Loop Detection : On DU Re-advertise Timer : 10 Sec DU Re-advertise Flag : On DU Explicit Request : Off Request Retry Flag : On Label Distribution Mode : Independent Label Retention Mode : Liberal --------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 27-16 lists the related operations for configuring the LDP loopback detection. Table 27-16 Related operations for configuring the LDP loopback detection To...
Run the Command...
Query information of the peer session
display mpls ldp session
Query a MPLS LSP
display mpls lsp
27.6.10 Configuring the LDP MD5 Authentication This operation enables you to configure the LDP MD5 authentication.
Context l
To enhance the security of the LDP session connection, you can configure MD5 authentication to the TCP used by the LDP.
l
By default, the LDP MD5 authentication is not configured.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
27-25
27 Configuring MPLS Access
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 Run the mpls ldp command to enable the MPLS LDP globally. Step 2 Run the md5-password command to configure the LDP MD5 authentication. Step 3 Run the display current-configuration command to query the configuration of the LDP MD5 authentication. ----End
Example To configure the connection password of the TCP used by the LDP as password, which is displayed in cipher text, and the peer LSR ID as 3.3.3.3, do as follows: huawei(config)#mpls ldp huawei(config-mpls-ldp)#md5-password cipher 3.3.3.3 password huawei(config-mpls-ldp)#quit huawei(config)#display current-configuration section mpls [MA5600V300R003: 3002] [device-config] board add 0/4 ADE [vlan-config] vlan 140 mux port vlan 2 0/7 2 [config] mplsvlan 2 stp enable [mpls] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.2 mpls label advertisenon-null lsp-triggerhost mplsl2vpn [mpls-ldp] mpls ldp md5-password cipher 3.3.3.3 S;IKAY5^0NWQ=^Q`MAF4 H303ESC/H304ESC > DIS EMU > FAN EMU > End.
l
With DC power supply, Start > H561ESC > FAN EMU > End.
l
With AC power supply, Start > POWER4845 EMU > FAN EMU > End.
35.2.3 Procedure for Configuring an H303ESC Procedure Step 1 Add an H303ESC EMU. huawei(config)#emu add 0 H303ESC 0 30 fore mdesc NOTE
The slave node number of H303ESC EMU is always 30.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
35-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Step 2 Set the upper and lower limits of temperature alarm. huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#esc analog 0 alarm-upper-limit 55 alarm-lower-limit 5
Step 3 Set the level of the door status sensor. huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#esc digital 1 available-level high-level
Step 4 Add an EMU, with the type of FAN. huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#quit huawei(config)#emu add 1 FAN 0 6 hwfan
Step 5 Set the FAN speed adjustment mode. huawei(config)#interface emu 1 huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed mode manual
Step 6 Set the speed level of the FAN. huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed adjust 4
Step 7 Set the FAN alarm report. huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset block forbid
Step 8 Save the data. huawei(config-if-fan-1)#quit huawei(config)#quit huawei#save
----End
35.2.4 Verification for Configuring an H303ESC Result Run the display esc environment info command to query the environment information about the H303ESC. huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#display esc environment info EMU ID: 0 H303ESC environment state Fan control mode :Auto Fan run state: Open ------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name State Value AlmUpper AlmLower Unit 0 Temperature Normal 34.26 55 5 ℃
1 Humidity 2 3 4 5 6 7 ---------------Digital ID Name 0 Wring 2 Door2 4 Theft_Alarm 6 Water_Alarm 8 Window_Broken 10 12 14 16 18 -
35-6
Normal 31.37 80 0 %R.H. Normal -128.00 127 -128 Normal -128.00 127 -128 Normal -128.00 127 -128 Normal -128.00 127 -128 Normal -128.00 127 -128 Normal -128.00 127 -128 Environment Info--------------------------State Value |ID Name State Value Normal 1 |1 Door1 Normal 1 Normal 1 |3 Fire_Alarm Normal 1 Normal 1 |5 Fog Normal 1 Normal 1 |7 Peculiar_Smell Normal 1 Normal 1 |9 Normal 1 Normal 1 |11 Normal 1 Normal 1 |13 Normal 1 Normal 1 |15 Normal 1 Normal 1 |17 Normal 1 Normal 1 |19 Normal 1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
20 Normal 1 |21 Normal 1 --------------------------------------------------------------------
Query the configuration of the FAN. huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 1 FAN configration parameter: -------------------------------------------------------------------FAN timing mode: Manual timing FAN speed level: 4 -------------------------------------------------------------------Alarm_name Permit/Forbid Read temperature fault Permit Fan block Forbid Temperature high Permit Power fault Permit --------------------------------------------------------------------
35.2.5 Procedure for Configuring a DIS EMU Procedure Step 1 Add an EMU. huawei(config)#emu add 1 dis 0 0 fore
Step 2 Query the DIS state. huawei(config)#display emu 1 EMU ID: 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------EMU name : EMU type : DIS Used or not : Used EMU state : Fault Frame ID : 0 Subnode : 0 COM port : Fore --------------------------------------------------------------------------NOTE
If the EMU state is fault, following these steps to check the configuration: l
Make sure that the physical connection is correct.
l
Make sure that the DC distribution module is connected properly to the MA5600.
l
Make sure that the DIP switches S1-1 to S1-5 on the environment monitor board of the module are set to ON.
l
Make sure that the EMU type, shelf ID, subnode number and serial port are correct.
Step 3 Query the environment information. huawei(config-if-dis-1)#display distribution environment info EMU ID: 1 distribution environment info ------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name State Value AlmUpper AlmLower Unit 0 input -48V 1 Normal 52.00 60 42 volt 1 input -48V 2 Normal 53.00 60 42 volt 2 temperature Normal 30.00 55 5 ℃
3
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
humidity
Normal 36.00
80
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
0
%R.H.
35-7
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
4 out_analog1(out_analog1) Normal -128.00 127 -128 5 out_analog2(out_analog2) Normal -128.00 127 -128 ----------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------ID Name State Value |ID Name State Value 0 output ctrl digital 1Normal |1 output ctrl digital 2Normal 2 output ctrl digital 3Normal |3 output ctrl digital 4Normal 4 board +12V Normal |5 board +24V Normal 6 LightningproofBoard1Normal |7 LightningproofBoard2Normal 8 out_digital 1 Normal 0 |9 out_digital 2 Normal 0 10 out_digital 3 Normal 0 |11 out_digital 4 Normal 0 12 out_digital 5 Normal 0 |13 out_digital 6 Normal 0 14 out_digital 7 Normal 0 |15 out_digital 8 Normal 0 --------------------------------------------------------------------
You can configure the environment parameters of the DC distribution module according to the display. Step 4 Set the upper and lower limit for temperature alarm. Run the distribution temperature command to set the temperature alarm thresholds. Step 5 Re-query the environment information. Run the display distribution environment info command to query the DIS environment information. ----End
35.2.6 Procedure for Configuring POWER4845 EMU Procedure Step 1 Add a POWER4845 EMU. huawei(config)#emu add 0 POWER4845 0 10 fore
Step 2 Query the power running state. In ESC mode, run the display power run info command to query the running state of the POWER4845 module. Step 3 Query the environment information. In ESC mode, run the display power environment info command to query the environment information about the POWER4845 module. You can configure the environment parameters of the AC power module according to the display. NOTE
Procedures for configuring all these types of EMUs are similar. Refer to the above examples to configure the EMUs. Note that the key words used in the commands are different.
----End
35.3 Adding an EMU This operation enables you to add an EMU.
35-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Context l
There are several EMU types, including FAN, POWER4845, H303ESC, H304ESC and H561ESC.
l
The slave nodes of the H303ESC, H304ESC and H561ESC are always 30.
l
By default, the slave nodes of the FAN and the POWER4845 are 0. You can set the slave node. Make sure that the setting is consistent with that of the DIP switch. In this case, the EMU can communicate with the control board correctly.
l
When the system monitors several EMUs at a time, make sure that their slave nodes are different.
l
For the communication serial port, select back mode for FAN, select fore mode for the control board. For other EMUs, select the mode according to the requirements.
Procedure Step 1 Run the emu add command to add an EMU. Step 2 Run the display emu command to query the EMU state. ----End
Example To add an H303ESC, do as follows: huawei(config)#emu add 0 H303ESC 0 30 fore mdpower huawei(config)#dispaly emu 0 EMU ID: 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------EMU name : mdpower EMU type : H303ESC Used or not : Used EMU state : Normal Frame ID : 0 Subnode : 30 COM Port : Fore
Related Operation Table 35-5 lists the related operations for adding an EMU. Table 35-5 Related operations for adding an EMU
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Delete an EMU
emu del
l
The EMU type cannot be changed after you configure it. If you need to change the EMU type, first delete the EMU, and then add a new one.
l
If an EMU in the shelf is replaced, delete the EMU, and then add a new EMU.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
35-9
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
35.4 Configuring the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU This operation enables you to configure the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU.
Context NOTE
Compared with the H303ESC, the H304ESC provides management function on batteries, but does not provide the humidity monitor function.
Table 35-6 lists the commands for configuring the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU. Table 35-6 Commands for configuring the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU.
35-10
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Set the fan control parameters
esc fan
l
The status of the fan tray can be opened, closed or auto.
l
The default control status of the fan tray is auto. It means that you need to set the temperatures at which the fans start and stop working.
l
By default, the fans start to work at 45° C, and stop working at 30°C.
Set the analog parameters
esc analog
This command is used to set the upper and lower alarm thresholds of analog parameters, such as temperature and humidity.
Set the digital parameters
esc digital
l
This command is used to set the digital parameters, such as MDF state and door status sensor, and normal state of the digital parameters.
l
The state of a digital parameter can be in a high level or low level. If an alarm is reported but the system is normal, you can run the esc digital command to change the level of the digital parameter in order to eliminate the alarm. For example, if the digital parameter is at a high level (1) when an alarm is reported, you can run the command to set the high level as normal state.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Set the extended serial port parameters
esc com
This command is used to set the serial port parameters, including the port ID, key word, baud rate, data bit, stop bit, and parity check methods. When you set the baud rate, make sure the setting is consistent with the DIP switch setting of S7-4 at the lower right side of the board. If S7-4=ON, the serial port rate is 19200 bit/s; if S7-4=OFF, the rate is 9600 bit/s. The default DIP setting is ON.
Specify the power module monitored by the H303ESC/ 304ESC
esc power
This command is used to add a power module before setting the parameters. The power module supported at present is power4810.
Set 4810 power parameters
esc 810
This command is used to set power-off voltages for transmission unit or subscriber lines, as well as whether to limit the current.
Reset the H303/304ESC environment monitor board
reset
-
Set battery parameters (H304ESC only)
esc battery
This command is used to set the battery capacity, allowed power-off state, poweroff voltage, and timed even charging duration. The settings shall cover battery groups 0 and 1.
Procedure Run the esc analog command to configure the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU. ----End
Example To set the upper and lower limits of the temperature of the H303ESC EMU, do as follows: huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#esc analog 0 alarm-upper-limit 60 alarm-lower-limit 5
Related Operation Table 35-7 lists the related operations for configuring the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
35-11
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Table 35-7 Related operations for configuring the H303ESC/H304ESC EMU To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Query the user defined digital alarms
display outside-digital private-alarm
-
Query the user defined analogue alarms
display outside-analog private-alarm
-
Query the H303/304ESC system parameters
display esc system parameter
-
Query the environment information
display esc environment info
Environment information comprises the analog parameters and digital parameters. l
Analog parameters are obtained through analog parameter sensors such as the built-in temperature and humidity sensors on the H303/H304ESC. Analog quantities have a value range and can fluctuate.
l
Digital parameters are obtained through digital parameter sensors, such as door status sensor and fire alarms.
Query the alarms
display esc alarm
-
Reset the EMU
reset
-
Query the EMU version number
display version
-
35.5 Configuring an H561ESC EMU This operation enables you to configure an H561ESC EMU.
Context Table 35-8 lists the commands for configuring an H561ESC EMU. Table 35-8 Commands for configuring an H561ESC EMU
35-12
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Set the analogue parameters
esc analog
The analog parameters include alarm thresholds for temperature, humidity, voltage, and current, or user defined alarms.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Set the digital parameters
esc digital
The digital parameters include the MDF and cabinet door status sensor, or user defined alarms.
Reset the H561ESC environment monitor board
reset
-
Procedure Run the mapping command to configure an H561ESC EMU. ----End
Example To run the esc digital command to set the level of the MDF, do as follows: huawei(config-if-h561esc-0)#esc digital 1 available-level high-level
Related Operation Table 35-9 lists the related operations for configuring an H561ESC EMU. Table 35-9 Related operations for configuring an H561ESC EMU To...
Run the Command...
Query the H561ESC system parameters
display esc system parameter
Query the environment information
display esc environment info
Query the alarms
display esc alarm
Query the user defined digital alarms
display outside-digital private-alarm
Query the user defined analogue alarms
display outside-analog private-alarm
Query the H561ESC version number
display version
35.6 Configuring a POWER4845 EMU This operation enables you to configure a POWER4845 EMU.
Context Table 35-10 lists the commands for configuring a POWER4845 EMU. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
35-13
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Table 35-10 Commands for configuring a POWER4845 EMU
35-14
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Set the POWER4845 battery parameters
power battery parameter
This command is used to set the battery charging current-limit coefficient, equalized-charging time, the number of the battery group and the battery capacity.
Set the POWER4845 environment parameters
power environment
This command is used to set the upper/lower alarm thresholds and upper/lower test limits for the environment humidity or temperature, to ensure the power to generate an alarm when it works in an environment that does not match the set conditions.
Set the number of the POWER4845 modules
power module-num
Power 4845 supports up to 3 rectifier modules.
Set the POWER4845 module parameters
power module-parameter
This command is used to set the switch-on and switch-off control of the POWER4845 module. By default, the power modules are switched on, which means the modules supply power for the system.
Set the POWER4845 power-off parameters
power off
Power off occurs in two cases: load power off and battery power off.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
l
When the mains input stops working, the batteries provide power for the system.
l
When the output voltage from the batteries drops below the load power off voltage, the power supply for service load will be disconnected.
l
When the output voltage from the batteries drops below the battery power off voltage, the batteries will stop working.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Set the POWER4845 supply parameters
power supply-parameter
This command is used to set the AC over-voltage, AC undervoltage, DC over-voltage and DC under-voltage alarm thresholds for a power, to enable the rectifier module to power off automatically when the AC voltage or DC voltage is abnormal.
Set the backup parameters of the POWER4845
power outside_digital
This command is used to set such extended digital parameters as valid level, name to identify the digit and self-defined alarm to monitor the device digits timely.
Set the battery charging parameters
power charge
This command is used to set the charging mode and charging voltage for batteries connected with POWER4845.
Set the power4845 test parameters
power battery-test
This command is used to set the battery auto-test period parameters and the discharging end-voltage to implement the battery auto-discharging test.
Set the high temperature power-off parameter
power temperature-off
This command is used to set the load or battery high temperature power-off parameters and then to protect the load or battery.
Make sure that these conditions are met in the configuration: l
DC overvoltage > battery even charging voltage > battery float charging voltage > DC undervoltage > loading power-off voltage > battery power-off voltage.
l
DC overvoltage > (float charging voltage + 2 V).
l
Float charging voltage > (DC undervoltage + 2 V). NOTE
You can run the following commands to configure the parameters:
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
l
Run the power charge command to set the battery equalized-charging voltage or the battery float charging voltage.
l
Run the power battery parameter command to set the DC undervoltage or the DC overvoltage.
l
Run the power temperature-off command to set the battery power-off voltage or the battery group power-off voltage.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
35-15
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Procedure Run the command in Table 35-10 to configure a POWER4845 EMU. ----End
Example To set the POWER4845 battery parameters, do as follows: huawei(config-if-power4845-3)#power battery parameter 0.2 60 1 130
Related Operation Table 35-11 lists the related operations for configuring a POWER4845 EMU. Table 35-11 Related operations for configuring a POWER4845 EMU To...
Run the Command...
Query the POWER4845 alarms
display power alarm
Query the POWER4845 environment information
display power environment info
Query the POWER4845 environment configuration
display power environment parameter
Query the POWER4845 running information
display power run info
Query the POWER4845 configuration
display power system parameter
Query the POWER4845 battery test parameters
display power battery-test info
35.7 Configuring the FAN Alarm Report This operation enables the report of the FAN running alarms to the EMU.
Prerequisite The FAN EMU has existed and works in the normal state.
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter FAN mode. Step 2 Run the fan alarmset command to configure the FAN alarm report. Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query information about FAN alarm. ----End 35-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Example To disable the report of FAN block alarm, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface emu 1 huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset block forbid huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 0 FAN configration parameter: -------------------------------------------------------FAN timing mode: Manual timing FAN speed level: 4 -------------------------------------------------------Alarm_name Permit/Forbid Read temperature fault Permit Fan block Forbid Temperature high Permit Power fault Permit --------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 35-12 lists the related operations for configuring the FAN alarm report. Table 35-12 Related operations for configuring the FAN alarm report To...
Run the Command...
Remarks
Query the running information about the fans
display fan environment info
FAN environment monitor mode
Query the alarm information about the fans
display fan alarm
FAN environment monitor mode
35.8 Setting the FAN Speed Adjustment Mode This operation enables you to set the fan speed adjustment mode.
Prerequisite The FAN EMU has existed and works in the normal state.
Context There are two fan speed adjustment modes: l
Automatic
l
Manual
By default, the mode is manual with the fan speed level of 5. It is recommended that you change the mode to automatic. If the mode is not set to automatic, the air flow increases in case of low or normal temperature. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
35-17
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter FAN mode. Step 2 Run the fan speed command to set the fan speed adjustment mode. Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the parameter setting. ----End
Example To set the fan speed adjustment mode as automatic, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-fan-0)#fan speed mode automatic huawei(config-if-fan-0)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 0 FAN configration parameter: -------------------------------------------------------FAN timing mode: Auto timing FAN speed level: 4 -------------------------------------------------------Alarm_name Permit/Forbid Read temperature fault Permit Fan block Forbid Temperature high Permit Power fault Permit --------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 35-13 lists the related operations for setting the fan speed adjustment mode. Table 35-13 Related operations for setting the fan speed adjustment mode To...
Run the command...
Remarks
Set the fan speed
fan speed adjust
Set the fan speed in manual mode, use this command.
Set the fan alarm report to EMU
fan alarmset
-
Query the alarm information about fans
display fan alarm
-
35.9 Configuring the FAN Speed This operation enables you to configure the FAN speed.
Prerequisite The FAN EMU has existed and works in the normal state. 35-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Context FAN speed level ranges from 0 to 5. Level 0 refers to the lowest and level 5 refers to the highest fan speed level. l
The nominated fan speed is enough for heat dissipation when the system works in the permitted highest temperature.
l
Low-speed running of fans can prolong the lifetime of the fans.
l
When abnormality occurs or one of the fans fails, other fans can run at high speed to compensate the air flow.
l
Low-speed running of fans can reduce dust concentration in the air filter.
l
Set the fan speed in manual mode.
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter FAN mode. Step 2 Run the fan speed command to configure the FAN speed. Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the setting of the FAN speed. ----End
Example To set the FAN speed as 3, do as follows: huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-fan-0)#fan speed adjust 3 huawei(config-if-fan-0)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 0 FAN configration parameter: -------------------------------------------------------FAN timing mode: Manual timing FAN speed level: 3 -------------------------------------------------------Alarm_name Permit/Forbid Read temperature fault Permit Fan block Forbid Temperature high Permit Power fault Permit -------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation Table 35-14 lists the related operations for setting the FAN speed. Table 35-14 Related operations for setting the FAN speed
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
To...
Run the Command...
Set the fan speed adjustment mode
fan speed mode
Set the fan alarm report to EMU
fan alarmset
Query the alarm information about fans
display fan alarm
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
35-19
35 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
35-20
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36
36 MSTP Networking Example
MSTP Networking Example
About This Chapter This chapter describes the MSTP networking example supported by the MA5600. 36.1 Networking The section describes the typical networking in MSTP mode. 36.2 Data Plan This section describes the data plan for the sample MSTP network. 36.3 Configuring MA5600-1 The following shows how to configure MA5600-1. 36.4 Configuring MA5600-2 The following shows how to configure MA5600-2. 36.5 Configuring MA5600-3 The following shows how to configure MA5600-3. 36.6 Configuring MA5600-4 The following shows how to configure MA5600-4. 36.7 Configuring MA5600-5 The following shows how to configure MA5600-5. 36.8 Verification All services configured on all DSLAMs run in the normal state.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-1
36 MSTP Networking Example
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36.1 Networking The section describes the typical networking in MSTP mode. Three MA5600s (MA5600-1, MA5600-2, and MA5600-3) form an MSTP ring network. l
The MA5600-1 is connected to the IP network.
l
The MA5600-3, through its GE port, is subtended with the MA5600-4.
l
The MA5600-1 works together with the MA5600-5 to provide QinQ service through IP network.
Figure 36-1 shows a sample MSTP network of the MA5600.
36-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
Figure 36-1 Sample MSTP network of the MA5600
ISP1 ISP2 ISP3
Multicast server
SoftSwitch
iManager N2000
DHCP server
IP
LAN switch BRAS
2
3
5
7
5
A D G E
A D G E
S H E A
0
S H E A
7 0
1 2
SCU
2
3
5
A D G E
A D G E
S H E A
7 0 1
1
5
A D
S H E A
G E
SCU
HG STB
SCU MA5600-5
MA5600-1 7 0 1 2
SCU MA5600-3
MA5600-2 2
3
5
A D G E
A D G E
S H E A
7 0
SCU Ephone
TV
PC
MA5600-4
ADSL2+ modem PC
36.2 Data Plan This section describes the data plan for the sample MSTP network. Table 36-1 lists the service and data plan for the sample network of MA5600 in the Figure 36-1.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
Table 36-1 Data plan for the sample MSTP network Item
MA5600-1
Service
l
ADSL2+ service
l
ADSL2+ service
l
l
SHDSL service
l
SHDSL service
l
l
QinQ leased line service (interopera te with MA5600 -5)
l
Stacking Wholesale service
l
Triple Play service
l
Inband NMS address
MA5600-2
MA5600-4
MA5600-5
ADSL2+ service
ADSL2+ service
SHDSL service
SHDSL service Multicast service
QinQ leased line service (interoperate with the leased line service of MA5600-1)
Multicast service
10.8.176.2
10.8.176.3
10.8.176.4
10.8.176.5
10.8.176.6
255.255.255. 0
255.255.255.0 Gateway:
255.255.255. 0
255.255.255. 0
255.255.255. 0
Gateway:
10.8.176.1/24
Gateway:
Gateway:
Gateway:
10.8.176.1/2 4
10.8.176.1/2 4
10.8.176.1/2 4
Upstream: 0/7/0-0/7/1
Upstream: 0/7/0
Upstream: 0/7/0
10.8.176.1/24 GE port of the SCU board
Upstream: 0/7/0
Upstream: 0/7/0-0/7/1
VLAN
NMS: 10
NMS: 10
NMS: 10
NMS: 10
NMS: 10
QinQ: 50
Stacking: 60-62 (inner stacking: 111-113)
ADSL2+: 1000-1063 (adopt VLAN authenticatio n)
Multicast: 100
QinQ: 50
RSTP: 0/7/1-0/7/2
Multicast: 100
36-4
MA5600-3
RSTP: 0/7/2
ADSL2+: 1000-1063 (adopt VLAN authenticatio n)
Triple Play: 100-102
SHDSL: 1300-1331 (adopt VLAN authenticatio n)
SHDSL: 1300 (adopt PPPoE authentication)
ADSL2+: 1000 (adopt PPPoE authentication)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
SHDSL: 1300-1330 (adopt VLAN authenticatio n)
ADSL2+: 1000 (adopt PPPoE authenticatio n) SHDSL: 1300 (adopt PPPoE authenticatio n)
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
Item
MA5600-1
MA5600-2
MA5600-3
MA5600-4
MA5600-5
Slot
ADSL2+: 0/3
ADSL2+: 0/3
ADSL2+: 0/3
QinQ: 0/5/31
SHDSL: 0/5
SHDSL: 0/5
ADSL2+: 0/3
QinQ: 0/5/31
Stacking:
SHDSL: 0/5
Multicast: 0/2/2, 0/2/3
0/2/0-10 (map VLAN 60, ISP1)
Multicast: 0/2/2, 0/2/3
PVC VPI/ VCI of all users: 0/35
PVC VPI/ VCI of all users: 0/35
SHDSL: 0/5
0/2/11-20 (map VLAN 61, ISP2) 0/2/21-30 (map VLAN 62, ISP3) Triple Play: 0/2/31 User PVC
PVC VPI/ VCI of all users: 0/35
VPI/VCI of triple play: l
Video service: 0/35
l
Internet service: 0/36
l
Voice service: 0/37
NMS host
195.71.131.38 and 195.71.131.39
Log host
217.188.56.40 and 217.188.57.40
Time server
193.189.251.38 and 193.189.251.42
EMU
AC PS4845 power monitoring, fan monitoring
DHCP server
DHCP server1: 10.1.1.2 (Active) 10.1.1.3 (Standby)
PVC VPI/ VCI of all users: 0/35
Gateway: 10.1.1.1/24 DHCP server2: 10.4.4.2 (Active) 10.4.4.3 (Standby) Gateway: 10.4.4.1/24
Upper layer device
The upper layer device supports the DHCP option82 function. The BRAS supports the PITP, Stacking VLAN and QinQ VLAN function. The BRAS supports inner and outer VLAN Tags. The VLAN ID of the traffic flow sent from the IP network to the DSLAM is 100. The upper layer device classifies the downstream traffic. Different service carries different 802.1p labels. The VLAN mapping to the DSLAN is configured in the upper layer IP network. The IP address of LAN switch at the MA5600 side is 10.10.10.1/24.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
36.3 Configuring MA5600-1 The following shows how to configure MA5600-1.
Procedure Step 1 Confirm the board. huawei>enable huawei#config huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 2 Configure NMS. 1.
Configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface. l
Create the NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0-2
l
Enter NMS VLAN interface mode. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10
l
Configure the IP address of the NMS VLAN interface. huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 10.8.176.2 255.255.255.0
2.
Add the route. l
Configure the route destined to the NMS (Trap destination host). huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the time server. huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the log host. huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.56.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.57.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
3.
Add the ACL rule. huawei(config)#acl 3010 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source any destination any huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule deny ip source any destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.39 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.42 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.56.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.57.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#quit huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/1 huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/2
4.
Configure the SNMP. l
36-6
Configure the community name and access authority. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private l
Configure the contact information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075512345678
l
Configure the device local information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Configure the SNMP version. Here, the SNMP version must be the same as that of NMS. In this example, the NMS version is set as SNMP V2C. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
5.
Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
6.
Set the trap destination address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.38 securityname public huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.39 securityname public
7.
Set the trap source address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 10
Step 3 Configure the time server. huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.38 source-interface vlanif 10 huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.42 source-interface vlanif 10
Step 4 Configure the log host. huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost
add 217.188.56.40 syslog-1 activate ip 217.188.56.40 add 217.188.57.40 syslog-2 activate ip 217.188.57.40
Step 5 Configure the EMU. This section takes the fan and PS4845 power supply as examples to show how to configure the environment monitoring unit (EMU). By default, both the primary and secondary node addresses of the fan EMU are 0. In this example, suppose they are 1. In this case, you need to set the DIP switch of the node address on the fan monitoring unit as 1. huawei(config)#emu add 0 power 4845 0 0 fore huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 1 back huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-power4845-0)#power module-num 2 1 2 huawei(config-if-power4845-0)#quit
Step 6 Configure SCU subtending MA5600-1 is subtended with MA5600-2, MA5600-3 and MA5600-4. Therefore, subtending shall be configured. huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port
60 to 62 standard vlan 60 to 62 0/7 0-2 101 to 102 standard vlan 101 to 102 0/7 0-2
Step 7 Enable MSTP. 1.
Enable the MSTP function. huawei(config)#stp enable
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-7
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
2.
Set the MSTP region name. huawei(config)#stp region-configuration huawei(stp-region-configuration)#region-name hwrg
3.
Configure MSTP instance 1. huawei(stp-region-configuration)#instance 1 vlan 1 to 4094
4.
Activate the configuration of the MSTP region. huawei(stp-region-configuration)#active region-configuration STP actives region configuration, it may take several minutes,are you sure to active region configuration? [Y/N][N]y
5.
Set the priority of MA5600_1 in the instance. huawei(stp-region-configuration)#quit huawei(config)#stp instance 0 priority 0 huawei(config)#stp instance 1 priority 0
Step 8 Configure ADSL2+ service. The MA5600 supports the ADSL2+ service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the ADSL2+ service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service." 1.
Configure the ADSL2+ line profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ line profile based on your needs. huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected >Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:n > Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]:1 > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: > Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)[n]:n >Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: > 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]: > Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [24544]:8000 > Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [1024]: Add profile 10 successfully
2.
Configure the ADSL2+ alarm profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ alarm profile based on your needs. huawei(config)#adsl alarm-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Link Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0] > Enable and disable the initial failure trap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1)[0]:1 > The number of failed fast retrain seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
36-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: Add profile 10 successfully
3.
and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit
Configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile by running the traffic table command based on your needs. In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used.
4.
Activate the ADSL2+ port. huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/3 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#alarm-config all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. l
Configure the SCU board. The configuration of the upstream port of the SCU board shall be the same as that of the peer end. Run the auto-neg command to set the port to work in auto negotiation mode. If the port works in non auto negotiation mode, change to the SCU config mode and run the speed command to change the port rate, and run the duplex command duplex to change the port duplex mode.
l
Configure the VLAN. The ADSL2+ users of MA5600-1 adopt the VLAN authentication. In this case, the MUX VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 to 1063 mux huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 to 1063 0/7 0-2
6.
Add the service port. All ports of the 0/3 board provide ADSL2+ service. To add the service ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command. huawei(config)#multi-service-port from-vlan 1000 port 0/3 0-63 vpi 0 vci 35 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 9 Configure the SHDSL service. The MA5600 supports the SHDSL service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-9
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
to configure the SHDSL service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "22 Configuring the SHDSL Service." 1.
Configure the SHDSL line profile. To configure the SHDSL line profile, run the shdsl line-profile add or shdsl line-profile quickadd command. huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile quickadd 10 line two-wire rate 2048 2048 psd symmetric transmission Annex-A remote disable probe disable snr-margin ds-curr 10 ds-worst 10 us-curr 10 us-worst 10 bitmap 0x03
2.
Configure the SHDSL alarm profile. To configure the SHDSL alarm profile, run the shdsl alarm-profile add command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
3.
Activate the SHDSL port. huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#alarm-config all 1 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#quit
4.
Configure the upstream port. The SHDSL users of MA5600-1 adopt the VLAN authentication. In this case, the MUX VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1300 to 1331 mux huawei(config)#port vlan 1300 to 1331 0/7 0-2
5.
Add the service port. Ports 0-31 of board 0/5 provide the SHDSL service. To activate the ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command. huawei(config)#multi-service-port from-vlan 1300 port 0/5 0-31 vpi 0 vci 35 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 10 Configure the QinQ leased line service. MA5600-1 and MA5600-5 serve two branches of a company to provide the QinQ leased line service. 1.
Create VLAN 50. huawei(config)#vlan 50 mux
2.
Set VLAN 50 as QinQ VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan attrib 50 q-in-q
3.
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 50 0/7 0-2
4.
Add the service port. To add the service port, run the service-port command. Note that the VPI and VCI values of the service port must be the same as those on the modem. The QinQ VLAN supports the PVC-priority scheduling policy only. In this case, select the profile that supports PVC-priority policy. huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car off priority 0 priority-policy pvcSetting huawei(config)#service-port vlan 50 shdsl 0/5/31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
Step 11 Configure the multicast service. After the configuration, the following results shall be achieved: 36-10
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
l
Users of port 0/2/2 must be authenticated, and have rights to watch two programs and to preview one program.
l
Users of port 0/2/3 do not need authenticating.
1.
Configure the xDSL. In this example, it is unnecessary to configure the xDSL. The default line profile (profile 1002) is used.
2.
Configure the VLAN. l
Create a VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart
l
Add the upstream port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/7 0-2
l
Configure the native VLAN. huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 100 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 1 vlan 100 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 2 vlan 100
l
Create the traffic profile. huawei(config)#traffic table index 8 ip car off priority 5 priority-policy pvc-Setting
l
Add ADSL2+ port 0/2/2 and 0/2/3 to VLAN 100. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/2 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/3 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
3.
Configure the multicast service. l
Enable the multicast proxy. huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp mode proxy
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/7/0 100
l
Set the upstream port to work in program mode. huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port-mode program
l
Configure the program library. huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program2 ip 224.1.1.2 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program3 ip 224.1.1.3 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0
l
Configure the authority profile. huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program1 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program2 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program3 preview
l
Configure the preview parameters. In this example, set the preview duration for program 3 as 150s, the number of preview attempts as 6 each day and the preview interval as 60s. huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-duration 150 huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-times 6 huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-interval 60
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-11
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
To set the time to clear the previous preview attempts, run the igmp preview autoreset-time command. In this example, set the time to 00:00:00. huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview auto-reset-time 00:00:00 l
Configure the user data. huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/3 adsl 0 35 no-auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/2 adsl 0 35 auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile port 0/2/2 profile-name profile0
Step 12 Configure the subtending multicast service. In the MSTP ring network, MA5600-1 is subtended with MA5600-3, and MA5600-3 is subtended with MA5600-4. According to the data plan, MA5600-4 provides the multicast service. In this way, it is necessary to configure the multicast subtending on MA5600-1 first. 1.
Add the upstream port. The upstream port is already added in 11.3. It is unnecessary to configure it again.
2.
Configure the IGMP proxy. The IGMP proxy is already configured in 11.3. It is unnecessary to configure it again.
3.
Configure the program library. The program library is already configured in 11.3. It is unnecessary to configure it again.
4.
Configure the multicast for the subtending port. l
Specify a subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port 0/7/1 huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port 0/7/2
l
Modify the subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port modify 0/7/1 static enable huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port modify 0/7/2 static enable
l
Add programs for the static subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp
static-join static-join static-join static-join static-join static-join
cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port
0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/2 0/7/2 0/7/2
ip ip ip ip ip ip
224.1.1.1 224.1.1.2 224.1.1.3 224.1.1.1 224.1.1.2 224.1.1.3
Step 13 Save the data. huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
36.4 Configuring MA5600-2 The following shows how to configure MA5600-2.
Procedure Step 1 Confirm the board. huawei>enable huawei#config huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 2 Configure the NMS. 1. 36-12
Configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide l
36 MSTP Networking Example
Create the NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0-1
l
Enter NMS VLAN interface mode. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10
l
Configure the IP address of the NMS VLAN interface. huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 10.8.176.3 255.255.255.0
2.
Add the route. l
Configure the route destined to the NMS (Trap destination host). huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the time server. huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the log host. huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.56.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.57.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
3.
Add the ACL rule. huawei(config)#acl 3010 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source any destination any huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule deny ip source any destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.39 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.42 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.56.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.57.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#quit huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/0 huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/1
4.
Configure the SNMP. l
Configure the community name and access authority. huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
l
Configure the contact information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075512345678
l
Configure the device local information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Configure the SNMP version. Here, the SNMP version must be the same as that of NMS. In this example, the NMS version is set as SNMP V2C. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
5.
Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
6. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Set the trap destination address. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-13
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.38 securityname public huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.39 securityname public
7.
Set the trap source address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 10
Step 3 Configure the time server. huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.38 source-interface vlanif 10 huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.42 source-interface vlanif 10
Step 4 Configure the log host. huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost
add 217.188.56.40 syslog-1 activate ip 217.188.56.40 add 217.188.57.40 syslog-2 activate ip 217.188.57.40
Step 5 Configure the EMU. This section takes the fan and PS4845 power supply as examples to show how to configure the EMU. By default, both the primary and secondary node addresses of the fan EMU are 0. In this example, suppose they are 1. In this case, you need to set the DIP switch of the node address on the fan monitoring unit as 1. huawei(config)#emu add 0 power4845 0 0 fore huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 1 back huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-power4845-0)#power module-num 2 1 2 huawei(config-if-power4845-0)#quit
Step 6 Configure SCU subtending MA5600-1 is subtended with MA5600-2, MA5600-3 and MA5600-4. Therefore, subtending shall be configured. huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port
1001 vlan 1301 vlan
to 1063 standard 1001 to 1063 0/7 0-1 to 1063 standard 1063 0/7 0-1
Step 7 Configure MSTP. 1.
Enable the MSTP function. huawei(config)#stp enable
2.
Set the MSTP region name. huawei(config)#stp region-configuration huawei(stp-region-configuration)#region-name hwrg
3.
Configure MSTP instance 1. huawei(stp-region-configuration)#instance 1 vlan 1 to 4094
4.
Activate the configuration of the MSTP region. huawei(stp-region-configuration)#active region-configuration STP actives region configuration, it may take several minutes,are you sure to active region configuration? [Y/N][N]y
Step 8 Enable PITP. huawei(config)#pitp enable pmode
Step 9 Configure ADSL2+ service. The MA5600 supports the ADSL2+ service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how 36-14
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
to configure the ADSL2+ service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service." 1.
Configure the ADSL2+ line profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ line profile based on your needs. huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected >Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:n > Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]:1 > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: > Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)[n]:n >Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: > 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]: > Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [24544]:8000 > Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [1024]: Add profile 10 successfully
2.
Configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile by running the traffic table command based on your needs. In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used.
3.
Activate the ADSL2+ port. huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/3 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#alarm-config all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#quit
4.
Configure the upstream port. l
Configure the SCU board. The configuration of the upstream port of the SCU board shall be the same as that of the peer end. Run the auto-neg command to set the port to work in auto negotiation mode. If the port works in non auto negotiation mode, change to the SCU config mode and run the speed command to change the port rate, and run the duplex command duplex to change the port duplex mode.
l
Configure the VLAN. The ADSL2+ users of MA5600-2 adopt the PPPoE authentication. In this case, the smart VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/7 0-1
5.
Add the service port. All ports of ADSL2+ board 0/3 provides ADSL2+ service. To add the service port in batches, run the multi-service-port command. huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 1000 adsl 0/3 0-63 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 10 Configure the SHDSL service. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-15
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
The MA5600 supports the SHDSL service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the SHDSL service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "22 Configuring the SHDSL Service." 1.
Configure the SHDSL line profile. To configure the SHDSL line profile, run the shdsl line-profile add or shdsl line-profile quickadd command. huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile quickadd 10 line two-wire rate 2048 2048 psd symmetric transmission Annex-A remote disable probe disable snr-margin ds-curr 10 ds-worst 10 us-curr 10 us-worst 10 bitmap 0x03
2.
Configure the SHDSL alarm profile. To configure the SHDSL alarm profile, run the shdsl alarm-profile add command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
3.
Configure the SHDSL traffic profile. To configure the SHDSL traffic profile, run the traffic table command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
4.
Activate the SHDSL port. huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#alarm-config all 1 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. The SHDSL users of MA5600-2 adopt the PPPoE authentication. In this case, the smart VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1300 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1300 0/7 0-1
6.
Add the service port. l
Ports 0-30 of SHDSL board 0/5 provide the SHDSL service.
l
To add the service ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command.
huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 1300 shdsl 0/5 0-31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 11 Configure the stacking multi-ISPs wholesale service. ISP1 provides users of ports 0/2/0 to 0/2/10 on board with the multi-ISP wholesale service. ISP2 provides users of ports 11-20 to with the multi-ISP wholesale service. ISP3 provides users of port 21-30 with the multi-ISP wholesale service. 1.
Create a VLAN and set its attribute as stacking. huawei(config)#vlan 60 to 62 smart huawei(config)#vlan attrib 60 to 62 stacking
2.
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 60 to 62 0/7 0-1
3.
Add the service port. huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 60 adsl 0/2 0-10 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 61 adsl 0/2 11-20 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 62 adsl 0/2 21-30 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr
36-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
6 tx-cttr 6
4.
Configure the inner label. huawei(config)#stacking label vlan 60 baselabel 111 huawei(config)#stacking label vlan 61 baselabel 112 huawei(config)#stacking label vlan 62 baselabel 113
Step 12 Configure the triple play service. After the configuration, the following results shall be achieved: Users of ports 0/2/31 can watch the programs stored on servers 224.1.1.1 and 224.1.1.2, and can preview the programs stored on server 224.1.1.3. 1.
Configure the upstream port and VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port
2.
100 smart vlan 100 0/7 0-1 101 mux vlan 101 0/7 0-1 102 smart vlan 102 0/7 0-1
Configure the traffic table. The voice service has the highest priority, and the network access service has the lowest priority. Presume that the network access service uses traffic table 6, with the priority of 0. The following shows how to create the new traffic tables for the voice service and video service respectively. huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car 1024 priority 7 priority-policy Pvc-Setting huawei(config)#traffic table index 8 ip car off priority 5 priority-policy PvcSetting
3.
Configure the service port. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 101 adsl 0/2/31 vpi 0 vci 36 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 102 adsl 0/2/31 vpi 0 vci 37 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
4.
Configure DHCP relay mode for video service. l
Enable DHCP mode. huawei(config)#dhcp mode layer-3 option-60
l
Configure the DHCP server. huawei(config)#dhcp-server 1 ip 10.1.1.2 10.1.1.3 huawei(config)#dhcp domain video huawei(config-dhcp-domain-video)#dhcp-server 1
l
Configure the gateway mapped to the DHCP domain. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 100 huawei(config-if-vlanif100)#ip address 10.1.1.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif100)#dhcp domain video gateway 10.1.1.1
l
Enable the DHCP option82 function. huawei(config)#dhcp option82 enable huawei(config)#raio-mode xdsl-port-rate
5.
Configure DHCP relay mode for voice service. l
Configure the DHCP server. huawei(config)#dhcp-server 2 ip 10.4.4.2 10.4.4.3 huawei(config)#dhcp domain voice huawei(config-dhcp-domain-voice)#dhcp-server 2
l
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Configure the gateway mapped to the DHCP domain. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-17
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 102 huawei(config-if-vlanif102)#ip address 10.4.4.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif102)#dhcp domain voice gateway 10.4.4.1
6.
Configure the video service. huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 1 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 1 vlan 1 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#quit huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp mode proxy huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/7/0 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/7/1 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port-mode mstp huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program2 ip 224.1.1.2 vlan 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program3 ip 224.1.1.3 vlan 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program1 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program2 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program3 preview huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/30 adsl 0 35 auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile port 0/2/31 profile-name profile0
Step 13 Configure the subtending multicast service. In the MSTP ring network, MA5600-1 is subtended with MA5600-3, and MA5600-3 is subtended with MA5600-4. According to the data plan, MA5600-4 provides the multicast service. In this way, it is necessary to configure the multicast subtending on MA5600-2 first. 1.
Set the upstream port. The upstream port is already added in 12.6. It is unnecessary to configure it again.
2.
Configure the IGMP proxy. The IGMP proxy is already configured in 12.6. It is unnecessary to configure it again.
3.
Configure the program library. The program library is already configured in 12.6. It is unnecessary to configure it again.
4.
Configure the multicast for the subtending port. l
Specify a subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port 0/7/1
l
Modify a subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port modify 0/7/0 static enable huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port modify 0/7/1 static enable
l
Add programs for the static subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp
static-join static-join static-join static-join static-join static-join
cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port
0/7/0 0/7/0 0/7/0 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1
ip ip ip ip ip ip
224.1.1.1 224.1.1.2 224.1.1.3 224.1.1.1 224.1.1.2 224.1.1.3
Step 14 Save the data. huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End 36-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
36.5 Configuring MA5600-3 The following shows how to configure MA5600-3.
Procedure Step 1 Confirm the board. huawei>enable huawei#config huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 2 Configure the NMS. 1.
Configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface. l
Create the NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0-2
l
Enter NMS VLAN interface mode. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10
l
Configure the IP address of the NMS VLAN interface. huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 10.8.176.4 255.255.255.0
2.
Add the route. l
Configure the route destined to the NMS (Trap destination host). huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the time server. huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the log host. huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.56.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.57.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
3.
Add the ACL rule. huawei(config)#acl 3010 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source any destination any huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule deny ip source any destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.39 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.42 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.56.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.57.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#quit huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/0 huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/1
4.
Configure the SNMP. l
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Configure the community name and access authority. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-19
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private l
Configure the contact information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075512345678
l
Configure the device local information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Configure the SNMP version. Here, the SNMP version must be the same as that of NMS. In this example, the NMS version is set as SNMP V2C. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
5.
Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
6.
Set the trap destination address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.38 securityname public huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.39 securityname public
7.
Set the trap source address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 10
Step 3 Configure the time server. huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.38 source-interface vlanif 10 huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.42 source-interface vlanif 10
Step 4 Configure the log host. huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost
add 217.188.56.40 syslog-1 activate ip 217.188.56.40 add 217.188.57.40 syslog-2 activate ip 217.188.57.40
Step 5 Configure the EMU. This section takes the fan and PS4845 power supply as examples to show how to configure the environment monitoring unit (EMU). By default, both the primary and secondary node addresses of the fan EMU are 0. In this example, suppose they are 1. In this case, you need to set the DIP switch of the node address on the fan monitoring unit as 1. huawei(config)#emu add 0 power4845 0 0 fore huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 1 back huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-power4845-0)#power module-num 2 1 2 huawei(config-if-power4845-0)#quit
Step 6 Configure SCU subtending MA5600-1 is subtended with MA5600-2, MA5600-3 and MA5600-4. Therefore, subtending shall be configured. huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port
60 to 62 standard vlan 60 to 62 0/7 0-1 101 to 102 standard vlan 101 to 102 0/7 0-1 100 standard vlan 100 0/7 0-2
Step 7 Enable MSTP. 36-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1.
36 MSTP Networking Example
Enable the MSTP function. huawei(config)#stp enable
2.
set the MSTP region name. huawei(config)#stp region-configuration huawei(stp-region-configuration)#region-name hwrg
3.
Configure MSTP instance 1. huawei(stp-region-configuration)#instance 1 vlan 1 to 4094
4.
Activate the configuration of the MSTP region. huawei(stp-region-configuration)#active region-configuration STP actives region configuration, it may take several minutes,are you sure to active region configuration? [Y/N][N]y
Step 8 Configure ADSL2+ service. The MA5600 supports the ADSL2+ service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the ADSL2+ service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service." 1.
Configure the ADSL2+ line profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ line profile based on your needs. huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected >Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:n > Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]:1 > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: > Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)[n]:n >Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: > 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]: > Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [24544]:8000 > Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [1024]: Add profile 10 successfully
2.
Configure the ADSL2+ alarm profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ alarm profile based on your needs. huawei(config)#adsl alarm-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Link Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0] > Enable and disable the initial failure trap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1)[0]:1 > The number of failed fast retrain seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-21
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: Add profile 10 successfully
3.
and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit
Configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile by running the traffic table command based on your needs. In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used.
4.
Activate the ADSL2+ port. huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/3 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#alarm-config all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. l
Configure the SCU board. The configuration of the upstream port of the SCU board shall be the same as that of the peer end. Run the auto-neg command to set the port to work in auto negotiation mode. If the port works in non auto negotiation mode, change to the SCU config mode and run the speed command to change the port rate, and run the duplex command duplex to change the port duplex mode.
l
Configure the VLAN. The ADSL2+ users of MA5600-3 adopt the VLAN authentication. In this case, the MUX VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 to 1063 mux huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 to 1063 0/7 0-1
6.
Add the service port. All ports of ADSL2+ board 0/3 provides ADSL2+ service. To add the service port in batches, run the multi-service-port command. huawei(config)#multi-service-port from-vlan 1000 port 0/3 0-63 vpi 0 vci 35 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 9 Configure the SHDSL service. The MA5600 supports the SHDSL service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the SHDSL service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "22 Configuring the SHDSL Service." 36-22
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1.
36 MSTP Networking Example
Configure the SHDSL line profile. To configure the SHDSL line profile, run the shdsl line-profile add or shdsl line-profile quickadd command. huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile quickadd 10 line two-wire rate 2048 2048 psd symmetric transmission Annex-A remote disable probe disable snr-margin ds-curr 10 ds-worst 10 us-curr 10 us-worst 10 bitmap 0x03
2.
Configure the SHDSL alarm profile. To configure the SHDSL alarm profile, run the shdsl alarm-profile add command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
3.
Configure the SHDSL traffic profile. To configure the SHDSL traffic profile, run the traffic table command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
4.
Activate the SHDSL port. huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#alarm-config all 1 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. The SHDSL users of MA5600-3 adopt the VLAN authentication. In this case, the MUX VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1300 to 1331 mux huawei(config)#port vlan 1300 to 1331 0/7 0-1
6.
Add the service port. Ports 0-31 of board 0/5 provide the SHDSL service. To add the service ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command. huawei(config)#multi-service-port from-vlan 1300 port 0/5 0-31 vpi 0 vci 35 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 10 Configure the subtending multicast service. 1.
Configure the upstream port. l
Configure the native VLAN. huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 100 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 1 vlan 100
l
Enable the multicast proxy. huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp mode proxy
l
Configure the upstream port to work in the program mode. huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/7/0 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/7/1 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port-mode mstp
l
Configure the program library. huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program2 ip 224.1.1.2 vlan 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program3 ip 224.1.1.3 vlan 100
2.
Configure the subtending multicast. l
Specify the subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port 0/7/1 huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port 0/7/2
l
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Modify the subtending port. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-23
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port modify 0/7/0 static enable huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port modify 0/7/1 static enable huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port modify 0/7/2 static enable l
Add programs to the static subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp huawei(config-btv)#igmp
static-join static-join static-join static-join static-join static-join static-join static-join static-join
cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port cascade-port
0/7/0 0/7/0 0/7/0 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/2 0/7/2 0/7/2
ip ip ip ip ip ip ip ip ip
224.1.1.1 224.1.1.2 224.1.1.3 224.1.1.1 224.1.1.2 224.1.1.3 224.1.1.1 224.1.1.2 224.1.1.3
Step 11 Save the data. huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
36.6 Configuring MA5600-4 The following shows how to configure MA5600-4.
Procedure Step 1 Confirm the board. huawei>enable huawei#config huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 2 Configure the NMS. 1.
Configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface. l
Create the NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
l
Enter NMS VLAN interface mode. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10
l
Configure the IP address of the NMS VLAN interface. huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 10.8.176.5 255.255.255.0
2.
Add the route. l
Configure the route destined to the NMS (Trap destination host). huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the time server. huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the log host. huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.56.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.57.0 255.255.255.0 10.8.176.1 preference 1
3.
Add the ACL rule. huawei(config)#acl 3010 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source any destination any huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule deny ip source any destination 10.8.176.2
36-24
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.39 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.42 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.56.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.57.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#quit huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/0 huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/1
4.
Configure the SNMP. l
Configure the community name and access authority. huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
l
Configure the contact information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075512345678
l
Configure the device local information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Configure the SNMP version. Here, the SNMP version must be the same as that of NMS. In this example, the NMS version is set as SNMP V2C. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
5.
Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
6.
Set the trap destination address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.38 securityname public huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.39 securityname public
7.
Set the trap source address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 10
Step 3 Configure the time server. huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.38 source-interface vlanif 10 huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.42 source-interface vlanif 10
Step 4 Configure the log host. huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost
add 217.188.56.40 syslog-1 activate ip 217.188.56.40 add 217.188.57.40 syslog-2 activate ip 217.188.57.40
Step 5 Configure the EMU. This section takes the fan and PS4845 power supply as examples to show how to configure the environment monitoring unit (EMU). By default, both the primary and secondary node addresses of the fan EMU are 0. In this example, suppose they are 1. In this case, you need to set the DIP switch of the node address on the fan monitoring unit as 1. huawei(config)#emu add 0 power4845 0 0 fore huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 1 back
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-25
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-power4845-0)#power module-num 2 1 2 huawei(config-if-power4845-0)#quit
Step 6 Enable PITP. huawei(config)#pitp enable pmode
Step 7 Configure ADSL2+ service. The MA5600 supports the ADSL2+ service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the ADSL2+ service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service." 1.
Configure the ADSL2+ line profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ line profile based on your needs. huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected >Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:n > Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]:1 > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: > Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)[n]:n >Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: > 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]: > Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [24544]:8000 > Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [1024]: Add profile 10 successfully
2.
Configure the ADSL2+ alarm profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ alarm profile based on your needs. huawei(config)#adsl alarm-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Link Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0] > Enable and disable the initial failure trap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1)[0]:1 > The number of failed fast retrain seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: The > The > The > The
36-26
> number number number number
of of of of
Loss of Loss of Loss of Errored
Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: Seconds (0~900) [0]:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
> The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: Add profile 10 successfully
3.
and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit
Configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile. You can configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile by running the traffic table command based on your needs. In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used.
4.
Activate the ADSL2+ port. huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/3 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#alarm-config all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. l
Configure the SCU board. The configuration of the upstream port of the SCU board shall be the same as that of the peer end. Run the auto-neg command to set the port to work in auto negotiation mode. If the port works in non auto negotiation mode, change to the SCU config mode and run the speed command to change the port rate, and run the duplex command duplex to change the port duplex mode.
l
Configure the VLAN. The ADSL2+ users of MA5600-4 adopt the PPPoE authentication. In this case, the smart VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/7 0
6.
Add the service port. All ports of ADSL2+ board 0/3 provides ADSL2+ service. To add the service port in batches, run the multi-service-port command. huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 1000 adsl 0/3 0-3163 vpi 0 vci 35 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 8 Configure the SHDSL service. The MA5600 supports the SHDSL service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the SHDSL service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "22 Configuring the SHDSL Service." 1.
Configure the SHDSL line profile. To configure the SHDSL line profile, run the shdsl line-profile add or shdsl line-profile quickadd command. huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile quickadd 10 line two-wire rate 2048 2048 psd symmetric transmission Annex-A remote disable probe disable snr-margin ds-curr 10 ds-worst 10 us-curr 10 us-worst 10 bitmap 0x03
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-27
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
2.
Configure the SHDSL alarm profile. To configure the SHDSL alarm profile, run the shdsl alarm-profile add command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
3.
Configure the SHDSL traffic profile. To configure the SHDSL traffic profile, run the traffic table command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
4.
Activate the SHDSL port. huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#alarm-config all 1 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. The SHDSL users of MA5600-4 adopt the PPPoE authentication. In this case, the smart VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1300 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1300 0/7 0
6.
Add the service port. Ports 0-30 of SHDSL board 0/5 provides the SHDSL service. To add the service ports in batches, run the multi-service-portcommand. huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 1300 shdsl 0/5 0-31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 9 Configure the multicast service. After the configuration, the following results shall be achieved: l
Users of port 0/2/2 must be authenticated, and have rights to watch two programs and to preview one program.
l
Users of port 0/2/3 do not need authenticating.
1.
Configure the xDSL. In this example, it is unnecessary to configure the xDSL. The default line profile (profile 1002) is used.
2.
Configure the VLAN. l
Create a smart VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart
l
Set the VLAN upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/7 0
l
Configure the native VLAN. huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 1
l
Create a traffic profile. huawei(config)#traffic table index 8 ip car off priority 5 priority-policy Pvc-Setting
l
Add ADSL2+ ports 0/2/2 and 0/2/3 to VLAN 100. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/2 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/3 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
3.
Configure the multicast service. l
36-28
Enable the multicast proxy function. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp mode proxy l
Set the upstream port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port
l
0/7/0 100
Set the upstream port to work in program mode. huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port-mode program
l
Configure the program library. huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program2 ip 224.1.1.2 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program3 ip 224.1.1.3 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0
l
Configure the authority profile. huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program1 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program2 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program3 preview
l
Configure the preview parameters. In this example, set the preview duration for program 3 as 150s, the number of preview attempts as 6 each day and the preview interval as 60s. huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-duration 150 huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-times 6 huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-interval 60
To set the time to clear the previous preview attempts, run the igmp preview autoreset-time command. In this example, set the time to 00:00:00. huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview auto-reset-time 00:00:00 l
Configure the user data. huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/3 adsl 0 35 no-auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/2 adsl 0 35 auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile port 0/2/2 profile-name profile0
Step 10 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
36.7 Configuring MA5600-5 The following shows how to configure MA5600-5.
Procedure Step 1 Confirm the board. huawei>enable huawei#config huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 2 Configure the NMS. 1. Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-29
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example l
Create the NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
l
Enter NMS VLAN interface mode. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10
l
Configure the IP address of the NMS VLAN interface. huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 10.8.176.6 255.255.255.0
2.
Add the route. l
Configure the route destined to the NMS (Trap destination host). huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the time server. huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the log host. huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.56.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.57.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
3.
Add the ACL rule. huawei(config)#acl 3010 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source any destination any huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule deny ip source any destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.39 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.42 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.56.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.57.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#quit huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/0 huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/1
4.
Configure the SNMP. l
Configure the community name and access authority. huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
l
Configure the contact information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075512345678
l
Configure the device local information. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Configure the SNMP version. Here, the SNMP version must be the same as that of NMS. In this example, the NMS version is set as SNMP V2C. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
5.
Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
6. 36-30
Set the trap destination address. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36 MSTP Networking Example
huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.38 securityname public huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.39 securityname public
7.
Set the trap source address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 10
Step 3 Configure the time server. huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.38 source-interface vlanif 10 huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.42 source-interface vlanif 10
Step 4 Configure the log host. huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost
add 217.188.56.40 syslog-1 activate ip 217.188.56.40 add 217.188.57.40 syslog-2 activate ip 217.188.57.40
Step 5 Configure the EMU. This section takes the fan and PS4845 power supply as examples to show how to configure the EMU. By default, both the primary and secondary node addresses of the fan EMU are 0. In this example, suppose they are 1. In this case, you need to set the DIP switch of the node address on the fan monitoring unit as 1. huawei(config)#emu add 0 power4845 0 0 fore huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 1 back huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-powe4845-0)#power module-num 2 1 2 huawei(config-if-power4845-0)#quit
Step 6 Configure the QinQ leased line service. MA5600-1 and MA5600-5 serve two branches of a company to provide the QinQ leased line service. 1.
Create VLAN 50. huawei(config)#vlan 50 mux
2.
Set VLAN50 as QinQ VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan attrib 50 q-in-q
3.
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 50 0/7 0
4.
Add the service port. To add the service port, run the service-port command. Note that the VPI and VCI values of the service port must be the same as those on the modem. The QinQ VLAN supports the PVC-priority scheduling policy only. In this case, select the profile that supports PVC-priority policy. huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car off priority 0 priority-policy pvcSetting huawei(config)#service-port vlan 50 shdsl 0/5/31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
Step 7 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
36-31
36 MSTP Networking Example
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
36.8 Verification All services configured on all DSLAMs run in the normal state.
36-32
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37
37 Subtending Networking Example
Subtending Networking Example
About This Chapter This chapter describes the subtending networking example supported by the MA5600. 37.1 Networking The section describes a sample subtended network. 37.2 Data Plan The section describes the data plan for the sample subtended network. 37.3 Configuring MA5600-1 The section describes how to configure the MA5600-1. 37.4 Configuring MA5600-2 The section describes how to configure the MA5600-2. 37.5 Configuring MA5600-3 The section describes how to configure the MA5600-3. 37.6 Configuring MA5600-4 The section describes how to configure the MA5600-4. 37.7 Verification All services configured on all DSLAMs run in the normal state.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-1
37 Subtending Networking Example
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37.1 Networking The section describes a sample subtended network. As shown in Figure 37-1: l
The MA5600-1 is subtended with MA5600-2 through the GE port on the SCU board.
l
The MA5600-2 is subtended with MA5600-3 through the GE port on the SCU board.
Figure 37-1 shows a sample subtended network of the MA5600.
37-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
Figure 37-1 Sample subtended network of the MA5600
ISP1 ISP2 ISP3
Multicast server
SoftSwitch
DHCP server
iManager N2000
IP
LAN switch BRAS
2
3
5
6
A D G E
A D G E
S A H I E U A G
7
5
0
0
S H E A
1
SCU
6 7 A I U A
2
3
5
A D L A
A D G E
A D G E
S H E A
1
MMX
STB
2
3
5
A D G E
A D G E
S H E A
0 1
TV
PC
MA5600-2
7 0
SCU Ephone
MA5600-4
7
SCU
ATM-DSLAM
HG
SCU
MA5600-1
14
0
7
MA5600-3
ADSL2+ modem
PC
37.2 Data Plan The section describes the data plan for the sample subtended network. Table 37-1 lists the service and data plan of MA5600 for the sample subtended network in Figure 37-1.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
Table 37-1 Data plan for the sample subtended network MA5600-1 Service
GE port of the SCU board
37-4
MA5600-3
l
ADSL2+ service
l
ADSL2+ service
l
ADSL2+ service
l
SHDSL service
l
SHDSL service
l
SHDSL service
l
VDSL service
l
l
Multicast service
l
QinQ leased line service (for leased line interconne ction between MA5600 and MA5600 -4)
Stacking wholesale service
l
Triple Play service
l
Inband NMS address
MA5600-2
MA5600-4
ATMDSLAM
QinQ leased line service (for leased line interconnectio n between MA5600-4 and MA5600-1)
ADSL
Multicast service
10.8.176.2
10.8.176.3
10.8.176.4
10.8.176.5
10.8.176.6
255.255.255. 0
255.255.255. 0
255.255.255. 0
255.255.255. 0
255.255.255. 0
Gateway:
Gateway:
Gateway:
Gateway:
Gateway:
10.8.176.1/24
10.8.176.1/24
10.8.176.1/24
10.8.176.1/24
10.8.176.1/24
Upstream: 0/7/0
Upstream: 0/7/0
Upstream: 0/7/0
Upstream: 0/7/0
-
Subtending: 0/7/1
Subtending: 0/7/1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
VLAN
MA5600-1
MA5600-2
MA5600-3
MA5600-4
ATMDSLAM
NMS: 10
NMS: 10
NMS: 10
NMS: 10
-
QinQ: 50
Stacking: 60-62 (inner label: 111-113)
Multicast: 100
QinQ: 50
Multicast: 100 ADSL2+: 1000-1063 (adopt VLAN authenticatio n) SHDSL: 1300-1330 (adopt VLAN authenticatio n)
Slot and port
37 Subtending Networking Example
Triple Play: 100-102 ADSL2+: 1000 (adopt PPPoE authentication )
ADSL2+: 1000 (adopt PPPoE authentication ) SHDSL: 1300 (adopt PPPoE authentication )
SHDSL: 1300 (adopt PPPoE authentication )
ADSL2+: 0/3
ADSL2+: 0/3
ADSL2+: 0/3
SHDSL: 0/5
SHDSL: 0/5
SHDSL: 0/5
QinQ: 0/5/31
Stacking:
Multicast: 0/2/2, 0/2/3
0/2/0-10 (map VLAN 60, ISP1)
QinQ: 0/5/31
ADSL: 0/14
0/2/11-20 (map VLAN 61, ISP2) 0/2/21-30 (map VLAN 62, ISP3) Triple Play: 0/2/31 NMS host
195.71.131.38 and 195.71.131.39
Log host
217.188.56.40 and 217.188.57.40
Time server
193.189.251.38 and 193.189.251.42
EMU
DC DIS monitoring, fan monitoring
DHCP server
DHCP server1: 10.1.1.2 (active), 10.1.1.3 (standby) Gateway: 10.1.1.1/24 DHCP server2: 10.4.4.2 (active), 10.4.4.3 (standby) Gateway: 10.4.4.1/24
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
MA5600-1 Upper layer device
MA5600-2
MA5600-3
MA5600-4
ATMDSLAM
The upper layer device supports the DHCP Option82 function. The BRAS supports the PITP, Stacking, and QinQ function. The BRAS supports inner and outer VLAN tags. The VLAN ID of the traffic flow sent from the IP network to the DSLAM is 100. The upper layer device classifies the downstream traffic. Different services carry different 802.1p labels. The VLAN mapping to the DSLAM is configured at the upper layer device. The IP address of the LAN switch at the MA5600 side is 10.10.10.1/24.
NOTE
l
In this networking, MA5600-1 can be replaced with a GE switch or a BRAS.
l
The upstream port of theThe MA5600 supports the port aggregation function. In the actual network planning, you can aggregate multiple upstream ports for use.
37.3 Configuring MA5600-1 The section describes how to configure the MA5600-1.
Procedure Step 1 Confirm the board. huawei>enable huawei#config huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 2 Configure the NMS. 1.
Configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface. l
Create the NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0-1
l
Enter NMS VLAN interface mode. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10
l
Configure the IP address of the NMS interface. huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 10.8.176.2 255.255.255.0
2.
Add the route. l
Configure the route destined to the NMS (Trap destination address). huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.39 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the time server. huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
37-6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.42 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 l
Configure the route destined to the log host. huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.56.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.57.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
3.
Add the ACL rule. huawei(config)#acl 3010 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source any destination any huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule deny ip source any destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.39 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.42 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.56.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.57.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#quit huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/0 huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/1
4.
Configure the SNMP. l
Set the community name and access authority. huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
l
Set the SysContact. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075512345678
l
Set the SysLocation. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Set the SNMP version. Here, the SNMP version must be the same as that of the NMS. In this example, the SNMP version is set as SNMP V2C. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
5.
Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
6.
Set trap destination address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.38 securityname public huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.39 securityname public
7.
Set the trap source address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 10
Step 3 Configure the time server. huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.38 source-interface vlanif 10 huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.42 source-interface vlanif 10
Step 4 Configure the log host. huawei(config)#loghost add 217.188.56.40 syslog-1 huawei(config)#loghost activate ip 217.188.56.40
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-7
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
huawei(config)#loghost add 217.188.57.40 syslog-2 huawei(config)#loghost activate ip 217.188.57.40
Step 5 Configure the EMU. This section uses the fan and DC DIS monitoring as an example to show how to configure the EMU. By default, both the primary and secondary node addresses of the fan EMU are 0. In this example, suppose they are 1. In this case, you need to set the DIP switch of the node address on the fan monitoring unit as 1. huawei(config)#emu add 0 dis 0 0 fore huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 1 back huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#distribution humidity 95 10 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#distribution temperature 50 0 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#quit
Step 6 Configure the SCU subtending. MA5600-1 is subtended with MA5600-2 andMA5600-3. Therefore subtending shall be configured. huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port
60 to 62 standard vlan 60 to 62 0/7 0-1 101 to 102 standard vlan 101 to 102 0/7 0-1
Step 7 Configure the ADSL2+ service. The MA5600 supports the ADSL2+ service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the ADSL2+ service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service." 1.
Configure the ADSL2+ line profile. You can configure it based on your actual needs. huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected >Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:n > Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]:1 > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: > Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)[n]:n >Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: > 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]: > Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [24544]:8000 > Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [1024]: Add profile 10 successfully
2.
Configure the ADSL2+ alarm profile. You can configure it based on your actual needs. huawei(config)#adsl alarm-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Link Seconds (0~900) [0]:
37-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
> The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0] > Enable and disable the initial failure trap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1)[0]:1 > The number of failed fast retrain seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: Add profile 10 successfully
3.
and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit
Configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile. To configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile, run the traffic table command. In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used.
4.
Activate the ADSL2+ port. huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/3 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#alarm-config all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. l
Configure the SCU board. By default, the GE optical port of the GIU board works in full duplex mode with the rate of 1000 Mbit/s. To change the port working mode and the port rate, run the speed and duplex command in SCU board config mode. The settings must be the same as those of the peer end.
l
Configure the VLAN. The ADSL2+ users of MA5600-1 adopt the VLAN authentication. In this case, the MUX VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 to 1063 mux huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/7 0-1 huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 to 1063 0/7 0
6.
Add the service port. All ports of ADSL2+ board 0/3 provide the ADSL2+ service. To add the virtual ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-9
37 Subtending Networking Example
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#multi-service-port from-vlan 1000 port 0/3 0-63 vpi 0 vci 35 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 8 Configure the SHDSL service. The MA5600 supports the SHDSL service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the SHDSL service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter 22 Configuring the SHDSL Service. 1.
Configure the SHDSL line profile. To configure the SHDSL line profile, run the shdsl line-profile add or shdsl line-profile quickadd command. huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile quickadd 10 line two-wire rate 2048 2048 psd symmetric transmission Annex-A remote disable probe disable snr-margin ds-curr 10 ds-worst 10 us-curr 10 us-worst 10 bitmap 0x03
2.
Configure the SHDSL alarm profile. To configure the SHDSL alarm profile, run the shdsl alarm-profile add command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
3.
Configure the SHDSL traffic profile. To configure the SHDSL traffic profile, run the traffic table command. In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used.
4.
Activate the SHDSL port. huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#alarm-config all 1 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. The SHDSL users of MA5600-1 adopt the VLAN authentication. In this case, the MUX VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1300 to 1330 mux huawei(config)#port vlan 1300 0/7 0-1 huawei(config)#port vlan 1301 to 1330 0/7 0
6.
Add the service port. l
Ports 0-31 of SHDSL board 0/5 provide the SHDSL service.
l
To add the service ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command.
huawei(config)#multi-service-port from-vlan 1300 port 0/5 0-31 vpi 0 vci 35 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 9 Configuring the QinQ leased line service. MA5600-1 and MA5600-4 serve two branches of a company to provide the QinQ leased line service. 1.
Create VLAN 50. huawei(config)#vlan 50 mux
2.
Set VLAN 50 as QinQ VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan attrib 50 q-in-q
3.
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 50 0/7 0
4. 37-10
Add the service port. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
To add the virtual port, run the service-port command. Note that the VPI and VCI values of the virtual port must be the same as those on the modem. The QinQ VLAN supports the PVC-priority scheduling policy only. In this case, select the profile that supports PVC-priority policy. huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car off priority 0 priority-policy pvcSetting huawei(config)#service-port vlan 50 shdsl 0/5/31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
Step 10 Configure the multicast service. After the configuration, the following results shall be achieved: l
Users of port 0/2/2 need to be authenticated, and have rights to watch two programs and to preview one program.
l
Users of port 0/2/3 do not need to be authenticated.
1.
Configure the xDSL. In this example, it is unnecessary to configure the xDSL. The default line profile (profile 1002) is used.
2.
Configure the VLAN. l
Create a VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart
l
Configure the VLAN upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/7 0-1
l
Configure the native VLAN. NOTE
When the VLAN ID of the tag packet is the same as that of the native VLAN of the egress, the egress will remove the tag of the packet. That is, the tagged packet becomes to the untagged packet (without VLAN ID) after the tagged packet passes through the egress. huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-giu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 100 huawei(config-if-giu-0/7)#native-vlan 1 vlan 100 l
Create the traffic profile. huawei(config)#traffic table index 8 ip car off priority 5 priority-policy Pvc-Setting
l
Add ADSL2+ ports 0/0/2 and 0/0/3 to VLAN 100. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/2 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 txcttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/3 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 txcttr 8
3.
Configure the multicast service. l
Enable the multicast proxy function. huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp mode proxy
l
Set the upstream port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/7/0 100
l
Set the upstream port to work in program mode. huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port-mode program
l
Configure the program library. huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program2 ip 224.1.1.2 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-11
37 Subtending Networking Example
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program3 ip 224.1.1.3 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 l
Configure the authority profile. huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program1 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program2 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program3 preview
l
Set the preview parameters. In this example, set the preview duration for program 3 as 150s, the number of preview attempts as 6 each day, and the preview interval as 60s. huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-duration 150 huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-times 6 huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-interval 60
To set the time to clear the previous preview attempts, run the igmp preview autoreset-time command. In this example, set the time to 00:00:00. huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview auto-reset-time 00:00:00 l
Configure the multicast user. huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/3 no-auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/2 auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile port 0/2/2 profile-name profile0
Step 11 Configure the subtending multicast service. 1.
Set the upstream port. The upstream port is already configured in 10.3.
2.
Configure the IGMP proxy. The IGMP proxy is already configured in 10.3.
3.
Configure the program library. The program library is already configured in 10.3.
4.
Configure the multicast for the subtending port. l
Specify a subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port 0/7/1
l
Modify a subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port modify 0/7/1 static enable
l
Add programs for the static subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp static-join cascade-port 0/7/1 ip 224.1.1.1 huawei(config-btv)#igmp static-join cascade-port 0/7/1 ip 224.1.1.2 huawei(config-btv)#igmp static-join cascade-port 0/7/1 ip 224.1.1.3
Step 12 Save the data. huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
37.4 Configuring MA5600-2 The section describes how to configure the MA5600-2.
37-12
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
Procedure Step 1 Confirm the board. huawei>enable huawei#config huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 2 Configure the NMS. 1.
Configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface. l
Create the NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0-1
l
Enter NMS VLAN interface mode. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10
l
Configure the IP address of the NMS interface. huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 10.8.176.3 255.255.255.0
2.
Add the route. l
Configure the route destined to the NMS (Trap destination address). huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.39 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the time server. huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.42 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the log host. huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.56.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.57.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
3.
Add the ACL rule. huawei(config)#acl 3010 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source any destination any huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule deny ip source any destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.39 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.42 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.56.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.57.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#quit huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/0 huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/1
4.
Configure the SNMP. l
Set the community name and access authority. huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
l
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Set the SysContact. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-13
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075512345678 l
Set the SysLocation. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Set the SNMP version. Here, the SNMP version must be the same as that of the NMS. In this example, the SNMP version is set as SNMP V2C. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
5.
Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
6.
Set trap destination address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.38 securityname public huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.39 securityname public
7.
Set trap source address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 10
Step 3 Configure the time server. huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.38 source-interface vlanif 10 huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.42 source-interface vlanif 10
Step 4 Configure the log host. huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost
add 217.188.56.40 syslog-1 activate ip 217.188.56.40 add 217.188.57.40 syslog-2 activate ip 217.188.57.40
Step 5 Configure EMU. This section uses the fan and DC DIS monitoring as an example to show how to configure the EMU. By default, both the primary and secondary node addresses of the fan EMU are 0. In this example, suppose they are 1. In this case, you need to set the DIP switch of the node address on the fan monitoring unit as 1. huawei(config)#emu add 0 dis 0 0 fore huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 1 back huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#distribution humidity 95 10 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#distribution temperature 50 0 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#quit
Step 6 Configure SCU subtending MA5600-2 is subtended with MA5600-3. Therefore subtending shall be configured transparently transmit the VLAN data of MA5600-3. There are four VLANs configured on MA5600-3, with the VLAN ID of 10, 100, 1000 and 1300. These VLAN are already configured with subtending, and it is unnecessary to configure them again. Step 7 Configure the ADSL2+ service. The MA5600 supports the ADSL2+ service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the ADSL2+ service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter 21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service. 37-14
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1.
37 Subtending Networking Example
Configure the ADSL2+ line profile. You can configure it based on your actual needs. huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected >Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:n > Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]:1 > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: > Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)[n]:n >Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: > 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]: > Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [24544]:8000 > Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [1024]: Add profile 10 successfully
2.
Configure the ADSL2+ alarm profile. You can configure it based on your actual needs. huawei(config)#adsl alarm-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Link Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0] > Enable and disable the initial failure trap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1)[0]:1 > The number of failed fast retrain seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: Add profile 10 successfully
3.
and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit
Configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile. To configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile, run the traffic table command.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-15
37 Subtending Networking Example
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used. 4.
Activate the ADSL2+ port. huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/3 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#alarm-config all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. l
Configure the SCU board. By default, the GE optical port of the GIU board works in full duplex mode with the rate of 1000 Mbit/s. To change the port working mode and the port rate, run the speed and duplex command in SCU board config mode. The settings must be the same as those of the peer end.
l
Configure the VLAN. The ADSL2+ users of MA5600-1 adopt the VLAN authentication. In this case, the MUX VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/7 0-1
6.
Add the service port. All ports of ADSL2+ board 0/3 provide the ADSL2+ service. To add the virtual ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command. huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 1000 adsl 0/3 0-63 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 8 Configure the SHDSL service. The MA5600 supports the SHDSL service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the SHDSL service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter "22 Configuring the SHDSL Service." 1.
Configure the SHDSL line profile. To configure the SHDSL line profile, run the shdsl line-profile add or shdsl line-profile quickadd command. huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile quickadd 10 line two-wire rate 2048 2048 psd symmetric transmission Annex-A remote disable probe disable snr-margin ds-curr 10 ds-worst 10 us-curr 10 us-worst 10 bitmap 0x03
2.
Configure the SHDSL alarm profile. To configure the SHDSL alarm profile, run the shdsl alarm-profile add command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
3.
Configure the SHDSL traffic profile. To configure the SHDSL traffic profile, run the traffic table command. In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used.
4.
Activate the SHDSL port. huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#alarm-config all 1 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#activate all 10 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#quit
37-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
5.
37 Subtending Networking Example
Configure the upstream port. The SHDSL users of MA5600-2 adopt the PPPoE authentication. In this case, the smart VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1300 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1300 0/7 0-1
6.
Add the service port. l
Ports 0-31 of SHDSL board 0/5 provide the SHDSL service.
l
To add the service ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command.
huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 1300 shdsl 0/5 0-31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 9 Configure the stacking multi-ISP wholesale service. l
ISP1 provides users of ports 0/0/0 to 0/1/10 with the multi-ISP wholesale service.
l
ISP2 provides users of ports 0/0/11 to 0/1/20 with the multi-ISP wholesale service.
l
ISP3 provides users of ports 0/0/21 to 0/1/30 with the multi-ISP wholesale service.
1.
Create a stacking VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 60 to 62 smart huawei(config)#vlan attrib 60 to 62 stacking huawei(config)#stacking outer-ethertype 0x8000
2.
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 60 to 62 0/7 0
3.
Add the service port. huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 60 adsl 0/2 0-10 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 61 adsl 0/2 11-20 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 62 adsl 0/2 21-30 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
4.
Configure the inner label. huawei(config)#stacking label vlan 60 baselabel 111 huawei(config)#stacking label vlan 61 baselabel 112 huawei(config)#stacking label vlan 62 baselabel 113
Step 10 Configure the triple play service. After the configuration, the following results shall be achieved: Uses of port 0/2/31 can watch the programs stored on servers 224.1.1.1 and 224.1.1.2, and can preview the programs stored on server 224.1.1.3. 1.
Configure the upstream port and the VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port
2.
100 smart vlan 100 0/7 0-1 101 mux vlan 101 0/7 0 102 smart vlan 102 0/7 0
Configure the traffic table. The voice service has the highest priority, and the network access service has the lowest priority. Presume that the network access service uses traffic table 6, with the priority of 0. The following shows how to create the new traffic tables for the voice service and video service respectively. huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car 1024 priority 7 priority-policy Pvc-Setting
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-17
37 Subtending Networking Example
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#traffic table index 8 ip car off priority 5 priority-policy PvcSetting
3.
Configure the service port. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 101 adsl 0/2/31 vpi 0 vci 36 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 102 adsl 0/2/31 vpi 0 vci 37 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
4.
Configure DHCP relay mode for video service. l
Enable DHCP mode. huawei(config)#dhcp mode layer-3 option-60
l
Configure the DHCP server. huawei(config)#dhcp-server 1 ip 10.1.1.2 10.1.1.3 huawei(config)#dhcp domain video huawei(config-dhcp-domain-video)#dhcp-server 1
l
Configure the gateway mapped to the DHCP domain. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 100 huawei(config-if-vlanif100)#ip address 10.1.1.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif100)#dhcp domain video gateway 10.1.1.1
l
Enable DHCP Option82. huawei(config)#dhcp option82 enable
5.
Configure DHCP relay mode for voice service. l
Configure the DHCP server. huawei(config)#dhcp-server 2 ip 10.4.4.2 10.4.4.3 huawei(config)#dhcp domain voice huawei(config-dhcp-domain-voice)#dhcp-server 2
l
Configure the gateway mapped to the DHCP domain. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 102 huawei(config-if-vlanif102)#ip address 10.4.4.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif102)#dhcp domain voice gateway 10.4.4.1
l
Enable the DHCP option82. huawei(config)#dhcp option82 enable
6.
Configure the video service. huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 100 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#quit huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp mode proxy huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/7/0 100 huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port-mode program huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program2 ip 224.1.1.2 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program3 ip 224.1.1.3 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program1 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program2 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program3 preview huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/31 auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile port 0/2/31 profile-name profile0
Step 11 Configure the subtending multicast service. 37-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1.
37 Subtending Networking Example
Configure the upstream port. The upstream port is already configured in 10.6.
2.
Configure the IGMP proxy. The IGMP proxy is already configured in 10.6.
3.
Configure the program library. The program library is already configured in 10.6
4.
Configure the multicast for the subtending port. l
Specify a subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port 0/7/1
l
Modify a subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp cascade-port modify 0/7/1 static enable
l
Add programs for the static subtending port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp static-join cascade-port 0/7/1 ip 224.1.1.1 huawei(config-btv)#igmp static-join cascade-port 0/7/1 ip 224.1.1.2 huawei(config-btv)#igmp static-join cascade-port 0/7/1 ip 224.1.1.3
Step 12 Save the data. huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
37.5 Configuring MA5600-3 The section describes how to configure the MA5600-3.
Procedure Step 1 Confirm the board. huawei>enable huawei#config huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 2 Configure the NMS. 1.
Configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface. l
Create the NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
l
Enter NMS VLAN interface mode. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10
l
Configure the IP address of the NMS interface. huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 10.8.176.4 255.255.255.0
2.
Add the route. l
Configure the route destined to the NMS (Trap destination address). huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.39 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the time server. huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-19
37 Subtending Networking Example
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.42 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 l
Configure the route destined to the log host. huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.56.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.57.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
3.
Add the ACL rule. huawei(config)#acl 3010 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source any destination any huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule deny ip source any destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.39 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.42 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.56.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.57.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#quit huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/0 huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/1
4.
Configure the SNMP. l
Set the community name and access authority. huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
l
Set the SysContact. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075512345678
l
Set the SysLocation. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Set the SNMP version. Here, the SNMP version must be the same as that of the NMS. In this example, the SNMP version is set as SNMP V2C. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
5.
Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
6.
Set trap destination address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.38 securityname public huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.39 securityname public
7.
Set trap source address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 10
Step 3 Configure the time server. huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.38 source-interface vlanif 10 huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.42 source-interface vlanif 10
Step 4 Configure the log host. huawei(config)#loghost add 217.188.56.40 syslog-1 huawei(config)#loghost activate ip 217.188.56.40
37-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
huawei(config)#loghost add 217.188.57.40 syslog-2 huawei(config)#loghost activate ip 217.188.57.40
Step 5 Configure EMU. This section uses the fan and DC DIS monitoring as an example to show how to configure the EMU. By default, both the primary and secondary node addresses of the fan EMU are 0. In this example, suppose they are 1. In this case, you need to set the DIP switch of the node address on the fan monitoring unit as 1. huawei(config)#emu add 0 dis 0 0 fore huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 1 back huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#distribution humidity 95 10 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#distribution temperature 50 0 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#quit
Step 6 Configure the ADSL2+ service. The MA5600 supports the ADSL2+ service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the ADSL2+ service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter 21 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service. 1.
Configure the ADSL2+ line profile. You can configure it based on your actual needs. huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected >Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]:n > Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]:1 > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: > Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)[n]:n >Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: > 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]: > Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:n > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~32000 Kbps) [24544]:8000 > Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~3000 Kbps) [1024]: Add profile 10 successfully
2.
Configuring the ADSL2+ alarm profile. You can configure it based on your actual needs. huawei(config)#adsl alarm-profile add 10 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Link Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0] > Enable and disable the initial failure trap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1)[0]:1 > The number of failed fast retrain seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-21
37 Subtending Networking Example
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in fast mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit rate in interleaved mode (0~31968kbps) [0]: > The number of Loss of Frame Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Signal Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Loss of Power Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of Errored Seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of severely errored seconds (0~900) [0]: > The number of unavailable seconds (0~900) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of positive difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in fast mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: > Threshold of negative difference between the current rate in interleaved mode (0~2968kbps) [0]: Add profile 10 successfully
3.
and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit and the past transmit
Configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile. To configure the ADSL2+ traffic profile, run the traffic table command. In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used.
4.
Activate the ADSL2+ port. huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/3 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#alarm-config all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#activate all profile-index 10 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/3)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. l
Configure the SCU board. By default, the GE optical port of the GIU board works in full duplex mode with the rate of 1000 Mbit/s. To change the port working mode and the port rate, run the speed and duplex command in SCU board config mode. The settings must be the same as those of the peer end.
l
Configure the VLAN. The ADSL2+ users of MA5600-1 adopt the VLAN authentication. In this case, the MUX VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/7 0
6.
Add the service port. All ports of ADSL2+ board 0/3 provides the ADSL2+ service. To add the virtual ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command. huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 1000 adsl 0/3 0-63 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 7 Configure the SHDSL service. The MA5600 supports the SHDSL service of multiple encapsulation modes, such as IPoA, PPPoA, IPoE, and PPPoE. This section takes the PPPoE mode as an example to describe how to configure the SHDSL service. For other encapsulation modes, see the chapter 22 Configuring the SHDSL Service. 37-22
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
1.
37 Subtending Networking Example
Configure the SHDSL line profile. To configure the SHDSL line profile, run the shdsl line-profile add or shdsl line-profile quickadd command. huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile quickadd 10 line two-wire rate 2048 2048 psd symmetric transmission Annex-A remote disable probe disable snr-margin ds-curr 10 ds-worst 10 us-curr 10 us-worst 10 bitmap 0x03
2.
Configure the SHDSL alarm profile. To configure the SHDSL alarm profile, run the shdsl alarm-profile add command. In this example, the default profile (profile 1) is used.
3.
Configure the SHDSL traffic profile. To configure the SHDSL traffic profile, run the traffic table command. In this example, the default profile (profile 6) is used.
4.
Activate the SHDSL port. huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/5 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#alarm-config all 1 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#activate all 10 huawei(config-if-shdsl-0/5)#quit
5.
Configure the upstream port. The SHDSL users of MA5600-3 adopt the PPPoE authentication. In this case, the smart VLAN is used to identify the users. huawei(config)#vlan 1300 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1300 0/7 0-1
6.
Add the service port. l
Ports 0-31 of SHDSL board 0/5 provide the SHDSL service.
l
To add the service ports in batches, run the multi-service-port command.
huawei(config)#multi-service-port vlan 1300 shdsl 0/5 0-31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Step 8 Configure the multicast service. After the configuration, the following results shall be achieved: l
Users of port 0/2/2 need to be authenticated, and have rights to watch two programs and to preview one program.
l
Users of port 0/2 do not need to be authenticated.
1.
Configure the xDSL. In this example, it is unnecessary to configure the xDSL. The default line profile (profile 1002) is used.
2.
Configure the VLAN. l
Create a smart VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart
l
Set the VLAN upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/7 0
l
Configure the native VLAN. huawei(config)#interface scu 0/7 huawei(config-if-scu-0/7)#native-vlan 0 vlan 100
l
Create the traffic profile. huawei(config)#traffic table index 8 ip car off priority 5 priority-policy pvc-Setting
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-23
37 Subtending Networking Example l
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Add ADSL2+ port 2 and 3 to VLAN 100. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/2 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 txcttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 adsl 0/2/3 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 txcttr 8
3.
Configure the multicast service l
Enable the multicast proxy function. huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp mode proxy
l
Configure the upstream port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port
l
0/7/0
100
Configure the upstream port to work in program mode. huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port-mode program
l
Configure the program library. huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program2 ip 224.1.1.2 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program3 ip 224.1.1.3 vlan 100 bind 0/7/0
l
Configure the authority profile. huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program1 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program2 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program3 preview
l
Configure the preview parameters. In this example, set the preview duration for program 3 as 150s, the number of preview attempts as 6 each day, and the preview interval as 60s. huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-duration 150 huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-times 6 huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview program name program3 preview-interval 60
To set the time to clear the previous preview attempts, run the igmp preview autoreset-time command. In this example, set the time to 00:00:00. huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview auto-reset-time 00:00:00 l
Configure the user data. huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/3 no-auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/2/2 auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile port 0/2/2 profile-name profile0
Step 9 Save the data. huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
37.6 Configuring MA5600-4 The section describes how to configure the MA5600-4.
37-24
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
Procedure Step 1 Confirm the board. huawei>enable huawei#config huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 2 Configure the NMS. 1.
Configure the IP address of the inband NMS interface. l
Create the NMS VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 10 standard
l
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 10 0/7 0
l
Enter NMS VLAN interface mode. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 10
l
Configure the IP address of the NMS interface. huawei(config-if-vlanif10)#ip address 10.8.176.5 255.255.255.0
2.
Add the route. l
Configure the route destined to the NMS (Trap destination address). huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 195.71.131.39 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the time server. huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.38 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 193.189.251.42 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
l
Configure the route destined to the log host. huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.56.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1 huawei(config)#ip route-static 217.188.57.40 255.255.255.255 10.8.176.1 preference 1
3.
Add the ACL rule. huawei(config)#acl 3010 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source any destination any huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule deny ip source any destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 195.71.131.39 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.38 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 193.189.251.42 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.56.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#rule permit ip source 217.188.57.40 0.0.0.0 destination 10.8.176.2 0.0.0.0 huawei(config-acl-adv-3010)#quit huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/0 huawei(config)#packet-filter inbound ip-group 3010 port 0/7/1
4.
Configure the SNMP. l
Set the community name and access authority. huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
l
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Set the SysContact. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-25
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075512345678 l
Set the SysLocation. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen China
l
Set the SNMP version. Here, the SNMP version must be the same as that of the NMS. In this example, the SNMP version is set as SNMP V2C. huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
5.
Enable trap sending. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
6.
Set trap destination address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.38 securityname public huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 195.71.131.39 securityname public
7.
Set trap source address. huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 10
Step 3 Configure the time server. huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.38 source-interface vlanif 10 huawei(config)#ntp-service unicast-server 193.189.251.42 source-interface vlanif 10
Step 4 Configure the log host. huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost
add 217.188.56.40 syslog-1 activate ip 217.188.56.40 add 217.188.57.40 syslog-2 activate ip 217.188.57.40
Step 5 Configure EMU. This section uses the fan and DC DIS monitoring as an example to show how to configure the EMU. By default, both the primary and secondary node addresses of the fan EMU are 0. In this example, suppose they are 1. In this case, you need to set the DIP switch of the node address on the fan monitoring unit as 1. huawei(config)#emu add 0 dis 0 0 fore huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 1 back huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#distribution humidity 95 10 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#distribution temperature 50 0 huawei(config-if-dis-0)#quit
Step 6 Configure the QinQ leased line service. MA5600-4 and MA5600-1 serve two branches of a company to provide the QinQ leased line service. 1.
Create VLAN 50. huawei(config)#vlan 50 mux
2.
Set VLAN 50 as QinQ VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan attrib 50 q-in-q
3.
Add the upstream port. huawei(config)#port vlan 50 0/7 0
4.
Add the service port. To add the virtual port, run the service-port command. Note that the VPI and VCI values of the virtual port must be the same as those on the modem.
37-26
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
37 Subtending Networking Example
The QinQ VLAN supports the PVC-priority scheduling policy only. In this case, select the profile that supports PVC-priority policy. huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car off priority 0 priority-policy pvcSetting huawei(config)#service-port vlan 50 shdsl 0/5/31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
Step 7 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
37.7 Verification All services configured on all DSLAMs run in the normal state.
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
37-27
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
A
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and Abbreviations
A AAA
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting
ABR
Area Border Router
ACL
Access Control List
B BDR
Backup Designated Router
BMS
HUAWEI iManager N2000 broadband integrated network management system
BPDU
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BRAS
Broadband Remote Access Server
BRAS
Broadband Remote Access Server
BRAS
Broadband Remote Access Server
BTV
Broadband TV
C
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
CAR
Committed Access Rate
CC
Connection Confirm
CFM
Connectivity Fault Management
CIDR
Classless Inter-Domain Routing
CLI
Command Line Interface
COS
Class of Service
CPE
Customer Premises Equipment
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
A-1
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Code
D DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHCP option82
DHCP relay agent option 82
DoD
Downstream on Demand
DoS
Denial of Service
DR
Designated Router
DSLAM
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DU
Downstream Unsolicited
D-V
Distance Vector Routing Algorithm
E EMU
Environment Monitoring Unit
F FE
Fast Ethernet
FEC
Forward Error Correction
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
FIFO
First In First Out
G GE
Gigabit Ethernet
I
A-2
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol
IGP
Interior Gateway Protocol
IMA
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
IP
Internet Protocol
IPoA
Internet Protocol Over ATM
IPoE
IP over Ethernet Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
ISP
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
Internet Service Provider
L LAN
Local Area Network
LSA
Link State Advertisement
LSDB
Link State DataBase
LSP
Label Switched Path
M MA
Maintenance Association
MAC
Medium Access Control
MBS
Maximum Burst Size
MD
Maintenance Domain
MDU
Multi-dwelling Unit
MEP
Maintenance association End Point
MIB
Management Information Base
MIP
Maintenance association Interspace Point
MRU
Maximum Receive Unit
MSTP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
N NBMA
Non Broadcast Multiple Access
NHLFE
Next Hop Label Forwarding Entry
NIC
Network Information Center
NMS
Network Management System
O OSPF
Open Shortest Path First
P PITP
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Policy Information Transfer Protocol
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
A-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
PPPoA
Point-to-Point Protocol over ATM
PPPoE
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PQ
Priority Queuing
PPP
Peer-Peer Protocol
PSN
Packet Switched Network
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
Q QoS
Quality of Service
R RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial in User Service
RARP
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol
RFC
Remote Feature Control
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RMON
Remote Network Monitoring
S SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SSH
Secure Shell
STB
Set Top Box
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
T TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TOS
Type of Service
TTL
Time To Live
U UDP
A-4
User Datagram Protocol
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
V VLAN
Virtual LAN
VOD
Video On Demand
VT
Virtual Terminal
VTP
VLAN Trunk Protocol
VTY
Virtual Type Terminal
W WRR
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Weighted Round Robin
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
A-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Index
Index A AAA, 8-2 advantage, 8-3 configuring authentication scheme, 8-16 creating domain, 8-17 AAA, configuring, 8-16 accessible address segment, configuring, 20-11 ACL, 17-3 activating, 17-25 advanced ACL, 17-11 basic ACL, 17-10 categories, 17-3 configuring time range, 17-18 creating, 17-16 customized ACL, 17-15 layer 2 ACL, 17-13 ACL rule advanced ACL rule, 17-21 basic ACL rule, 17-20 customized ACL rule, 17-23 layer 2 ACL rule, 17-22 setting step, 17-19 adding user, 6-5 ADSL2+ activating ADSL2+ port, 21-33 adding alarm profile, 21-28 adding extended line profile, 21-25 adding line profile, 21-18 ADSL2+ port rate threshold, configuring, 21-35 configuring IPoA/IPoE conversion, 21-36 configuring port rate measurement threshold, 21-35 enabling IPoA conversion, 21-36 querying port information, 21-43 ADSL2+ alarm profile,adding, 21-28 ADSL2+ line profile, adding, 21-18 ADSL2+ port, activating, 21-33 ADSL2+, definition, 21-3 advanced ACL configuring, 17-11 advanced ACL rule, creating, 17-21 advanced RSVP-TE feature, configuring, 28-16 agent configuration, 4-8 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
definition, 4-3 anti DoS attack, enabling, 20-3 anti ICMP attack, enabling, 20-5 anti IP attack, enabling, 20-4 anti IP spoofing, enabling, 19-11 anti MAC spoofing, enabling, 19-10 apply cause of route policy, defining, 12-63 ARP, 11-2 ARP proxy configuring, 11-2 enabling, 11-6 ARP, static ARP entry, 11-5 ATM-DSLAM, configuring, 26-3 authentication scheme configuring, 8-16 specifying, 8-19 authority mode, setting, 31-52 authority of program, granting, 31-60 authority profile binding with a user, 31-58 modifying, 31-53 renaming, 31-54 unbinding from a user, 31-59 authority profile configuration modifying authority profile, 31-53 renaming authority profile, 31-54 setting authority mode, 31-52
B backup root bridge, specifying, 13-14 bandwidth management disabling, 31-50 enabling, 31-48 enabling bandwidth management, 31-48 setting upstream port bandwidth, 31-50 setting user bandwidth, 31-50 basic ACL configuring, 17-10 basic ACL rule, creating, 17-20 basic MPLS TE capability, configuring, 28-5 binding SHDSL EFM multi-port, 22-29 SHDSL multi-Pair, 22-28
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
i-1
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Index
black list, configuring, 20-8 board status, 7-2 BTV user adding, 31-55 binding with authority profile, 31-58 blocking, 31-57 deleting, 31-56 disabling the monitoring function, 31-61 granting with program authority, 31-60 modifying, 31-56 monitoring, 31-60 unblocking, 31-58
C CBR, 17-6 CFM enabling, 33-10 enabling alarm, 33-11 CLI characteristic, 3-2 display characteristic, 3-8 edit characteristic, 3-6 error prompt, 3-10 intelligent matching, 3-5 interaction characteristic, 3-7 parameter prompt, 3-7 saving history command, 3-9 CLI display characteristic, 3-8 CLI error prompt, 3-10 CLI operation clearing terminal screen, 3-18 enabling interactive command execution, 3-13 enabling trap reporting, 3-13 locking terminal, 3-18 obtaining online help information, 3-11 setting system name, 3-16 setting system time, 3-15 setting terminal type, 3-16 setting timeout exit time, 3-17 showing CPU usage, 3-19 showing memory usage, 3-20 showing version, 3-19 switching terminal language, 3-14 testing network state, 3-20 CLI trap reporting, enabling, 3-13 command line interface (CLI), 2-2 community name, setting, 4-10 configuration example remote user authentication, 8-4 configuring terminal through inband management channel, 2-15 through local serial port, 2-3 through outband management channel, 2-12 through remote serial port, 2-7 through SSH, 2-19 Connectivity Fault Management (CFM), 33-3 contact information on system, setting, 4-13 control board, resetting, 7-3 i-2
CPU usage, showing, 3-19 CR-LSP establishment, tuning, 28-25 customized ACL configuring, 17-15 customized ACL rule, creating, 17-23
D default logging interval (2 hours), 31-67 default matching sequence, 17-5 default route setting cost, 12-21 default routing metric, specifying, 12-23 default setting handshake interval, 4-19 read-only community name, 4-10 designated bridge setting parameter, 13-20 designated port setting parameter, 13-26 device protection, configuring, 13-33 device subtending, configuring, 25-5 DHCP, 10-3 setting working mode, 10-14 DHCP configuration MAC address segment mode, 10-9 option60 mode, 10-6 standard mode, 10-4 DHCP MAC address segment creating, 10-18 gateway, 10-21 range, 10-19 DHCP MAC address segment mode, configuring, 10-9 DHCP option60 domain creating, 10-16 gateway, 10-18 DHCP option60 mode, configuring, 10-6 DHCP relay, 10-3 DHCP see also DHCP relay, 10-3 DHCP server setting working mode, 10-13 DHCP server group binding MAC address segment, 10-20 binding VLAN interface, 10-15 binding with option60 domain, 10-17 creating, 10-12 DHCP standard mode, configuring, 10-4 DR priority, configuring, 12-40 dynamic MAC address aging time, 15-4
E edit characteristic, 3-6 egress configuring MPLS OAM, 34-12 EMU, configuring, 35-4 enabling MPLS, 27-11
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Encapsulation Type, 32-20 engine ID configuring for local SNMP entity, 4-17 related operations, 4-17 Ethernet OAM, configuring, 33-3 Ethernet port configuring physical attribute, 25-10 enabling aggregation, 25-16 enabling flow control, 25-13 setting native VLAN, 25-20 Ethernet port aggregation, enabling, 25-16 Ethernet port, mirroring, 25-17 extended ADSL2+ line profile, adding, 21-25
F finwait timer, 16-2 configuring, 16-3 firewall, configuring, 20-9 format of user name setting, 8-14
G general query interval, setting, 31-31 maximum response time to, 31-32 restoring to default interval (125s), 31-32
H handshake function, enabling, 4-18 handshake interval default setting, 4-19 long handshake interval, 4-19, 4-19 related operation, 4-19 setting, 4-19 short handshake interval, 4-19, 4-19 Hello packet poll interval, setting, 12-53 history command saving, 3-9 Huawei Group Management Protocol see also PITP, 19-3
unsolicited report interval, 31-37 user action report function, 31-41 IGMP snooping parameters, 31-42, 31-43 IGMP user adding, 31-55 binding with authority profile, 31-58 blocking, 31-57 disabling the monitoring function, 31-61 granting with program authority, 31-60 modifying, 31-56 monitoring, 31-60 inaccessible address segment, configuring, 20-12 inband NMS routes, 2-18 ingress configuring MPLS OAM, 34-11 intelligent matching, 3-5 interaction characteristic, 3-7 interactive command execution enabling, 3-13 interface enabling packet transmit/receive, 12-32 interval for general query restoring to default value (125s), 31-32 setting, 31-31 logging, 31-67 specific query restoring to default value (1s), 31-36 setting, 31-35 unsolicited report restoring to default value (10s), 31-38 setting, 31-37 interval for sending Hello packet, setting, 12-52 IP address inband NMS interface, 4-22 outband NMS interface, 4-20 IP address of peer router, configuring, 12-31 IP address, binding, 19-8 IP connection enabling IP packet debugging, 16-5 IP packet debugging,enabling, 16-5
L
I if-match clause of route policy, defining, 12-62 IGMP global parameters general query interval, 31-31 maximum response time to general query, 31-32 maximum response time to specific query, 31-36 number of specific queries, 31-33 preview recognition time, 31-39 proxy authorization , 31-28 robustness variable, 31-30 specific query interval, 31-35 TTL for V1 router, 31-38 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Index
layer 2 ACL configuring, 17-13 layer 2 ACL rule, creating, 17-22 leave proxy switch see proxy of IGMP leave packet, 31-43 License function license application, 1-3 license ESN, 1-7 License Server, 1-6 linktrace function, configuring, 33-20 local RSA key pair, configuring, 8-21 local serial port terminal define type, 2-5
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
i-3
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Index
network topology, 2-3 setting parameter, 2-4 starting HyperTerminal, 2-4 local SNMP engine ID, configuring, 4-17 location of system, setting, 4-13 log querying, 5-6 log host configuring, 5-3 deactivating, 5-5 deleting, 5-4 logging collecting statistics, 31-70 disabling, 31-67 enabling, 31-66 reporting, 31-69 restoring default logging interval, 31-69 setting interval, 31-67 stopping reporting, 31-70 logging configuration collecting log statistics, 31-70 configuring log reporting, 31-69 enabling logging, 31-66 setting logging interval, 31-67 loop detection function, configuring, 33-19 LSA retransmit interval between adjacent router, 12-55 LSA transmit delay, setting, 12-54 LSP type, 27-12 LTM configuring, 33-20
M MA interval for transmitting CC, 33-17 MA, configuring, 33-7 MAC address maximum count, 15-3 MAC address filtering, configuring, 15-5, 20-6 MAC address pool, configuring, 15-6 MAC address, binding, 15-5, 19-9 manager, definition, 4-2 maximum hop of MST region, setting, 13-17 maximum OSPF route count, configuring, 12-46 maximum response time to general query restoring to default value (10s), 31-33 setting, 31-32 maximum response time to specific query restoring to default value (0.8s), 31-37 setting, 31-36 MD, creating, 33-6 memory usage showing , 3-20 MEP creating, 33-8 enabling, 33-12 enabling CC transmission, 33-13 i-4
modem parameter setting called modem, 2-9 calling modem, 2-9 MPLS basic configuration, 27-10 configuring LDP, 27-15 configuring PW, 27-28 configuring static LSP, 27-12 definition, 27-2 enabling, 27-11 MPLS OAM, 34-2 detection of static LSP connectivity, 34-2 protection switchover, 34-6 MPLS OAM of egress, configuring, 34-12 MPLS OAM of ingress, configuricfg_cli_0639, 34-11 MPLS TE, 28-2 MPLS TE tunnel configuration using dynamic signaling, 28-8 MPLS TE tunnel establishment, tuning, 28-31 MSTP, 13-3 activating MSTR, 13-13 clearing statistic, 13-37 configuring device protection, 13-33 MSTR parameter, setting, 13-6 setting MSTR parameter, 13-6 setting network diameter, 13-18 setting parameter of designated bridge, 13-20 setting parameter of designated port, 13-26 setting priority, 13-15 setting working mode, 13-5 MSTP, enabling, 13-3 MSTR, activating, 13-13 MSTRsetting maximum hop , 13-17 multicast bandwidth management enabling bandwidth management, 31-48 setting upstream port bandwidth, 31-50 setting user bandwidth, 31-50 multicast base address, configuring, 33-18 multicast preview clearing logout time records, 31-65 disabling, 31-62 enabling, 31-61 restoring default auto-reset time, 31-64 setting auto-reset time, 31-63 setting parameters, 31-62 multicast user adding, 31-55 binding with authority profile, 31-58 blocking, 31-57 deleting, 31-56 disabling the monitoring function, 31-61 granting with program authority, 31-60 IGMP user deleting, 31-56 unblocking, 31-58 modifying, 31-56 monitoring, 31-60
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
unblocking, 31-58 MUX VLAN, configuring, 9-7
N NBMA adjacent router, configuring, 12-43 network diameter, setting, 13-18 network management station see manager, 4-3 network state testing, 3-20 Network Time Protocol (NTP), 14-3 NMS route, configuring, 4-21 nrt-VBR, 17-6 NTP broadcast mode, 14-3, 14-19 client, 14-20 server, 14-19 configuring access authority, 14-25 configuring master clock, 14-18 configuring NTP ID authentication, 14-16 multicast mode, 14-6 peer mode, 14-13 server/client mode, 14-9 NTP broadcast mode, configuring, 14-3, 14-19 NTP ID authentication, configuring, 14-16 NTP master clock, configuring, 14-18 NTP mode, 14-3 NTP multicast mode, configuring, 14-6 NTP peer mode, configuring, 14-13 NTP server/client mode, configuring, 14-9 number of specific queries restoring to default value (2), 31-34 setting, 31-33
O online help information, obtaining, 3-11 OSPF cost, 12-49 disabling packet transmission, 12-45 enabling logging, 12-47 enabling process, 12-39 entering OSPF area config mode, 12-41 maximum route count, 12-46 NBMA adjacent router, 12-43 router ID, 12-40 setting preference, 12-44 SPF calculation interval, 12-55 stub area, 12-43 Transparent transmission, 12-47 OSPF area config mode, entering, 12-41 OSPF cost, configuring, 12-49 OSPF logging, enabling, 12-47 OSPF packet authentication, configuring, 12-50 OSPF packet transmission, disabling, 12-45 OSPF preference, setting, 12-44 OSPF process, enabling, 12-39 OSPF route Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Index
MTU field, 12-50 packet authentication, 12-50 OSPF route import from other protocol, 12-58 setting default parameter, 12-59 OSPF router ID, setting, 12-40 OSPF routes network type, 12-48 OSPF stub area, configuring, 12-43 OSPF timer dead time between adjacent router, 12-53 Hello packet poll interval, 12-53 interval for sending Hello packet, 12-52 LSA retransmit interval, 12-55 LSA transmit delay, 12-54 subnet for area, 12-42 OSPF, configuring, 12-9 outband NMS routes, 2-14
P parameter prompt, 3-7 path cost setting calculation standard, 13-19 permitted reenter number, modifying, 6-10 poison reverse, enabling, 12-34 Policy Information Transfer Protocol (PITP), 19-3 present timeout, see TTL, 31-38 preview clearing logout time records, 31-65 disabling, 31-62 enabling, 31-61 restoring default auto-reset time, 31-64 setting auto-reset time, 31-63 setting parameters, 31-62 preview configuration clearing logout time records, 31-65 enabling preview, 31-61 setting preview auto-reset time, 31-63 setting preview parameters, 31-62 preview recognition time restoring to default value (30s), 31-40 setting, 31-39 priority for transmitting CCM/LTM, configuring, 33-16 program authority, granting, 31-60 protection group configuring tunnel protection group, 34-13 debugging information output, 34-15 manual switchover, 34-14 proxy authorization (IGMP), enabling, 31-28 proxy of IGMP leave packet, 31-43 disabling, 31-44 enabling, 31-43 proxy of IGMP report packet, 31-42 disabling, 31-43 enabling, 31-42 Huawei Technologies Proprietary
i-5
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Index
PVC and PW template, binding, 27-30
Q QoS traffic entry, 18-2
R RADIUS ANS port, 8-14 introduction, 8-3 maximum retransmit count of RADIUS request, 8-12 RADIUS request maximum retransmit count, 8-12 specifying server template, 8-8 RADIUS server IP address & port number, 8-9 shared key, 8-10 type, 8-13 user name format, 8-14 RADIUS server template specifying, 8-18 RADIUS serverresponse timeout interva of RADIUS server response timeout interval, 8-11 setting, 8-11 RADIUS, configuring, 8-7 read/write authorities, setting, 4-10 receiving host route, disabling, 12-25 recognition time of preview restoring to default value (30s), 31-40 setting, 31-39 remote serial port terminal network topology, 2-8 setting parameter, 2-9 remote serial port terminalmodem requirement , 2-7 remote serial portstarting HyperTerminal , 2-10 remote user authentication configuring, 8-1 report proxy switch see proxy of IGMP report packet, 31-42 response time to general query restoring to default value (10s), 31-33 setting, 31-32 response time to specific query restoring to default value (0.8s), 31-37 setting, 31-36 RIP clearing process statistic, 12-30 configuring additional metric, 12-35 configuring preference, 12-26 configuring RIP-2 authentication mode, 12-35 configuring timer, 12-36 configuring zero field check, 12-20 i-6
disabling receiving host route, 12-25 disabling RIP packet transmission, 12-30 enabling packet receive/transmit , 12-32 enabling poison reverse, 12-34 enabling process, 12-18 enabling split horizon, 12-33 importing route of other protocol, 12-24 resetting, 12-29 setting version, 12-19 summary route IP address, 12-32 RIP packet transmission, disabling, 12-30 RIP preference, configuring, 12-26 RIP process statistic, clearing, 12-30 RIP process, enabling, 12-18 RIP timer, configuring, 12-36 RIP version, setting, 12-19 RIP-2 authentication mode, configuring, 12-35 RMEP creating, 33-9 enabling detection, 33-15 robustness variable restoring to default value, 31-31 setting, 31-30 root bridge, specifying, 13-14 route additional metric, configuring, 12-35 route filtering policy, configuring, 12-27 route of other protocol, importing, 12-24 route policy defining, 12-60 defining apply clause, 12-63 defining if-match clause, 12-62 route policy, configuring, 12-13 route summarization between areas, 12-56 routes imported by OSPF, 12-57 rt-VBR, 17-6
S service board confirming, 7-6 deleting, 7-6 prohibiting, 7-7 resetting, 7-7 service port adding to VLAN, 9-18 adding to VLAN in batches, 9-20 setting description, 9-22 shared key of RADIUS server setting, 8-10 SHDSL activating SHDSL port, 22-30 adding alarm profile, 22-24 adding line profile, 22-21 binding alarm profile, 22-27 configuring clock mode, 22-32 querying port information, 22-31 SHDSL alarm profile, adding, 22-24
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
SHDSL alarm profile, binding, 22-27 SHDSL EFM multi-port binding, 22-29 SHDSL line profile, adding, 22-21 SHDSL multi-Pair, 22-28 SHDSL port, activating, 22-30 shelf description, setting, 7-3 smart VALN, configuring, 9-5 SNMP configuring MIB view, 4-16 configuring V3 group, 4-15 configuring V3 user, 4-14 definition, 4-2 setting version, 4-9 SNMP agent see agent, 4-8 SNMP MIB view, configuring, 4-16 SNMP V3 group, configuring, 4-15 SNMP V3 user, configuring, 4-14 SNMP version, setting, 4-9 socket buffer, configuring, 16-4 source interface for sending traps, 4-12 source route filtering, enabling, 20-5 specific query interval, setting, 31-35 maximum response time to, 31-36 times, setting, 31-33 SPF calculation interval, setting, 12-55 split horizon, enabling, 12-33 SSH advantage, 8-4 configuring local RSA key pair, 8-21 configuring public key, 8-22 configuring user, 8-24 definition, 8-3 LAN inband, 2-20 outband, 2-19 version, 8-4 WAN inband, 2-21 outband, 2-20 SSH, configuring, 8-21 standard VLAN, configuring, 9-5 static ARP entry, adding, 11-5 static MAC address, adding, 15-2 static route adding, 12-16 static route, configuring, 12-3 step of ACL rule, setting, 17-19 subboard, managing, 7-8 summary route IP address, configuring, 12-32 super VALN, configuring, 9-9 synwait timer, 16-2 configuring, 16-2 system setting contact information, 4-13 setting location information, 4-13 setting name, 3-16 Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
Index
setting time, 3-15 showing version, 3-19
T TCP connection configuring socket buffer, 16-4 enabling TCP debugging, 16-4 TCP debugging, enabling, 16-4 telnet inband NMS, 2-15 LAN, 2-12 logging in, 2-15 outband NMS, 2-12 running, 2-15 WAN, 2-13 template of RADIUS server specifying, 8-18 template of RADIUS server, specifying, 8-8 terminal clearing screen, 3-18 locking, 3-18 setting type, 3-16 switching language, 3-14 time range configuring, 17-18 timeout exit time, setting, 3-17 traffic entry configuring, 18-2 traffic suppression mode, 25-14 traffic suppression, enabling, 25-14 transparent transmission of RIP packet, enabling, 12-37 trap definition, 4-3 sending, 4-11 source interface, setting, 4-12 Triple play, 32-20 triple play service, 32-2 configuring (802.1p-based), 32-15 configuring (multi-PVC), 32-3 configuring (single PVC), 32-9 TTL (time to live), 31-38 TTL for V1 router restoring to default value (400s), 31-39 setting, 31-38 type of RADIUS server setting, 8-13
U UBR, 17-6 unsolicited report interval restoring to default value (10s), 31-38 setting, 31-37 upstream port adding to VLAN, 9-17 upstream port bandwidth, setting, 31-50 Huawei Technologies Proprietary
i-7
SmartAX MA5600/MA5603 Multi-service Access Module Configuration Guide
Index
user adding, 6-5 deleting, 6-13 disconnecting online user, 6-12 modifying bound profile, 6-7 user action report disabling, 31-42 enabling, 31-41 user attribute, 6-7 modifying appended information, 6-11 modifying level, 6-8 modifying permitted reenter number, 6-10 user authority, 6-2 user bandwidth, setting, 31-50 user level, modifying, 6-8 user management adding a BTV user, 31-55 binding authority profile, 31-58 blocking a BTV user, 31-57 granting with program authority, 31-60 modifying a BTV user, 31-56 monitoring BTV user, 31-60 user password, changing, 6-9 user profile modifying, 6-7 related operation, 6-5 user profile, adding, 6-2
creating, 9-13 type, 9-3 VLAN and PW template, binding, 27-31 VLAN attribute, configuring, 9-15
W working mode of DHCP server, setting, 10-13 working mode of DHCP, setting, 10-14 working mode of MSTP, setting, 13-5
V VDSL adding line profile, 23-24 VDSL2 activating port, 23-46 adding alarm template, 23-43 adding channel alarm profile, 23-40 adding channel profile, 23-31 adding line alarm profile, 23-37 adding line template, 23-35 binding alarm template, 23-45 definition, 23-3 querying port information, 23-47 VDSL2 alarm template, adding, 23-43 VDSL2 alarm template, binding, 23-45 VDSL2 channel alarm profile, adding, 23-40 VDSL2 channel profile, adding, 23-31 VDSL2 line alarm profile,adding, 23-37 VDSL2 line profile adding, 23-24 VDSL2 line template,adding, 23-35 VDSL2 port activating, 23-46 VDSL2 port information, querying, 23-47 VLAN, 9-3 adding service port, 9-18 adding service port in batches, 9-20 adding upstream port, 9-17 attribute, 9-4 configuring attribute, 9-15 i-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Issue 04 (2007-11-30)
